UJF-3042 - 6042MKII Maintenance Manual D501202 Ver.1.50

Service Documents
series
series
series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD.

UR L:http://mimaki .com/
D501202-15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Maintenance Manual Change Tracking
Maintenance Manual Change Tracking
Date 2017.11.10 Manual Ver. 1.5 Remark

Status Index Rev. Changes
Revised 1.3.3 1.2 A word was corrected.
Revised 1.4.1 1.1 Maintenance precaution added.
Revised 1.4.2 1.1 A word was added.
Revised 4.2.12 1.3 Adjustment procedure of the waveform added.
Added 4.2.26 1.0 Procedure of the cap cleaning added.
Revised 4.3.3 1.2 Addition of description of use of 100 cc syringe
Revised 5.1.21 1.1 List of action items added.
Revised 7.1.2 1.2 Error messages added.(No.63,64,65,67,68,79,85,86)
Revised 7.1.4 1.2 List of SYSTEM HALT added.(No.11)
Revised 8.4.1 1.1 Operation flow of the auto cleaning added.
Revised 8.5.1-P3 1.2 Operation flow of the head voltage adjustment added.
Revised 8.5.1-P6 1.2 Operation flow of the cap cleaning added.

Revised 2.1.1 1.1 Connection Diagram
Revised 8.1.6 1.1 Important Parameter No.171 added.

Revised 1.3.1 1.2 Machine name modification
Revised 1.3.8 1.3 Machine name modification, Note correction
Revised 1.4.4 1.3 3042MkIIEX added, Table corrected.
Revised 1.4.5 1.2 Machine name modification, Important correction
Revised 4.3.7 1.2 A word in the figure was corrected.
Revised 4.3.8 1.3 A word in the figure was corrected., Illustration Replacement
© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. Maintenance Manual Change Tracking P.1



Revised 1.3.3-p.2 1.1 Table corrected.
Revised 4.2.7-p.2 1.2 [Step 5] : [Caution] Changed
Revised 4.2.8-p.1 1.1 [Step 2] : A word was added.
[Step 3] : Added
Revised 5.1.11-p.2 1.1 [□Origin encoder] : Added
Added 5.1.22-p.1 1.0 New issue

Revised 1.3.1-p.1 1.1 Figure corrected.
Revised 1.3.1-p.3 1.1 A word in the figure was corrected.
Revised 1.3.2-p.1 1.1 [Ink system configuration]: Table corrected.
Revised 1.3.5-p.1 1.1 Table corrected. / Figure replaced.
Revised 2.1.2-p.1 1.1 A word was added.
Revised 3.1.1-p.3 1.1 Step 7, 8: Figure deleted.


Revised 3.1.1-p.5 1.1 A word was corrected.
Revised 3.1.3-p.1 1.1 [Caution]: A word was deleted.
Revised 3.4.1-p.1~2 1.0 New issue
Revised 4.2.1-p.1 1.0 New issue
Revised 4.2.3-p.1 1.1 A word in the figure was added.
Revised 4.2.4-p.1 1.1 Step 3: added
Revised 4.2.4-p.2 1.1 Step 5: Figure corrected.
Revised 4.2.7-p.2 1.1 Step 4: A word in the figure was added.
Step 5: [Important] added.
Revised 4.2.9-p.2 1.1 Step 13: Figure replaced. / A word was corrected.
Revised 4.2.12-p.1 1.1 Outline: [Important] added.
Revised 4.2.13-p.1 1.1 Outline: [Important] added.
Revised 4.2.17-p.1 1.1 Step 3: Figure replaced.
Revised 4.2.19-p.1 1.1 Explanation was deleted as it was for the manufacturing use.
Revised 4.2.22-p.1 1.1 Step 6: Figure added.
Revised 4.3.3-p.1~2 1.1 [Filling Hot Water] step 3: added.
Step 4: [Important] added.
Revised 4.3.7-p.1~6 1.1 Whole revised
Revised 4.3.8-p.1 1.1 [Important]: A word was added.
Step 1:corrected
Step 2: Figure corrected. / Figure added.
Revised 4.3.8-p.2 1.1 [Work procedure of horizontal (right/left) adjustment] step 2, 5: [Important] added.
Revised 5.1.3-p.1 1.1 Correction of erroneous description
Revised 5.1.9-p.1 1.1 Step 4: A word was added.
Revised 5.1.16-p.1 1.1 [Positive Pressure (Check)] was added in the table.
Revised 5.1.17-p.2 1.1 Step 12: A word was added.
Revised 5.1.18-p.1~8 1.1 512MB SD Card was added.
Revised 5.1.20-p.1 1.0 A page is added.
Revised 5.1.21-p.1 1.0 A page is added.
Revised 6.2.1-p.1~2 1.1 Reference was corrected.
Revised 6.2.9-p.2, 3 1.1 The air-bleeding method was added.
Revised 6.2.13-p.2 1.1 Step 7: [Important] added.
Revised 6.3.1-p.2 1.1 The specified belt tension was added.


Revised 7.1.2-p.1~7 1.1 [40~45, 58, 60, 63~65, 67, 68, 70~74]: corrected
[66]: deleted
Revised 7.1.3-p.1~4 1.1 [1~3, 5~10, 30]: corrected
Revised 7.1.4-p.1~6 1.1 [5~8, 12, 14, 20, 21, 32]: corrected
[13]: deleted

Released First edition

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Symbol
Rev.
Model UJF-30_6042MkII Issued 2016.08.29 Revised Remark
I. Symbol 1.0
 Outline
The following symbols are used in this manual. Understand the symbols, and be sure to observe the instructions.
Symbol Name Description
Failure to follow the instructions can, and probably will, result in death to
1. Danger personnel.
Understand the instructions thoroughly, and never fail to follow them.
Failure to observe the instructions given with this symbol can result in death or
2. Warning serious injuries to personnel.
Be sure to understand the instructions thoroughly and follow them to perform work.
Failure to observe the instructions given with this symbol can result in injuries to
3. Caution
personnel or damage to property.
Important notes on maintenance work are given with this symbol. Understand the
4. Important
instructions thoroughly, and perform maintenance work properly.
5. Tips Useful information for maintenance work is given with this symbol.
Reference Related description is given on the page shown by this symbol.

6. (1.1.1)
Page Be sure to refer to the specified page.
Indicates a precaution to be observed as a CAUTION instruction (or DANGER or

WARNING instruction). The triangle contains a mark indicating a concrete
Caution precaution.
7.
symbol Do not use it in an ambient
e.g. Hazardous voltage. atmosphere with hazard-
ous materials.
Indicates an action prohibited. A sign indicating a prohibited action is shown in or

around the circle.
Prohibited
8.
symbol
e.g. Prohibits disassembly.
Indicates an action to be taken without fail or the instructions to be observed. The

circle contains a sign indicating a particular instruction.
Indicates
9.
symbol
The cable must be
e.g. unplugged from the wall Wear the supplied goggle.
outlet.
© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. R.1.0 P.1

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Safety Precautions
Rev.
II. Safety Precautions 1.0
 Repairing by a user is strictly prohibited.

Be sure to repair the machine by a service engineer of MIMAKI. Notice a user that it is very danger to repair
or modify the machine and this may affect the print quality, additionally the machine is out of warranty. Be
sure to explain a user never to repair or modify the machine.
 A user is not allowed to install UJF-30_6042MkII. Be sure to perform the installing work by a service engi-
neer of MIMAKI.
 Use this machine with indicated power specifications.Be sure to connect the power cable plug to the
grounded outlet.
 Be sure to equip the appropriate ventilating equipment when used in a closed room or a poor ventilative
room.
 Cautions at constructing the exhaust outlet
Observe the following 2 cautions strictly to prevent machine troubles.
• The configuration of the exhaust outlet depends on the building environment.
Make sure that the opening area is more than half of the duct entrance area.
• When a closing valve or the like is mounted on exhaust outlet, be sure to open the closing valve in use of
printer.
 Be sure to use with the specified power supply.

The power supply voltage of UJF-30_6042MkII is AC100 to 240V single phase, 8A or less.
 The ink used for UJF-30_6042MkII is classified to the category of UN no.3082 and UN class 9.
Since the ink is flammable, never use fire in the location where UJF-30_6042MkII is used.
 When cleaning the ink station and head, be sure to wear the supplied goggle and gloves since you may get ink
or washing liquid in your eyes.
 If anyone drinks ink or washing liquid in mistake, vomit the person then see a doctor immediately. Do not
allow the person to swallow vomit. Then, contact the Poison Control Center
 If anyone absorbs a lot of vapor and feels bad, immediately move to a location in fresh air and then keep the
person warm and quiet. Then, see a doctor as soon as possible.

Rev.
1.0
Abnormal event occurs
 When continuously used under such abnormal conditions that smoke is generating or smells foul, fire or
electric shocks may occur. Be sure to turn off the power switch immediately, and then disconnect the power
receptacle from the plug.
Handling of the power cable
 Use the supplied power cable.

 Do not damage, break or modify the power cable. If a heavy material is placed on the power cable or heating
or drawing the cable, the cable may be broken and this may cause fire or electric shocks.
Handling of ink bottles
 Some of the ingredients (Photo polymerization initiator) have toxic consequences to aquatic organisms.
 Prevent them from leaking into natural water system or domestic wastewater.
 Request to a user to store ink bottles and waste ink in a place that is out of the reach of children.
 If ink sticks on the skin or clothes, immediately wash it off with detergent or water. If anyone gets ink in eyes,
immediately wash the eyes with a lot of clean water. Then, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
Power supply and voltage
 UJF-30_6042MkII contains the parts generating a high voltage. Do not carry out electrical works by others
than the authorized person.
 Before the maintenance works, unless otherwise instructed, be sure to turn the main power OFF, and then
disconnect the power receptacle to prevent electrical plugs.
Be sure to start the works five minutes later after the main power is turned off then the power receptacle is
disconnected since it may take one minute to discharge the capacitor depending on units.
 Use with the specified power. Be sure to connect the power cable plug to the grounded outlet.
 Do not operate to turn the main power of UJF-30_6042MkII ON by others than a person who knows the
operating procedures of UJF-30_6042MkII thoroughly.

Rev.
1.0
Handling of LED-UV
 The LED-UV become high temperature. Carry out the maintenance when the temperature cools down
sufficiently after the LED is turned OFF.
 Do not drop the LED-UV, hit it against an object, apply an excessive force to it, nor scratch it since the LED-
UV is made of glass. It may cause damage to the LED-UV.
 Do not use the LED-UV in such ambient circumstance that there is the risk of fire (gasoline, combustible gas
spray, thinner, lacquer, powder dust, etc.). In addition, do not put a paper or cloth near or on the LED-UV.
It may cause fire.
 Request a user to replace the LED-UV with a new one prior to the rated life since the LED-UV may damage
rarely.
 Before replacing, mounting or removing the LED-UV, be sure to turn the power OFF. It may cause electrical
shock.
 Never look at the LED-UV in lighting with your naked eyes. It may cause pain in your eyes or visual
impairment. Be sure to wear safety glasses.
 Do not apply ultraviolet (UV) light directly to your skin. It may cause inflammation of skin.
 Be sure to use only the LED-UV recommended by MIMAKI. Never use other LED-UVs than the
recommended lamps.
Explain a user that it may cause fire or damages to the unit if other lamps are used.
Notify the user that MIMAKI does not bear any responsibility for any troubles caused by other LED-UVs
than the recommended lamp.
Handling of Anti-freezing liquid
 Store the anti-freezing liquid in the dark cold place. Request a user to keep it out of reach of children.
 Use the exclusive Anti-freezing liquid by MIMAKI. The hot water device may be damaged.
 Pay attention to that the anti-freezing liquid or hot water tank water (mixed water with anti-freezing liquid)
does not wet on skin directly.
Wash it off with soap immediately in the case of wetting on skin or cloths.
 In the case of getting the anti-freezing liquid or hot water tank water (mixed water with anti-freezing liquid)
in eyes, immediately wash the eyes with a lot of clean water, and then consult a doctor as soon as possible.
If the high temperature hot water tank water (mixed water with anti-freezing liquid) wets on skin,
immediately wash it off with soap and cool the skin thoroughly with iced water, and then consult a doctor as
soon as possible.
 In the case of swallowing the anti-freezing liquid or hot water tank water (mixed water with anti-freezing
liquid) accidentally, immediately vomit it, and then consult a doctor as soon as possible.
 Before use of the anti-freezing liquid, be sure to read the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS).
 Discard the unused anti-freezing liquid or used hot water tank water (mixed water with anti-freezing liquid)
as the following procedures.
• Absorb the liquid in the sawdust or waste cloth, and then incinerate them with an incinerator.
• Commit the disposal with clarifying the contents to a licensed industrial waste disposal contractor.
 Pay attention not to cause any ignition source due to static electricity and an impact spark.
 Be sure to wear goggles and gloves for handling the anti-freezing liquid.

Rev.
1.0
As for firing and smoking
 Touching combustible materials with the hot part such as the LED-UV with may cause firing and/or smoking.
 UJF-30_6042MkII is not of explosion proof type. Do not use it in an ambient atmosphere with hazardous
materials since it may have a risk of explosion or so.
 If any abnormal condition such as a foul smell, smoking, a trace of spark is observed on the machine,
immediately turn the power OFF.
As for hot parts
 There are hot parts on the external part of machine. A hot temperature caution label is stuck on each of the
hot parts. Do not touch the parts with the caution label or the vicinity. It may cause a burn.
 When it is unavoidable to touch the hot parts, be sure to wear heat-insulating gloves to protect hands.
Handling of the washing liquid
 Keep the washing liquid in a dark cold place. Request a user to keep it out of reach of children.
Ink bottles
 When an ink bottle is moved from a cold place to a warm place, leave it in the room temperature for three
hours or more and then use it.
 Open an ink bottle just before installing. If the bottle is left in the opened condition for many hours, it may
not print normally.
 Store ink bottles in a cold and dark place.
 Use up the ink of ink bottle earlier once opened. If many hours elapse after opened, the printing quality gets
worse.
 Explain a user to use exclusive ink bottles as much as possible since it may not only degrade the printing
quality but also cause machine troubles if others than exclusive ink bottles are used, and that a user should
bear the expense for repairing when troubles occur with others than exclusive ink bottles.
 Never refill the ink bottle with ink.
 Neither hit the ink bottle nor shake it violently. It may cause ink leakage from the bottle.
Precautions for LED-UV
 Be sure to wear the accessory gloves, and do not touch the LED-UV with bare hands. It may cause significant
degradation of the UV curing. When contaminated, wipe it with clean gauze or the like wetted with alcohol.
(Do not wipe the exterior cover with alcohol since the painting peels off.)
 The LED-UV performance and life are significantly depending on the UV irradiation device and UV power
supply unit used.
Never use other UV irradiation device or UV power supply unit than the recommended by MIMAKI.
Notice a user that MIMAKI does not bear any responsibility for troubles caused by using the UV irradiation
device or the UV power supply unit other than the recommended by MIMAKI.

Rev.
1.0
As for Ultraviolet (UV) rays
 There is some leakage of UV rays from the LED-UV part. It may cause inflammation or skin cancer if skin or
eyes are exposed under UV rays. Additionally, it may develop into a chronic disorder due to repeated
exposing under UV rays even if no inflammation is caused due to weak UV rays. Pay attention not to expose
skin or eyes under UV rays.
 As the impairment of eyes caused by UV rays:
• Acute disorders: Pain in eyes, tearing, etc.
• Chronic disorders: Cataract, etc.
 Wear gloves, a long-sleeve cloth, a light shut-off mask for a face and the accessory light shut-off glasses, etc.
for protection whenUJF-30_6042MkII is operated.
As for waste ink
 Dispose the waste ink according to the local regulations of the area where the ink is used.
 When replacing the Main PCB, remove the installed battery. Disposal of the used battery according to
manufacturer’s instructions
Caution Label
 Request a user to check the caution label then replace it with a new one when the label is illegible due to
stains or coming off after installed.
(Refer to III. Warning Label)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Warning Label
Rev.
III. Warning Label 1.0
 Label Position
The following figure shows the warning labels attached to this machine. Check these labels before work, and if any
labels have become unreadable due to dirt, scratches or peeling, replace them with new labels after checking with the
customer.
 Label Position
10 1 7 5
7
2
3 4
6
8 1
2 1
11
5 10

Rev.
1.0
Order No. Label Label description

M903330 Work Note Plate Wear safety glasses and gloves while working

M913419 UV light Note Plate Attention to ultraviolet light

M913563 Table load amount ban Plate Do not put more than 8kg on the table
(UJF- _8kg
6042MkII)

M913565 Table load amount ban Plate Do not put more than 8kg on the table
(UJF- _8kg
3042MkII)

M907935 Hazardous voltage Plate Hazardous voltage Caution
© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. 1.0 P.2

Rev.
1.0

M913423 Front cover falling caution Open and close the cover along with a hand up until the final position.
label

M913694 Laser light Note Plate Attention to laser light

M913425 Laser light opening plate Be careful of the laser light opening

M913706 FDA proof plate FDA proof

M903239 Heat caution Label Be careful of the heat

M913610 PL Plate (note of pinch) Attention to movable portion
© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. 1.0 P.3

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Contents
Rev.
Model UJF-30_6042MkII Issued 2016.08.29 Revised 2016.10.24 Remark
Contents 1.2
1 Service Outline / Operating Principle 2.3.18 Negative Pressure Sensor 73 PCB

Assy.
1.1 Basic Operation 2.3.19 Positive Pressure Sensor PCB Assy.
1.1.1 Obstacle Sensor 2.3.20 5V Power Supply
1.1.2 LED-UV Unit 2.3.21 48V Power Supply
1.2 Maintenance Function
1.3 Ink System 3 Workflow

1.3.1 Ink Supply System 3.1 Ink Related Parts
1.3.2 Configuration 3.1.1 Replacement of the Head Unit
1.3.3 Bottle Ink System Error Monitoring 3.1.2 Replacement of the Sub-tank
1.3.4 Bottle LED Control 3.1.3 Replacement of the Circulation Pump
1.3.5 Supply Bottle Management and 3.1.4 Replacement of the Ink Filter
Selection
1.3.6 Monitoring Remaining Ink Amount 3.2 Driving Parts
1.3.7 Ink Suction and Discharge Control 3.2.1 Replacement of the X-axis Motor
1.3.8 Initial Filling 3.2.2 Replacement of the Y-axis Motor
1.4 Service Outline 3.2.3 Replacement of the Z-axis Motor
1.4.1 Maintenance Precaution 3.3 Electrical Parts
1.4.2 Tools 3.3.1 Replacement of the EPL3 Main PCB B
1.4.3 Conversion List for the International COM FW Assy.
System of Units 3.3.2 Replacement of the Slider T PCB
1.4.4 Machine Specifications Assy.
1.4.5 Specifications for Ink 3.3.3 Replacement of the ID Contact PCB
1.4.6 Drawing speed
1.4.7 Ink Consumption 3.4 Sensors
3.4.1 Replacement of the Obstacle Sensor
(Laser Sensor Assy.)
2 Electrical Parts
3.5 UV UNIT
2.1 Block Diagram 3.5.1 Replacement of the 4inch-LCUVLED
2.1.1 Connection Diagram Inside the Main PCB Assy.
Unit 3.5.2 Replacement of the UVLED Drive14
2.1.2 Fuse Connection Diagram PCB Assy.
2.2 Operation Explanation 3.6 Regular Replacement• Regular Maintenance

3.6.1 Periodic Check Items
2.3 Circuit Board Specifications
3.6.2 Checking the Machine Condition
2.3.1 EPL3 Main PCB B COM FW Assy. 3.6.3 Regularly Replaced Parts
2.3.2 STATION IV PCB Assy. 3.6.4 Greasing
2.3.3 DDR II PRAM (1GB) PCB Assy. 3.6.5 Checking
2.3.4 Counter-electromotive Regenerative
PCB Assy
2.3.5 SD Conversion PCB Assy. 4 Adjustment Items
2.3.6 Level Converting PCB Assy.
2.3.7 150LPI Encoder PCB Assy. 4.1 Operation Matrix
2.3.8 T Head Power 16 PCB/T Head Power
4.2 Adjustment Function
9 PCB Assy.
2.3.9 SLIDER T PCB Assy. 4.2.1 Head adjustment Parallelism
2.3.10 UVLED_Drive14 PCB Assy. adjustment
2.3.11 4inch-LCUVLED PCB Assy. 4.2.2 Head Slant Adjustment
2.3.12 PD AMP PCB Assy. 4.2.3 Head Position Adjustment
2.3.13 ID Contact PCB CN032 Single Assy. 4.2.4 Print Adjustment
2.3.14 CART IO PCB Assy. 4.2.5 REPLACE COUNT
2.3.15 Color LCD SL PCB Assy. 4.2.6 Default Set
2.3.16 RGB LED PCB Assy. 4.2.7 Capping Adjustment
2.3.17 AC PCB Assy. 4.2.8 Wiper Adjustment
© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. Contents R.1.2 P.1

Rev.
Contents 1.2
4.2.9 Head Wash 5.1.22 Kebab

4.2.10 Head ID 5.1.23 MDL command Test
4.2.11 Shot Count Reset
4.2.12 Head Voltage Adjustment 5.2 Other Test
4.2.13 Dot Volume Adjustment
4.2.14 SERIAL No.
4.2.15 Dealer No. 6 Disassembly and Reassembly
4.2.16 Origin Adjustment 6.1 Covers
4.2.17 Table Adjustment
6.1.1 Cover Layout
4.2.18 Feed Comp 2
4.2.19 Angle Adjustment 6.2 Ink-related Parts
4.2.20 Network 6.2.1 Sub-tank
4.2.21 Sub Tank 6.2.2 Head Unit
4.2.22 Gap Adjustment 6.2.3 Cap Assy.
4.2.23 Time Set 6.2.4 Wiper Unit
4.2.24 Purge 6.2.5 Wiper Cleaner
4.2.25 POINTER OFFSET 6.2.6 Pump motor
4.2.26 Cap Cleaning 6.2.7 Selective Path Pump
6.2.8 Circulation Pump
6.2.9 Ink Filter
4 Adjustment Items
6.2.10 Hot Water Pump
4.3 Mechanical Adjustment 6.2.11 Air Pressure Pump
6.2.12 Bottle Tank Assy
4.3.1 Carriage Slant Adjustment
6.2.13 Cartridge Valve
4.3.2 LED-UV Height Adjustment
6.2.14 Check Valve
4.3.3 Drain the Hot Water•Filling Hot Water
6.2.15 Mist Filter 1
4.3.4 Station Height Adjustment
6.2.16 Mist Filter 2
4.3.5 Wiper Height Adjustment
4.3.6 Encoder Sensor Position Adjustment 6.3 Drive System
4.3.7 Adjustment of the optical-axis of the 6.3.1 X-axis Motor
obstacle sensors
6.3.2 X-drive Belt
4.3.8 Adjusting the leveling of unit
6.3.3 Y-axis Motor
6.3.4 Y-drive Pulley
6.3.5 Y-drive Belt
5 Test Items
6.3.6 Linear Encoder Scale
5.1 Test Function 6.3.7 Z-axis Motor
5.1.1 Check Pattern 6.3.8 Z-drive Belt
5.1.2 Sensor Test 6.3.9 Z-drive Screw
5.1.3 Cartridge Sensor 6.3.10 Table
5.1.4 Check Memory 6.4 Electrical Parts
5.1.5 Keyboard Test
6.4.1 EPL3 Main PCB B COM FW Assy
5.1.6 LCD Test
6.4.2 Station IV PCB Assy.
5.1.7 Check Temp.
6.4.3 Slider T PCB Assy.
5.1.8 Check Ink IC
6.4.4 150LPI -encoder PCB Assy.
5.1.9 UV Level Check
6.4.5 UVLED Drive14 PCB Assy
5.1.10 Aging
6.4.6 ID Contact PCB
5.1.11 Check Encoder
6.4.7 CART IO PCB Assy.
5.1.12 Event Log
6.4.8 Color LCD SL PCB Assy.
5.1.13 Check Message
6.4.9 AC PCB Assy.
5.1.14 Test Hardware
6.4.10 Negative Pressure Sensor 73 PCB
5.1.15 Valve Test Assy.
5.1.16 Air Pressure Check 6.4.11 Positive Pressure Sensor PCB Assy.
5.1.17 NCU
5.1.18 SD Card 6.5 Sensors
5.1.19 LED 6.5.1 Sensor Layout
5.1.20 Option Check 6.5.2 Photo Sensor (X-origin)
5.1.21 Action 6.5.3 Photo Sensor (Y-origin)

Rev.
Contents 1.2
6.5.4 Y Displacement Sensor 9.1.2 Ink set change procedure

6.5.5 Photo Sensor (Z-origin)
6.5.6 Obstacle Sensor
6.5.7 Maintenance Cover Sensor
6.5.8 NCU Assy.(Nozzle missing dot detect
unit)
6.6 UV Parts
6.6.1 LED-UV Unit
7 Troubleshooting
7.1 Details on Errors and Malfunctions

7.1.1 Concerning Errors and Malfunctions
7.1.2 List of Error Messages
7.1.3 List of Warning Messages
7.1.4 List of SYSTEM HALT
7.1.5 Troubles Without Messages
Displayed
7.2 Detailed Methods of Coping with the
Malfunctions
8 Operation Flow
8.1 Basic Information

8.1.1 Service Mode and Specialized Key
8.1.2 F/W Update
8.1.3 Parameter Up/Download
8.1.4 Parameter Function
8.1.5 LOG Upload
8.1.6 Important Parameter
8.2 Basic Operation
8.2.1 Start up
8.3 Print Mode
8.3.1 LOCAL / REMOTE
8.3.2 WORK SET / HEAD HIGHT / SET
ORIGIN
8.4 Common Setting
8.4.1 SETUP
8.4.2 MAINTENANCE
8.4.3 MACHINE SETUP
8.4.4 NOZZLE CHECK
8.4.5 INFORMATION
8.5 Service Mode
8.5.1 #ADJUST
8.5.2 #TEST
9 Appendix
9.1 Ink Relation

9.1.1 Initial charging of Ink

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Basic Operation
1. Service Outline / Operating Principle

1.1 1.2 1.3 1
Basic Operation Maintenance Function Ink System
1.4
Service Outline
2
© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Basic Operation > Obstacle Sensor
Rev.
1.1.1 Obstacle Sensor 1.0
 Outline
This sensor is set to prevent the head from being damaged. It detects the work coming out or warpage etc. on the table
to stop the operation before the head hits that part.
 Figure of constitution
STOP!
Light axis position
Below 1.2mm from the 1
Head
Sensor for mirror side Sensor for receiving light
Basic head gap: 1.5mm Table 2

 Operating Principle
1 The light axis of the obstacle sensor is set below 1.2mm from the bottom surface of the nozzle.
2 When LED light of the sensor (visible light) is shaded by the obstacle, the operation is terminated.
3
3 Before the printing operation, checks whether there is no obstacle by moving the table back and forth with the head
being stored in the station.
© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. 1.1.1 R.1.0 P.1

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Basic Operation > LED-UV Unit
Rev.
1.1.2 LED-UV Unit 1.0
 Outline
This UV unit is using LED and air cooling FAN is adopted for heat release.
 Operation principle of LED-UV unit

The UV unit contains multiple UVLED, and controls the ON/OFF operation for each specified block.
1
The flow while the UV unit operates is as below:
No. Item Process content

1 Start drawing UVLED lights up only in the printing area.
2 During drawing Controls the amount of light and ON/OFF of each LED-UV, and lighting area, and detects
errors during lighting.
When an abnormality has been detected, the error below occurs.
ERROR706 UV UNIT OVER HEAT (The temperature in the UV unit became higher than the
2
specific value.The fan is switched on when the temperature reaches 45°C or more.)
ERROR708 UV THERMISTOR BRK (The thermistor (temperature sensor) in the UVLED PCB came
down.)
3 Abort of drawing Aborts the process and UVLED turns off the lights. 3
4 End drawing UVLED turns off the lights. (The LED lights up only in the printing area.)
 Operation principle of water cooled system
4
Controls the cooling FAN by monitoring the temperature of the thermistor on the UVLED PCB.
No. Item Process content

1 Waiting status 1. Monitors the temperature of the UVLED PCB.
Online state 2. Monitors the temperature of the UVLED PCB and if it becomes 45 degrees and above,
5
rotates the cooling FAN.
3. Monitors the temperature of the UVLED PCB and if it becomes 45 degrees and below,
stops the cooling FAN.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Maintenance Function
Service Outline / Operating Principle

1.1 1.2 1.3 1
1.4
Service Outline
2

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Ink System

1.1 1.2 1.3 1
1.4
Service Outline
2

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Ink System > Ink Supply System
Rev.
1.3.1 Ink Supply System 1.2
 Out line
The ink supply system of UJF-30_6042MkII is the self-weight hydraulic head supply and air pressure control system
(pressure-feed ink system).
This system mainly consists of the following two controls.
1. Pressure control inside the route:

To maintain the internal pressure of the sub-tank (-2.3 KPa) and pressurize onto (purging)
the head.
2. Ink supply control: To supply a specific amount of ink with the liquid level sensor detection in order to prevent 1
the ink inside the sub-tank from running out.
 Ink Route Diagram
Ink Route Diagram is described below.
Block Diagram of Pressure-Feed Ink System

2
1. Pressure control inside the
Air stream inside the route
Negative side Negative pressure

control
3
Positive pressure
Air chamber control
P Air pressure pump

4
3 way 2 way
Negative
pressure
sensor
Positive side throttle valve

Positive
5
pressure
(1L)Bottle sensor
Bottle
6
tank
2. Ink charge control V To sub-tank

Liquid level To sub-tank
sensor
Circulation route Limit To sub-tank
(In case of only the white ink.)
V Sub-tank
High *Always being controlled
7
P P Ink with High.
Circulation pump Low
Circulation pump
Print head
The circulation route is available only in the white ink bottle. 8

Although there may be a case which the ink bottle becomes dented even
in the condition that the ink bottle is being set in this machine, as in the
right figure, it is no problem in the use of this machine

Rev.
 Diagram of Ink supply path Pressure-Feed Ink System Block Diagram (Ink charge control)
In case of 4color + Special color (3 head model) / 6color+Special color (4 head model)
1
Only for 4 head model
V V V V V V V V 5
P P
6
V
V
Circulation path
(white only)
:Check valve
*1 Connected only when white ink is used.

Rev.
 In case of 300dpi (4color+Special color)  In case of 300dpi (6color+Special color)
4color+ W W 6color+ W W
W CL W CL
W Pr W Pr
CL Pr CL Pr
4color+ Pr CL W W
Sub-tank 1
Head
2
Y C M K Lc Lm Y C M K
W W
・・
Head 1 Head 2 CL Head 1 Head 2 Head 3 CL
・・
W Pr W Pr
Head 3 Head 4
3
or or
CL Pr CL Pr
4
Head 3 Head 4
 There are 2 nozzle rows A and B in a head.

 There is a float sensor each in an ink tank (ink supply unit) and sub-tank.
The following list shows the control components: 5

Components Descriptions
a. Negative pressure sen- Reads the pressure inside the route at the time in the range of -7kPa ~ +3kPa for keeping the pres-
sor sure -2.70kPa.
6
b. Positive pressure sen- Reads the pressure inside the route in the range of 0 to 50kPa for keeping the route under positive
sor pressure.
c. Air pressure pump Makes the status in the sub-tank “positive pressure/ negative pressure”.
d. Liquid level sensors Three sensors for detecting the “Low/High/Limit” levels and overflow in the sub-tank to watch
the ink volume in the sub-tank.
e. Throttle valve Adjusts the air volume to be fed/purged.

Rev.
 Air Route Diagram

Air Route Diagram is described below.
Air unit Assy. Solenoid valve Assy.

Positive
pressure 3way x2, 2way x4 air solenoid valve
Negative
pressure Negative Positive
1
Positive pressure
throttle valve pressure pressure
sensor sensor
2
4 head model only
Air pressure pump Sub-tank Assy.

3
 Pressure Control inside the Route
4
The pressure inside the route including all 2 sub-tanks is controlled as one system. The control includes 2 control
operations as described below:
 Negative pressure control inside the route
 Positive pressure control inside the route
Opening status of the Opening status of the

Status of pressure
5
3-way negative 3-way positive Descriptions
control
pressure switch valve pressure switch valve
Control stopped “Open to the “Open to the To keep the pressure(0kPa) inside the sub-
atmosphere” atmosphere” tank as it is
Negative pressure “Sub-tank” “Open to the Air: Sub-tank  Negative press. valve 
control atmosphere” Pump
Positive pressure
control
“Open to the
atmosphere”
“Sub-tank” Air: Pump  Positive press. valve  Sub-
tank 6
The valves are switched according to the status of pressure
START control; i.e., “Control stopped”, “Negative pressure control”,
7
“Positive pressure control”.
Negative pressure Positive pressure
control control
Control stopped

Rev.
 Negative pressure control inside the route

This control operation keeps the negative pressure inside the route having an objective pressure. The control
operation constantly adjusts the pressure inside the route to keep it within the range indicated in the table
below.The control method is switched according to the difference between the pressure inside the route at the time
and the objective pressure.
The pressure is controlled by the rotation of the pressure pump.It is assumed that the objective head to be con-
1
trolled is already filled with ink.
 Control method according to the status of the pressure inside the route at the time
Pressure inside the route Status Operation Pressure pump

-2.29kPa or higher Higher pressure Decrease the pressure. Turn
-2.30kPa or lower Appropriate negative pressure Keep as it is. Stop
2
Generating Negative pressure
negative pressure stabilized Maintaining negative pressure
3
-2.30kPa
Start of operation
4
Switching the 3-way valve
Operation of the pressure pump Stop of the Operation of the Stop of the
pressure pump pressure pump pressure pump
 Operation items
Start of control At the time of starting the printer
5
In control To watch and control the negative pressure of the route periodically
End of control At the time of turning OFF the power
Stop due to error When the negative pressure does not fall into the range of appropriate pressure even after operating
the pressure pump for a certain time or more.
When drastic pressure change is detected

Rev.
 Positive pressure control inside the route

The control (purging) operation for applying positive pressure inside the route.
 Positive pressure control method

To turn on the pressure pump, and apply positive pressure within the range of 17.5kPa ±2.5kPa for a certain
period.
Generating positive
pressure
Maintaining positive
pressure
Open to the
atmosphere
1
Positive pressure is applied The positive pressure inside
inside the sub-tank. the sub-tank is decreased.
2
17.5kPa
Specified time
Start of operation
Switching the 3-way valve End of the operation
Operation of the air pressure pump Opening the Stop of the air
3
2-way valve pressure pump
 Operation items
At the time of charging and cleaning To squeeze the ink from the sub-tank into the head.
At the time of replacement of the ink To squeeze the ink and cleaning liquid in the ink route, sub-tank, and head through
the nozzle surface.
4
 Ink Supply Control
Processing procedure of purge
Positive pressure Negative pressure
Liquid level
detection sensor
Float
Liquid level
detection sensor 5
Liquid level
Sub-tank detection sensor
HEAD HEAD
6
Step 2:After a certain amount of time has
Step 1: Applies positive pressure onto passed, stop applying the positive
the sub-tank to squeeze the ink
7
pressure, and return the air pres-
Cleaning START
Soft/Normal/Hard/Ultra
Positive pressure
8
PURGE Ink extrusion in the head
Open to the atmosphere
Negative micro pressure
WIPE Clean the nozzle surface
END

Rev.
 Liquid level sensor

Control this for each sub-tank separately.
Liquid surface sensor
Sub-tank
1
Limit 17.1cc
High 15.4 18.6cc
Float Middle 12.6 15.3cc

Detect sensor
Low 12.5cc
2
3
 Status of Liquid surface sensor
4
Liquid detection sensor
No. Descriptions Operation
Low High Limit
Cleaning is filling starts automatically
1 ON OFF OFF Ink filling is required.
during printing.
2 OFF ON OFF Ink position is normal.
5
Filling stops immediately and an error
3 OFF OFF ON Over flow
occurs.
OFF OFF ON
4 ON ON OFF Sensor abnormality Sub-tank sensor error
ON OFF ON

Rev.
 OPEN/CLOSE Operation of 2-way Head Selection Valve

Control the air pressure of all sub-tanks with one positive pressure control/ negative pressure control.
Conditions for “OPEN”:

• “Negative pressure control” is in execution for maintaining negative pressure inside the route (in normal cases).
• “Positive pressure control” is in execution for pressure control inside the route.
• When the valve is selected for performing #TEST/VALVE TEST/2-WAY VALVE
• When the valve is selected for performing #TEST/AIR CHECK
1
Conditions for “CLOSE”:
• The electric power is OFF (for maintaining negative pressure inside the route, and as a countermeasure against
lumpy droplets).
• The head is not objective for charging nor cleaning operation. 2
 OPEN/CLOSE Operation Control of 2-way Head Selection Valve
A 2-way valve, which gets closed under condition of no voltage applied, is used. To avoid any such a problem that
3
the 2-way valve becomes so heated under condition of the rated voltage applied continuously that the life of the
valve is shortened, OPEN/CLOSE operation of the 2-way valve is controlled as described below:
Operation for “OPEN”:

• The 2-way valve is opened by applying the rated voltage.
4
• After spending a few seconds, the voltage for the 2-way valve is somewhat reduced.
Operation for “CLOSE”:

• No voltage is applied.
For controlling the 3-way valves as well, the voltage is reduced in the same way after a certain time.
5
 Ink System Controls Except Ink Supply
6
 Wiping
• Wiper back-and-forth motion
 Ink bottle
 Periodical flushing
• As usual 7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Ink System > Configuration
Rev.
1.3.2 Configuration 1.2
 Flow of the ink supply control
No. Item Description

1 Monitoring of bottle error Monitors a bottle error when ink is supplied.
For details, see “1.3.3 Bottle Ink System Error Monitoring ”
2 Control and selection of supply Checks the status of the ink bottle and selects the bottle (3042MkII:for the “4-color” +
1
bottle Special color ink set / 6042MkII:for the “6-color” + Special color ink set?
For details, see “1.3.5 Supply Bottle Management and Selection ”
3 Open/close supply valves Open/close the ink supply valves depending on the control and selection of the ink sup-
ply bottle.
 Ink system configuration
No. Item Description 2

1  In case of 3 head model  All paths are independent.
4-color+W+W
4-color+W+Pr
4-color+W+CL
4-color+Pr+CL
3
 In case of 4 head model
6-color+W+W
6-color+W+Pr
6-color+W+CL
4
4-color+Pr+CL+WW
2 Ink supply system  The supply valve opens and closes to supply ink during various operations.
3 Ink supply valve  For each bottle, a supply valve is provided to supply ink by opening it.
 The supply valve is normally closed and is opened only when ink supply is
required.
5
 Ink supply is executed during discharge operation (for printing or flushing) and
cleaning, filling. The supply valve for any bottle that has developed an error does
not open, thus does not allow ink supply.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Ink System > Bottle Ink System Error Monitoring
Rev.
1.3.3 Bottle Ink System Error Monitoring 1.0
 Monitoring of bottle error

1 Bottle error check  A bottle error is periodically checked.
2 Supply valve control  Open the valve of error bottle when the instruction to open the valve is issued.
when an error occurs  When an error occurs in a supply bottle while the valve is open (during printing or cleaning),
printing or cleaning will be stopped and the machine will return to LOCAL mode.
1
 Monitoring of ink system error
The ink system are checked for any error periodically, and machine operation is limited according to the error, if
detected. The table below shows the possible errors and the limitations on machine operation.
Execution status 2
when an error
Priority
Ink system error occurs*2 Description of the error

CL/ Print- Head
filling ing wash
1
2
Initial filling is not executed
Sub-tank error
X
X
X
X
X
X
Initial filling has not been executed.
Errors occurred in the sub-tank sensor and in supplying.
3
3 Pressure error X X X Errors occurred in the pressure system.
4 INK END error Errors occurred in both bottles and printing & suction operation
X X  can not be executed.
5
6
Waste ink tank
INK NEAR END error
X  X Waste ink tank is almost full. (counted by firmware)
 Errors occurred in both bottles and suction operation can not
4
be executed.
    Machine returns to LOCAL mode every completion of
printing one file.
5
7 Ink IC*1  An error related to the bottle IC has occurred.
X X   Ink supply is impossible.
8 Expiration:2 MONTH  Two months have passed since the expiration date of the ink.
X X X
 Ink supply is impossible.
9 Expiration:1 MONTH    One month has passed since the expiration date of the ink.
6
10 !Replace a WIPER The wiper operation count has exceeded the number which
   requires the replacement of the wiper.
11 Expiration    Ink expiration has been reached.
*1 Ink IC:NON INK IC, WRONG INK IC, Kind of INK, Color of INK, WRONG bottle,
Expiration:2MONTH
*2 : Executable X: Inexecutable :Executable (restricted)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Ink System > Bottle Ink System Error Monitoring
Rev.
1.1
 Errors related to the amount of remaining ink

 Calculate the number of ink shots by printing and flushing or the amount of ink sucked by cleaning and filling,
and then the amount of consumed ink by subtraction of remaining ink.
 When the amount of remaining ink is updated, it is written into the ink IC chip.
 A bottle error is issued according to the amount of remaining ink.
Description
1
No. Item
Error detect timing Limitations after error detection
1 WRONG bottle This occurs when the amount of used ink Ink supply can not be performed.
exceeds approximately two times of the bottle
2 INKBOTTLE END
capacity.
Ink supply unit float sensor Low was detected and The initial filling cannot be performed nor
2
used 10 cc or more. supplied.
3 Near end MBIS III float sensor Low detected
Sub-tank does not detect Low.
4 InkOverflow Sub-tank does not detect Limit. Ink supply can not be performed.
3

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Ink System > Bottle LED Control
Rev.
1.3.4 Bottle LED Control 1.0
 Condition of each cartridge LED indicated by its lighting and blinking

The three color LEDs light up or blink to indicate the condition of the ink and help the user determine the time for
replacing the cartridge.
LED Cartridge status

Blue Not lit –
Blink-
ing
–
1
Lit A bottle has been selected as the supply cartridge
Red Not lit The cartridge is normal
Blink- An error has occurred (Blinking signifies that one of the following errors has occurred)
ing
Lit
 Two months has passed since the expiration date of the ink
An error has occurred (Lighting signifies that one of the following errors has occurred)
2
 Ink end
 No bottle
 Ink IC*1
Yellow Lit  Ink near end
 One month has passed since the expiration date of the ink 3
*1 Ink IC: NON-ORIGINAL INK, WRONG INK IC, Kind of INK, Color of INK, WRONG CARTRIDGE,
Expiration:2MONTH
4
 LED operation pattern
LED
Event
State
Online supply start
Blue Lit
 Bottle free from problems
Ink near end Blue, Yellow
Lit Alternately 5
Ink end Red Lit
Bottle
Red Lit
 Removed for replacement
Bottle
 A normal bottle has been set
Blue Lit 6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Ink System > Supply Bottle Management and Selection
Rev.
1.3.5 Supply Bottle Management and Selection 1.2
 Supply bottle control

1  In case of 3 head model One ink supply system uses a single bottle, a total of six bottles (3
4-color+W+W Ink set head model)/ eight bottles (4 head model) can be mounted.
[Y C M K W W]
1
4-color+W+CL Ink set
[Y C M K W CL]
4-color+W+Pr Ink set
[Y C M K W Pr]
4-color+CL+Pr Ink set
[Y C M K CL Pr]
2
6-color+W+W Ink set
[Lc Lm Y C M K W W]
6-color+W+CL Ink set
[Lc Lm Y C M K W CL]
6-color+W+Pr Ink set
[Lc Lm Y C M K W Pr]
6-color+CL+Pr Ink set
3
[Lc Lm Y C M K CL Pr]
4-color+Pr+CL+WW Ink set
[Pr CL Y C M K W W]

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Ink System > Monitoring Remaining Ink Amount
Rev.
1.3.6 Monitoring Remaining Ink Amount 1.1
 Outline
 The amount of remaining bottle ink is calculated in such a way that the amount of ink consumed for the following
operations is calculated by subtraction of remaining ink.
• Number of ink shots by printing and flushing

• Consumption of the ink by cleaning and filling
 When the amount of remaining ink is updated, it is written into the ink IC chip.
1
 A bottle error is issued according to the amount of remaining ink.
 Calculation of the amount of consumed ink
2
 Ink discharging during printing and flushing
• The amount of ink consumed by ink discharging is calculated by counting the number of ink shots.
• This machine counts ink shots for each row of nozzles and performs calculation by taking account of dot sizes
(small, middle and large).
 Ink suction during cleaning and filling
The table below shows the amount of ink consumed for various ink suction operations. (For the 4-color ink set) 3
Motion Ink consumption through one supply path [cc]
SOFT cleaning 0.1
NORMAL cleaning 0.3
HARD cleaning
ULTRA cleaning
1.0
3.0
4
5
 Updating of the amount of remaining ink
The amount of remaining ink will be updated and written onto the ink IC chip at the timing shown below.
No. Timing for updating Execution conditions

1 When more than the specified amount of ink was dis-  When ink was consumed by drawing and flushing, writing
6
charged is performed with the specified amount.
2 At completion of cleaning and filling operation  Ink has been used for cleaning and filling.
 The amount of ink remaining in the bottle used for the
suction will be updated.
3 When the discharge/ filling operation other than 2 has  Overflow was detected and sub-tank maintenance was
been completed (maintenance operation) performed.
(Over flow maintenance, Sub-tank discharge/filling etc.)  For replacing the sub-tank or the head, discharge/ fill ink in
the sub-tank. 7

Rev.
 Consists of:
1.Ink bottle :Case of the bottle to be inserted in the printer
2.IC chip :Ink information has been written in. Insert to the dedicated slot.
 Main point of difference from the conventional ink cartridge

1.The ink capacity is different.
1
2.The amount of remaining ink inside the ink bottle is detected by the dedicated sensor.
3.Ink is exchanged by exchanging the ink bottle and IC chip in sets.
 Usage
Only you have to do is to set the ink bottle and ink IC. There is no item to be set before using. In addition, you do not
have to measure and enter the bottle weight.
 Ink consumption flow 2

The flow from start using new ink to replacing ink at ink end, including consuming ink.
Order up State IMAGE Error indication Explanation
3
to
consump
tion
1 Beginning to use Normal status
Ink bottle 1
During supply Ink is supplied from the bottle to
the sub-tank.
Tank
Sub-tank
4
2 Ink near end As ink in the sub-tank, printing
(Supply system near end) Ink bottle can be performed for a while.
Ink end <LOCAL>
Bottle near end
5
INK NEAR END [ENT]
Replace the bottle as soon as pos-
Tank
sible.
Sub-tank
3 Ink end A certain amount of ink has been
6
(Supply system ink end) Ink bottle
Ink end <LOCAL> used in the ink near end state.
Bottle ink end Can'tPRINT/BOTTLE [ENT]
Tank Replace the bottle.
Ink end
Sub-tank
 Errors that occur in the ink supply 7

State IMAGE Error indication Explanation Measurement
1 Ink supply error Ink is not sent until the pre- Check whether there is any ink
determined amount to the left inside the bottle tank.
8
Bottle tank ERROR 61b sub-tank.
INK SUPPLY: 12345678 Check whether there is any ink
There is a possibility that the left inside the sub-tank.
Supply error to
sub-tank
Show the sub-tank number abnormality occurs in the
sub-tank. Check if air is in the ink filter.
Air might get mixed in with Turn the power back on.
Sub-tank the ink filter.
If the air is existing, execute
[#ADJUST] - [FILL UP INK].

Rev.
 Process in the case of feeding failure

It detect a bottle end in the sensor in the ink supply unit.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Ink System > Ink Suction and Discharge Control
Rev.
1.3.7 Ink Suction and Discharge Control 1.0
 Outline of Control
1. The ink suction and discharge mechanism is driven by tube pumps (ink suction pumps).
2. A warning for the discharging amount of waste ink tank is done depending on the status. The warning is displayed
within the sequence of ink suction and discharge or on the local.
 System configuration
The system configuration of the ink suction and discharge mechanism is as shown below. 1
Print Head
CAP
2
Flow of ink
Ink
Suction
Pump
3
To waste ink tank

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Ink System > Initial Filling
Rev.
1.3.8 Initial Filling 1.3
 Operation sequence for initial filling
The sequence of initial ink filling is shown below:

1 Selection of ink type (ink type) Select a set value shown below.
2 Selection of number of colors

Setting value: LH-100, LUS-120, PR-200 LUS-150*1
Select a set value shown below.
1
(ink set)  In case of 3 head model
Setting value: 4C+2SP YCMKWW
Y C M K W CL
2
Y C M K W Pr
Y C M K CL Pr

Setting value:
4C+4SP Pr CL Lc Lm Y C M K W W
6C+2SP Lc Lm Y C M K W W
Lc Lm Y C M K W CL
Lc Lm Y C M K W Pr
Lc Lm Y C M K CL Pr
3
Pr CL Y C M K W W
3 Ink filling Set the ink bottles into all the slots and start ink filling.
Perform filling to the “High” position of the sub-tank.
• Filling will not be executed if a warning about the ink bottle is displayed.
• When a waste ink tank warning occurs, the warning message is displayed.
• When a warning/ an error occurred in the bottle during filling, terminate filling.
4
*1: LUS-150 can be used only in 4C set and Pr CL Y C M K W W

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Service Outline

1.1 1.2 1.3 1
1.4
Service Outline
2

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Service Outline > Maintenance Precaution
Rev.
1.4.1 Maintenance Precaution 1.1
 Before starting maintenance work, be sure to turn off the SUB power switch first and then MAIN power
switch, unplug the power cable from the power inlet on the printer, and wait for more than five
minutes.Pay attention to the heater temperature.
 Iif you turn off the power switch before turning off the SUB power switch, the parameters may not be
saved.
1
 To protect your eyes and hands from ink, be sure to wear safety goggles and gloves when cleaning or
replacing print heads or replacing the waste ink pump or if ink may scatter. Your hands can get rough
and dry if they are stained with the ink.
 Explosion can occur if the battery is replaced with a wrong type. Be sure to replace the battery with a
new one of the specified type. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
 When removing or installing dampers, take great care not to permit ink leakage and not to stain any 2
parts with ink. A drop of ink on FFCs or connectors may cause a short circuit or poor electrical
contact, thus resulting in faulty ink ejection or damage to the head or PCBs.
 Do not turn off the power during firmware upgrading. Doing so may disable restarting.
 Preliminary Checks 3
Before starting work, make sure that the following conditions are all met:
1.  Understand throughly all the instructions given in “Warning for Use” in the Operation Manual before starting work.
2.  The following conditions for the power supply system are all met:
4
 The power supply voltage must be within the specification limits.
 The printer must be grounded properly.
 The power cable must be free from damage, broken wire, etc. Many cables must not be connected to one outlet.
 The location must be such that the cable can be easily unplugged from the wall outlet in case smoke or flame has
been risen from the electrical system.
3.  Some trouble may be due to mis-operation. Judge whether or not the error display and the error condition signify mis-
5
operation.
 Precautions in Work
Take the following precautions during maintenance work:
1.  Provide adequate space for the maintenance work.
6
2.  When performing tests with the electrical box cover open, be careful not to receive an electric shock from any live
part. Also take care not to drop screws or any other parts into the circuit box.
3.  Take care to avoid insufficient insertion or skewed insertion of any connector or FFC.
4.  Do not touch FFCs with your fingers. Doing so may cause contact failure.
5.  The lever of each FFC connector breaks easily. Move it up or down gently when releasing or locking the connector.
6.  Pay attention to the movement of the head if you are required to perform maintenance work with the power on. (Keep
7
all parts of your body away from moving parts.)
7.  Use jog keys to move the media (in the X direction) or the head (in the Y direction).
The media or head can be moved by hand with the power turned off. In doing so, however, exercise care to move
them slowly.
8.  Do not tilt the printer if ink cartridges are filled with ink. Doing so can cause ink leakage.
Use the dedicated packaging materials to transport the printer.
 Remove the ink from the tubes by following the procedure of [#ADJUST] - [HEAD WASH].
 Remove the waste ink tank.
 Mount the head stopper to fix the head.
8

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Service Outline > Tools
Rev.
1.4.2 Tools 1.1
 Tools
The table below shows the tools to be used in maintenance work for UJF-30_6042MkII. In the table, each adjustment
item for parts requiring the relevant tool is marked with “”.
Adjustment of Y drive belt tension

Installation or change of location
Adjustment of work area sensor

Replacement of the print head
Adjustment of the print head
1
Waste Ink Tank Assy
Leveling of the table

Name Category Remarks
Bottle tank Assy

Key board Assy
Print head Assy

LED-UV Assy
Hot water unit
X-drive Assy
Cover sensor
Y-drive Assy
Z-drive Assy
X table Assy
Station Assy
Y-bear Assy
Frame Assy
Wiper Assy
Cover Assy
Pump Assy
Y bar Assy
Ink filling
Carriage
2
Phillips Screwdriver “Type 1 Tool For M2 
Phillips Screwdriver Type 2 Tool For M3 to M5
(L=260 or more)

For M3 to M5 
Hexagon Wrench Tool 1.5mm for M3 SSWP  
2.0mm for M4 SSWP
2.5mm for M3 cap bolts   
3
3.0mm for M4 cap bolts  
4.0mm M5 
5.0mm for M6 cap bolts 
Spanner Tool Width across flats: 
19mm  *
1
Loupe Tool x50 or x60 
Long-nose Pliers Tool
Nippers
Thickness Gauge
UV Washing Liquid
Tool
Tool
Expendable For cleaning or head
  4
washing

Grease Expendable Silicon grease
TSK5450(MM001529)

Furoyl oil(MM001530)  
5
KLUBER S50 
Adhesive Agent Expendable Instantaneous adhesive
Waste Cloth Expendable For cleaning
Cotton Swab Expendable
Gloves Expendable Gloves with oil proof
and tolerance
 
Industrial Alcohol Expendable For degreasing and
washing
Cable Tie
Acetate Fabric Tape

Expendable
Expendable
L=150 or less
(UL-approved product)
6
Drafting Tape Expendable
Double-stick Tape Expendable
Tweezers Tool
Cutter Knife Tool
7
Tester Tool
Goggles Tool
Area sensor adjusting jig Jig 10mm Block
OPT-J0068

Level gauge Tool Do not use round
shaped level gauge.
Adjust with a level
meeting the right

8
precision.
Sensitivity 0.35 mm / m
or less, precision ± 1.0
mm / m or less
Ratchet Tool 
*1: 6042MkII only

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Service Outline > Conversion List for the International System of Units
Rev.
1.4.3 Conversion List for the International System of Units 1.0
 Conversion list for the international system of units

The following is a conversion table among the International System of Units, the Gravitational System of Units and
the Inch-pound System of Units.
International System of Units Gravitational System of Units Inch-pound System of Units

[N] [cN] [kgf] [gf] [ozf] [lbf]
1
1[N] 1 100 0.102 101.97 3.60 0.225
1[cN] 0.01 1 0.00102 1.02 0.036 0.002248
1[kgf] 9.81 980.67 1 1000 35.27 2.20
1[gf] 0.00981 0.981 0.001 1 0.0353 0.00221
1[ozf] 0.278 27.80 0.0284 28.35 1 0.0625
2
1[lbf] 4.45 444.82 0.4536 453.59 16 1

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Service Outline > Machine Specifications
Rev.
1.4.4 Machine Specifications 1.3
 Machine Specifications Table
No. Item UJF-3042MkII UJF-3042MkII EX UJF-6042MkII

1 Print head Drawing method On demand piezo-head
Head specification 3-heads (6 nozzles row) 4-heads (8 nozzles row)
2 Ink Usable inks LH100 / LUS 120 / LUS-150 / PPR-200 (Pr only)
specification Ink Color C / M / Y / K / W / CL / C / M / Y / K / Lc / Lm / W / CL / Pr
Ink supply
Pr
Bottle (MIMAKI Genuine ink) 1
6 bottle 8 bottle
Ink capacity (1 for each color) 1,000 ml / 250 ml
Ink end detection function FW internal count and sub-tank magnetic sensor detection
3 Resolution x-dpi : 600 / 900 / 1,200
4 Media Size 300 x 420mm

y-dpi : 600 / 1,200
610 x 420 mm 2
Thickness (1)+(2)=153 mm(6.0 in) or less
(1)Movable area 53mm(2.1 in),(2)50mm spacers ×2 levels=100mm(3.9 in)
Weight 5 kg (11.0 lb) or less 8 kg (17.6 lb) or less
5 Media adsorption Option Equipped
3
6 Drawing range Width 300 mm(11.8 in) Width 610 mm (24.0in)
Length 420 mm(16.5 in) Length 420 mm (16.5 in)
7 Distance Absolute accuracy ± 0.3 mm(± 0.01 in) or ± 0.3 % of the designated, whichever is larger
accuracy Reproducibility ± 0.2 mm(± 0.008 in) or ± 0.1 % of the designated, whichever is larger
8 Perpendicularity ±0.3 mm(±0.01 in) / 400 mm(15.7 in)
9 Print gap adjustment Installed the table up and down mechanism by key operation (Manual)
4
Automatic setting function
10 Head crash prevention device Detection by the obstacle sensor (Although this device is a Class 1 laser
device, its laser sensors are equipped with Class 2 lasers.)
11 Ink sediment cycle Equipped, Route cycle type, Tank cycle type
12 UV unit Air cooling LED UV irradiation device on the head slider (one)
13 Nozzle Missing Detector (NCU) Option Equipped
5
14 Mist suction Equipped (Used together with the LED cooling fan)
15 Waste ink tank Exclusive bottle (1,600 ml) Visual and FW warning
16 Interface USB2.0 (Ethernet 1,000BASE-T)
17 Command MRL-V(MAPS4 support)
18 Noise Stand-by Less than 55 dB (FAST-A, Front & Rear 1m)
Continuous sound in operation Less than 65dB
19 Safety standard
Discontinuous sound in operation Less than 75dB
VCCI-Class A, FCC-Class A, UL 60950-1, CE Marking (EMC,Low Voltage 6
Directive, Machinery Directive, RoHS Directive), CB Report, RoHS, Reach,
EnergyStar, IEC60825-1
20 Ink safety SDS
21 Power Spec. AC100-240 V±10%, 50/60 Hz
22 Power
Consumption
Operating at full power
Sleep mode
1,000 W or less (At 240V+10%)
5 W or less 7
23 Operation Operational temperature range 20 ~ 30ºC (68ºF ~ 86ºF)
Environment Relative humidity 35 ~ 65%Rh (Non condensing)
Accuracy secured temperature 20 ~ 25ºC (68ºF ~ 77ºF)
Temperature gradient Within ±10ºC/h (±50ºF/h)
24
Dust
Weight Values in brackets
Equivalent to the office level (Less than 0.15mg/m3)
135 kg (165 kg) 150 kg (180 kg)
8
( ): When using the dedicated stand (optional) (297.6 lb (363.8 lb)) (330.7 lb (396.8 lb))
25 Outer dimensions (W) x (D) x (H) 1,355 x1,290 x856 mm 1,665 x1,290 x856 mm
(53.3 x 50.8 x 33.7 in) (65.6 x 50.8 x 33.7 in)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Service Outline > Specifications for Ink
Rev.
1.4.5 Specifications for Ink 1.2
 Specifications
No. Item Specifications

1 Supply Bottle
2 Ink color Black (K)
Cyan (C)
Magenta (M)
1
Yellow (Y)
White (W)
Clear (CL)
Primer (Pr)
Light cyan (Lc) *4 head model only
Light magenta (Lm) *4 head model only
2
3 Ink capacity 1,000 ml / 250 ml
4 Available period The period is printed on the ink bottle.
Within three months after opening the package even in the available period.
(Recommend to use up within one month, since there is a possibility of settling.)
5 Storage Storage 5 ~ 30 °C (41 ~ 86°F)*1 (Storage at temperature of 30 °C (86 °F) is permitted within a month)
temperature Transportation 1 ~ 60 °C (33.8 ~ 140 °F )
3
(Storage at temperature of 60˚C (140 °F ) is only permitted within 120 hours, and at tempera-
ture of 40˚C is permitted within a month.)
Avoid the condition lower than 0 °C (32 °F ) and higher than 40 °C (104 °F ) .
*1) Keep the package sealed. Keep the package in the dark cold place where is dried and well-ventilation.
 Do not disassemble the ink bottle, or refill. 4

 Ink could freeze if kept in a cold place for an extended period.
If the ink freezes, thaw it at room temperature (25°C (77°F)) spending more than three hours before use.
However, the print quality becomes degraded due to the alteration of ink if the thawed ink is used. Therefore, it is
recommended to store the ink in the environment where the ink does not freeze.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Service Outline > Drawing speed
Rev.
1.4.6 Drawing speed 1.2
 Drawing speed
 UJF-3042MkII series
 Color only Print
Scan speed Print

Nozzle recovery
Print mode Label Y[dpi] X[dpi] pass [mm/s] Speed
1
Normal speed Normal speed [m2/h]
Draft 600x600 600 600 8 423.3  2.48
High speed 600x900 600 900 12 423.3  1.62
Normal 600x1200 600 1200 16 423.3  1.22
Hi quality 1200x1200 1200 1200 16 211.7  0.89
 Color+SP+SP Overprinting 2
Scan speed Print
Nozzle recovery
3
Draft 600x600 600 600 8 423.3  2.08
High speed 600x900 600 900 12 423.3  1.44
Normal 600x1200 600 1200 16 423.3  1.12
Hi quality 1200x1200 1200 1200 16 211.7  0.69
 UJF-6042MkII series
 Color only Print 4

Scan speed Print
Nozzle recovery
5
Draft 600x600 600 600 8 423.3  3.56
High speed 600x900 600 900 12 423.3  2.32
Normal 600x1200 600 1200 16 423.3  1.75
Hi quality 1200x1200 1200 1200 16 211.7  1.29
 Color+SP Overprinting
Print mode Label Y[dpi] X[dpi] pass

Scan speed
[mm/s]
Nozzle recovery
Print
Speed
6
Draft 600x600 Draft 600 600 8 423.3  2.99
High speed 600x900 600 900 12 423.3  2.06
Normal
Hi quality
600x1200
1200x1200
600
1200
1200
1200
16
16
423.3
211.7


1.57
0.96
7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Service Outline / Operating Principle > Service Outline > Ink Consumption
Rev.
1.4.7 Ink Consumption 1.2
 When cleaning
Number of heads Quantity of total ink consumed

Ink usage per nozzle col-
Cleaning (1 head 2 nozzle row)
umn
3 head model 4 head model 3 head model 4 head model
Soft CL 0.1 cc 3 4 0.6 cc 0.8 cc
Normal CL 0.3 cc 3 4 1.8 cc 2.4 cc
Hard CL
Ultra
1.0 cc
3.0 cc
3
3
4
4
6.0 cc
18.0 cc
8.0 cc
24.0 cc 1
Color 120.0 cc 3 4 4color+WW 87.0 cc 6color+WW 1110.0 cc
Initial Filling
White 195.0 cc 3 4 Other 795.0 cc Other 10350 cc

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Block Diagram
Electrical Parts
2.1 2.2 2.3 2
Block Diagram Operation Explanation Circuit Board Specifications

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Block Diagram >Connection Diagram Inside the Main Unit
Rev.
2.1.1 Connection Diagram Inside the Main Unit 1.1
Carriage E108965 UV unit control cable Assy
PCB14 PRESSURE SENSOR CN1[1:4] E108966 E301338 T head FFCAssy x4(60/30EX) /x3(30)
PCB Assy E105304 PRESSURE/NEGATIVE PCB10 6042II/3042IIEX Only Head grounded with a plate
PCB13 NEGATIVE 73 SENSOR CABLE Assy
CN19[1:10]
PRESSURE SENSOR CN1[1:4] CN9[1:20]
PCB Assy E107554 CN101[1:20] CN1[1:20] Head 1
PCB35 TEC CE4
CN5[1:40] CN102[1:20] CN2[1:20] PCB 15
E108967
UVLED Drive1
HEAD POWER SUPPLY CN103[1:20] CN1[1:20]
CONTROL CABLE Assy Head 2 E108651
CN1[1:20] CN2[1:40] U-TEC CE4
CN3[1:4] CN104[1:20] CN2[1:20] CN5[1:24]
T Head Power 9 PCB Assy CN7[1:9]
E108989 Slider T PCB Assy CN105[1:20] CN1[1:20] Head 3 CN1[
T Head Power 16 PCB Assy SOLENOID VALVE V-TEC CE4 CN8[1:2]
E108793
1
E108669 (3POS/2_2 POS/4 PORTS ) SOL9 CN106[1:20] CN2[1:20] CN2[
E301282 CN10[1:2]
CN1[1:2] CN107[1:20] CN1[1:20] Head 4 CN9
W-TEC CE4 CN11[1:6]
CN1[1:2] CN1[1:2] CN108[1:20] CN2[1:20]
6042II/3042IIEX Only
CN1[1:2] CN1[1:2]
Liquid level detection sensor 1 E300599 CN1[1
CN11[1:5] CN1[1:5]
(Magnetic sensor for liquid level 3 point detection) SM(2pin)
CN1[1:2] E108968 CN21[1:22] UVDrive P
Liquid level detection sensor 2 E300599
Valve connect cable Assy CN12[1:5] CN1[1:5] E106963(
(Magnetic sensor for liquid level 3 point detection)
CN7[1:8] CN13[1:5] CN1[1:5]
ZM(2pin) (Magnetic sensor for liquid level 3 point detection)
LED POINTER Assy Liquid level detection sensor 4 E300599
CN1[1:4] CN20[1:20] CN14[1:5] CN1[1:5]
LED113 E107074 E108963 LED・L-ENCcableAssy (Magnetic sensor for liquid level 3 point detection)
150LPI Encoder PCB Assy Liquid level detection sensor 5 E300599
CN1[1:4] CN15[1:5] CN1[1:5]
PCB11 E103852 (Magnetic sensor for liquid level 3 point detection)
3042：E301263 Liquid level detection sensor 6 E300599
CN16[1:5] CN1[1:5]
2
Tombo LINEAR ENCODER SCALE 150LPI-970 (Magnetic sensor for liquid level 3 point detection)
CN3[1:20]
CN1[1:26]
CN6[1:16]
CN2[1:24]
CN8[1:4]
6042：E301262 Liquid level detection sensor 7 E300599
PNIRP(4pin) CN17[1:5] CN1[1:5]
LINEAR ENCODER SCALE 150LPI-1280 (Magnetic sensor for liquid level 3 point detection)
CN18[1:5] CN1[1:5] (Magnetic sensor for liquid level 3 point detection)
Ground to the Carriage Table
E108962 LED cooling FAN connecting cable Assy

5557/5559(2pin)
Type miniB
Cable Veyer Y PCB4 CN5[1:16]

E108964
E301298 FFC125R-16-2700
to page2
Laser sensor relay cable Assy
3
6042II/3042II EX Only CN20[1:16] Exhaust fan
(3042II Option) JTAG
SM(2pin)
CN1[1:2] Cover switch 2 SW3
CN21[1:5] D3M01K1-3
PLMP1 F9
E109264 Ionaizor
Station
TH UV Power supply cable Assy
Pilot lamp cable Assy (01543, 15DR CN1[1:2] Cover switch 3 SW4
Lamp・Emergency relay cable Assy XA(8pin) to page2
E111044 Little fuse） D3M01K1-3 E108554 Wiper I
5559/5557(4pin)
LASER1
E301278 USB2.0_TypeA-MiniB cable
Reflector
MN−SL relay cable Assy
CN1[1:4] CN14[1:2]
AYG4V1F06HW1 Optical fiber cord
Laser sensor Assy E109271

XA (4pin)
E109116 ESW1 CN18[1:4] CN11[1:18] CN1[1:3]
E108984 bear FG cable Assy
CN6[1:9] Positioned on the frame Positioned on the frame

CN1[1:2] on the station side on the maintenance side SM (7pin)
Emergency switch PRM Assy
E109421 Emergency short Assy CN3[1:3] E108975 Station connecting cable Assy
CN7[1:26]
5559/5557(2pin)
STATION IV PCB Assy Y-origin sensor
M015938 NCU body TS
3042Ⅱ Standard CN1[1:3] KI-3781-AALF
E108310 Y-origin displacement sensor
NCU
E108982
E108983
YORGENC
4
CN1[1:4] KE401-M120-R1
CN22[1:10] E108682 NCU cable 840Assy PCB
CN13[1:8]
F11
(01541 25DR E108972
CN4[1:3] Little fuse) CN12[1:12] STM sensor junction cable Assy
SIDE PLATE 5559/5557(2pin)

CN15[1:4] CN8[1:22] E109683
STM sensor junction cable (30) Assy
CN2[1:20] F10
(01543 15DR
Cable Veyer X Table
CN16[1:14]
Cement resistor temperature thermistor Little fuse) XA (12pin)

CN1[1:20]
CN24[1:3]
E107935(InkHeater thermistor Assy) CN9[1:24] PRC05-P12

E108683 Option junction cable Assy op
XA(5pin)
CN1[1:2] CN10[1:6] CN17[1:2]
SM(2pin)
XA(8pin)
E108969 T-IO junction cable Assy
TypeA E109439
USB Relay
Electrical unit thermistor relay cable Assy
5
XA (11pin)
Voltage switching Assy SML(3pin)

E106970 CN1[1:3]
E300777
P1.25R-20-250 FFC
CN106[1:18]
CN105[1:20]
CN104[1:14]
CN9[1:20] CN1[1:6]
E109262 Cover sensor connection extend cable Assy
CN7[1:20] CN1[1:2] Cover switch 1 SM(4pin)
D3M01K1-3 E109440 ST4-Circulating motor cable Assy / E109684 ST4-Circulating moto
ZMR(3pin)
SW2
BT1 E108973 Air pressure pump Power supply cable Assy / E109686 Air pressure pump Power supply cable (3
Debug board CN3[1:80] CN1[1:2] E109536 E108981 AC PCB SSR cable Assy / E109685 AC PCB SSR cable (30) Assy
F7 F8 JTAG CN4[1:9]
RL1 Cover sensor short cable Assy
Servo monitorCN16[1:5] E108978
USB HOST CN103[1:9]
CN12[1:6]
Interlock right connection cable Assy
CN1[1:3]
X origin sensor
X Drive
6
REMOTE YORGENC KI-3781-AALF
EPL3Main PCB COMFW Assy X origin displacement sensor
CN1[1:4] KE401-M120-R1
E108578 DDRⅡ PRAM(1GB) PCB Assy YL(2pin)
CN1[1:5] E105986 POW[1:2] Servo motor Assy(X)
USB EPL3 Main PCB B COMFW Assy CN5[1:80] CN1[1:80] E300532
Ethernet CN13[1:16] ENC[1:4] MTR1
E109162 PCB2
E108985 XY moter cable Assy YL(3pin)

CN14[1:4] POW[1:2] 60W LC motor
CN15[1:10] ENC[1:4] E301105 MTR2
SM(5pin)
CN102[1:3]
Ferrite core：
CN2[1:16]
CN100[1:18]
SRH-1330（A)
Y Drive
E108980 DC connection cable Assy
CN11[1:6]
PCB1
E108562
Motor regenerative cable Assy
Regenerative resistance PCB Assy
E108339
GFGST-220-8-M4
Ke
7
PCB3 CN2[1:3] Light guide272
SD converter PCB Assy CN1[1:2] CN1[1:2] E301300 PCB5 M802094
CN1[1:14] E108449 FFC1.00-18-2250
PCB9 Cement resistor60W33ΩJ CN3[1:18] CN2[1:54] CN
PCB36 E108684 E301228
D-sub9pin Carriage power electrical unit junction cable Assy E109116 Emergency switch PRM Assy CN4[1:5] 320*2
RP-SDS128MBMK0 SD-card
Level change PCB Assy CN[1:9] ESW2 Ek035WRT-At11 /
CN1[1:2]
Color LCD SL PCB Assy
E109094 CN1[1:5] E108988 E107894
E108979 Power remote SD cable Assy 6042II/3042II EX Only(3 042II Option) RGBLED connection
E109421 Emergency short Assy CN6[1:2]
RWS600B 48V/600W
CN7[1:4]
-V2
CN2[1:2]
CN81[1:10]
CN82[1:10]
+V2
+V1
-V1
5559/5557(2pin) RG
E1
3042Ⅱ Standard
ZWS15B-5
E109266
Keyboard Emergency junction cable Assy
Secondly line
Primary line
PWR1
Power supply
PW R2
CN1[1:5]
IN[1:3]
8
AC100-240V/8A/50/60Hz
R-301SN(79 or B09)
or
0711-SCQ
L1 : UL1015 AWG14
AC(N) AC(N) L1 UL1015,AWG18 EL
CL-1814S
AC(L) AC(L)
SW1 FG FG LOW CUT FERRITE CLAMP：
INLET1 MRFC-13
AC inlet I Assy
E109462 EL
Main Electrical Box

Rev.
PCB17∼24
Ink Bottle
6042II/3042IIEX Only
Ink cartridge ID contact PCB9
CN1[1:2] E105719(ID contact PCB CN032 Assy)
a plate UV UNIT CN1[1:2]

E105719(ID contact PCB CN032
Assy)
Cover switch4 CN1[1:2] E105719(ID contact PCB CN032 Assy)

PCB 25 CN1[1:2] D3M-01K1-3 SW5 Ink cartridge ID contact PCB12
E109262 CN1[1:2] E105719(ID contact PCB CN032 Assy)
PCB 15 4inch-LCUVLED PCB Assy
Cover sensor connection extend cable Assy Ink cartridge ID contact PCB13
E108694 CN1[1:2] E105719(ID contact PCB CN032 Assy)
UVLED Drive14 PCB Assy ZMR(3pin)
ZM(2pin) Ink cartridge ID contact PCB14
E108651
CN1[1:20] CN1[1:2] E105719(ID contact PCB CN032 Assy)
CN5[1:24] E108961 Ink cartridge ID contact PCB15
CN1[1:2] E109537
CN7[1:9] LEDUV junction cable Assy CN2[1:20] CN1[1:2] E105719(ID contact PCB CN032 Assy)
CN1[1:20] Cover sensor short cable Assy Ink cartridge ID contact PCB16
CN8[1:2] LED51-56 CN1[1:2] E105719(ID contact PCB CN032 Assy)
1
CN2[1:20] 6042II/3042IIEX Only
E108976
CN10[1:2] Interlock left connecting cable Assy Liquid level detection sensor 9
CN9[1:3] CN1[1:9] E109069(Magnetic sensor for liquid level 3 relay Assy)
CN11[1:6] E109419
LED57-112 PCB6 Bottle ID cable Assy Liquid level detection sensor 10
CN1[1:9] E109069(Magnetic sensor for liquid level 3 relay Assy)
CN15[1:18] Liquid level detection sensor 11
CN3[1:20] CN3[1:3]
CN1[1:2] FAN4 CN1[1:9] E109069(Magnetic sensor for liquid level 3 relay Assy)
SM(2pin) CN4[1:20] Liquid level detection sensor 12
UVDrive PCB cooling FAN CN6[1:4] CN1[1:9] E109069(Magnetic sensor for liquid level 3 relay Assy)
E106963(Celing FAN Assy)
Liquid level detection sensor 13
CN4[1:9] CN8[1:4] CN1[1:9] E109069(Magnetic sensor for liquid level 3 relay Assy)
CN1[1:2] FAN 3
5559/5557(2pin) UVLED PCB Cooling fan CN10[1:4] CN1[1:9] E109069(Magnetic sensor for liquid level 3 relay Assy
)
E106274(Adsorption FAN Assy))
2
CN11[1:4] E109336
Bottle liquid level detection relay cable Assy
CN12[1:4]
CN13[1:4]
CN14[1:8]
SOL1∼8 6042II/3042IIEX Only
SM(2pin)
Cartridge valve 9
CART IO PCB Assy CN[1:2] E300816
E107936 SM(2pin) Cartridge valve 10
CN[1:2] E300816
SM(2pin) Cartridge valve 11
CN[1:2] E300816
-16-2700 SM(2pin) Cartridge valve 12
CN2[1:16] CN[1:2] E300816
CN[1:2]
3
Exhaust fan E300816
CN[1:2] E300816
CN1[1:4] E109335 SM(2pin) Cartridge valve 15
Station E108554 Wiper IO connecting cable Assy STM(Vacuum pump )1
Power supply cable Assy Bottle valve reley cable Assy
SM(2pin)
CN[1:2] E300816
Cartridge valve 16
CN1[1:6] CN5[1:16] CN[1:2] E300816
E300495/E300513 MTR4
STM(Wiper front and back) E109612
CN1[1:6] STM(Vacuum pump )2
E300495/E300513 MTR3 CN1[1:6] Circulation valve reley cable Assy
E300495/E300513 MTR5
Wiper origin sensor SM(4pin)
CN1[1:3] KI-3781-AAFLF SM(2pin) Cartridge valve 28
Change pump sensor 1 CN[1:2] E300816
CN1[1:3]
E108682 Circulation MTR cable Assy

SM (7pin) KI-3781-AALF 6042Ⅱ/3042ⅡEX Only
E109265

CN[1:2] E300816
CN16[1:12]
Change pump sensor2
CN1[1:3] KI-3781-AALF
M015938 NCU body TS Assy2 6042II/30II EX Standard(3042II Option)
Light guide272
NCU PD_AMP PCB Assy M802094 54mm×8
4
LED 114 SM (2pin)
E107587
PCB 8 NCU LED Assy(TSHF6210)
CN2[1:2] CN1[1:2] E107952
CN1[1:8]
Circulation step motor 1

CN1[1:6]
E300495/E300513 MTR7
Table
PRC05-P12F
to page2
Circulation step motor 2
CN1[1:6] E300495/E300513 MTR11
y option Kebub UNIT
6042Ⅱ/3042ⅡEX Only(3042Ⅱ Option) Diaphragm pump(Ａｉｒ
φ27) MTR8
E108970 E109144 CN[1:6] E301330
FAN1,2
XA(8pin) Table control cable Assy Adsorption FAN relay cable Assy 5559/5557(2pin) Adsorption FAN 1 Pressure Maintaining Diaphragm pump
CN1[1:2] E106274(Adsorption FAN Assy)
HR212 HR212 CN[1:2] E105337 MTR9 Not used
5559/5557(2pin)
5
Adsorption FAN 2
E108681 CN1[1:2] E106274(Adsorption FAN Assy)
Adsorption FAN cable Assy
Used by 6042MkII only
Z-origin sensor
Hot Water Box
CN1[1:3] KI-3781-AALF
ZM (2pin)
STM(Z-Drive) MTR6 Float sensor
CN1[1:6] CN1[1:2] E105378(Float sensor Assy)
E300495/E300513
SM(2pin)
y / E109684 ST4-Circulating motor cable (30) Assy Heater thermistor
CN1[1:2] E107935(Ink Heater thermistor Assy
ssure pump Power supply cable (30) Assy
SM (2pin) XMR (4pin)
Centrifugal pump MTR10
CN1[1:2] E108680
(Brush less centrifugal pump)
E109914
X origin sensor
KI-3781-AALF X Drive Motor E108676 Hot water pump relay cable assy
6
XMR (4pin)
X origin displacement sensor SSR SSR output cable Assy Secondary line
KE401-M120-R1 AQJ212V
E108677 Primary line
Servo motor Assy(X) INPUT- LOAD1 Heater control cable Assy VL (2pin)
Heater 1
E300532 [X Axis moter] INPUT+ LOAD2 CN1[1:2]
MTR1 E108679 (Cartridge heater Assy) HEATER 1
VL (2pin) Heater 2
CN1[1:2] E108679 (Cartridge heater Assy)
L2 HEATER 2
60W LC motor CN9[1:5] AC PCB Assy PCB16 L2 : UL1015 AWG18 F3 (Thermostat)
E301105 MTR2 E107795 CN8[1:4] 1
Thermostat
[Y Axis motor] 2
E300947(Thermostat )
F1 CN7[1:4] Material detected at 120°C
Y Drive Motor CN2[1:4]
RL2
F2 RL3 CN4[1:6]
Key Board L3
RV1
7
Light guide272 CN1[3:4] RL4 CN5[1:6] L3 : UL1015 AWG18
M802094 CN1[1:2]
CN2[1:54] CN1[1:4] RV2 CN6[1:6]
CN3[1:6]
320*240pannel
Ek035WRT-At11 / VT035AKN03-C01
Assy
E107894
RGBLED connection cable Assy
CN7[1:4] CN1[1:4] PCB7
RGB LED PCB Assy
E107856

Rev.
Ionaizor(6042)
E109338
Ionizer connecting cable(60)Assy Ionizer
ionaizor CN1[1:10] SJ-H060A
XA(8pin)
1
Ionaizor(3042)
E109422 Ionizer
Ionizer connecting cable(30)Assy SJ-C2H
ionaizor IN[1:10]
OUT[1:10] CN1[1:10]
2
XA(8pin)
Amplifier unit Anti-static bar
SJ-H036A
E109438 Rear FAN relay cable Assy

Exhaust fan
3
Exhaust fan
Exhaust fan CN1[1:2] FAN5
E301220(DC FAN MOTOR)
SM(2pin) SM(2pin)
Kebab MkⅡ System

E109423 E109556_Kebab control cable (60) Assy (Kebab Mk II L)
4
Option unit relay cable Assy E109557_Kebab control cable (30) Assy (Kebab Mk II L) MTR12
Kebab Step Motor
system CN1[1:6]
E300924
PRC05 PRC05(12pin)
PCB38
ROM-IC Assy
CN[1:3] E107460
SM(3pin)
CN[1:3] Paper width sensor

SG113

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Block Diagram >Fuse Connection Diagram
Rev.
2.1.2 Fuse Connection Diagram 1.1
 Procedure when the fuse is blown

1) Refer the following fuse connection diagram. Check if there is any adhesion of ink or cleaning solution to the PCB
or cable that is connected to the blown fuse, and check whether there is incorrect cable connection. -> If there is
abnormal, replace the parts.
2) Replace the blown fuse. (Fuses used in all PC boards in this device can be replaced alone.)
1
3) By the tester measure the resistance between the fuse and GND after the replacement.
 1. If the resistance is 0 to several Ω, it will be determined to be short forward the fuse.
1.Remove a sensor, motor, head, and cable, etc that are connected to PCB.
2.Check it for a short again, if it is not short circuited, connect the removed parts one by one.
2
3.Repeat above 2. and replace the parts where the short was confirmed.
4.if a short circuit persists even after removing the sensor and motor related, replace the PCB.
5.Make sure that the short is gone, and turn on the power.
 2. It has not been short, or if you can not confirm the short, leave removing the parts associated with the error that
had occurred just before. (Example; Occurred HD THERMIS [12] -> remove the head?
1.If fuse is blown after the power is turned on, exchange the removed parts. 3
2.If the fuse is blown again, it is judged that there is a short circuit in another part. Repeat from 1).

Model
䖃㻰㻯㻌㻸㼕㼚㼑
Carriage
UV DRIVE14 pcb
CN1 UVLED
CN8
48V
F1 䠖 6.3A CN2
F2 䠖 6.3A
Thead Power 9 pcb
SliderT pcb
CN3 CN2
48V Cable CN5 CN101-108
HEAD
Head
VCC
Head
Q2:FET F1:A Head
Head
HEAD
VAA1䡚9
CN6

F2: 3A
ͤNot used
CN1 CN2
Y BEAR Robot Cable
Q1:FET
F1 : 5A
ͤNot used
EPL3B MAIN Electrical BOX
48V
Q21䠖FET CN104 Cartridge

+SLDPOW1_F
F2: 6.3A
ͤ Not used
CN11 Q20䠖FET Cart IO pcb
Stationϻ pcb
2.1.2 Fuse Connection Diagram
5V 16pin
CN5 FFC 16 CN2
㼁㼟㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㼟㼕㼐㼑㻌㻼㻯㻮 CN5
CN9 5V 5V Valbe䠆4
UJF-30_6042MkII Issued 2016.08.29 Revised 2016.10.24 Remark
on
Q21:FET
+IO 5V F2 䠖 2.0A
FFC 20 F2:1.25A 48V Valbe䠆4
+IO POW +Vcas-16

20pin 㼁㼟㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㼟㼕㼐㼑㻌㻼㻯㻮
F4 䠖 6.3A CN1 F4 : 3.15A
CN9 Cable
ͤ Not used 48V
24Vreg
CN16
+24Vadj STM
F6 : 3.15A CN1
CN12 CN2 F3 䠖 2.0A
20pin
+IO 5V
F1:3.15A +KEY5V CN100
F8 +Vcas-20
Color LCD F3 : 3.15A
F7 +KEYPO FFC18 +Vpow-s
ͤ Not used
CN24 F1:6.3A
24Vreg
Q20:FET
+24V
F5 : 3.15A
2.1.2
R.1.1
Rev.
1.1
P.2
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Rev.
2.1.2 Fuse Connection Diagram 1.1
Heater1
Heater2
AC 100V 㻼㼍㼞㼍㼘㼘㼑㼘㻌㻴㼑㼍㼠㼑㼞㼟
7KHUPRVWDW
CN3
Relay 2
3
AC PCb
4
Heater1
Heater2
SSR
5
Thermostat
7KHUPRVWDW
CN7
CN3
6
AC 200V 㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㻴㼑㼍㼠㼑㼞㼟
Relay
F1:12.5A
7
AC PCb
CN1
8
VS
AC
䖃㻭㻯㻌㻸㼕㼚㼑

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Operation Explanation
Electrical Parts
2.1 2.2 2.3 2

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications
Electrical Parts
2.1 2.2 2.3 2

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > EPL3 Main PCB B COM FW Assy.
Rev.
2.3.1 EPL3 Main PCB B COM FW Assy. 1.0
CN102 CN14
D30
D32 CN11
CN1 CN103 D1∼D8

1
CN15
D11
CN5 D13
2
CN2
D12
D15∼D18
F7
CN13 CN7
CN100 F8 3
F1 F4
D35 D33
D29 CN105
CN9 CN104 F2
4
 Outline
Board name: EPL3 Main PCB B COM FW Assy.(E109162)
Location: In electrical BOX

5
 Main specifications
Equipped with a CPU and supports data transmission from a computer via USB and a mail function using Ethernet.
Also controls the X and Y motors, processes image data, and controls the IO board.
 List of connectors 6
No. Pin Intended use AC/DC Remarks
CN1 5 USB DC
CN2 16 Power control, SD memory control, Outside IF connection DC
7
CN5 80 For expansion memory PCB DC
CN7 20 Y origin sensor, cover switch, others DC
CN9 20 IO PCB IF DC
CN11 6 Power input DC
CN13 16 Ethernet DC
CN14 4 Motor power DC
CN15
CN100
10
18
Motor encoder
Color LCD IF
DC
DC
8
CN102 3 For counter-electromotive regeneration PCB connection DC
CN103 9 Outside IF connection DC
CN104 14 Slider system IF connection DC
CN105 20 Slider system IF connection (optical fiber cable) DC
*For the details of connecting destinations, refer to the block diagram.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > EPL3 Main PCB B COM FW Assy.
Rev.
2.3.1 EPL3 Main PCB B COM FW Assy. 1.0
 Fuse rating
Check
No Type Intended use Rate Maintenance part number Remarks
LED
F1 04533.15 For IO PCB (+IO5V) 3.15A D29 MP-M017196 3.15A FUSE
(10 pieces)
F2 045306.3 For slider system (+48V) 6.3A D33 MP-M017194 6.3A FUSE
1
(10 pieces)
F4 045306.3 For IO PCB (+48V) 6.3A D35 MP-M017194 6.3A FUSE
(10 pieces)
F7 nanoSMDC016F Color LCD PCB (+48V) 0.45A PTC fuse
F8 nanoSMDC050F/13.2 Color LCD PCB (+5V) 1.10A PTC fuse
 LED
2
No Intended use Remarks
D1-D8 CPU status display LED
D11 CPLD written display LED
3
D12 Y-origin encoder A phase display LED
D13 Y-origin encoder B phase display LED
D15-D18 FPGA debug LED
D29 IO PCB power supply (+ IO5V) confirmation LED +IO5V
D30 + 5V power supply input validation LED +5VB
D32 +48V power input confirmation LED +V1
D33
D35
Slider system (+ 48V) confirmation LED
IO PCB (+ 48V) confirmation LED
+SLDPOW1_F
+IO POW 4

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications >STATION IV PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.2 STATION IV PCB Assy. 1.0
CN17
CN12 CN8 CN20 CN11
CN14
F4
CN21
CN13
F5
D1∼4 CN23
1
CN5
D78
D79 D5
D80 F3
CN1
D82
2
D83 CN6
D85
D87
CN3
F2
CN2
F1 CN10
CN24
3
F6
CN16 CN9 CN7
 Outline
Board name: Station IV PCB Assy (E108310)

4
 Main specification
To control IO on the machine except IO’s around ink.
No Pin Intended use AC/DC Remarks
CN1 20 IO PCB IF (Main PCB connection) DC
CN3 3 Cover Sensor (jumper) DC E106086 connection
CN5 16 IO PCB IF DC CART IO PCB con-
nection 6
CN6 9 Debug DC
CN7 26 Y-Origin sensor, wiper origin sensor, pump origin sensor, wiper DC
motor, suction pump motor
CN8 22 Z-Origin sensor, BBQ/Kebab sensor, BBQ/Kebab analog input, DC
CN9 24
Y drive motor, Circulation motor, Air pressure pump motor
Auxiliary power supply, Absorption fan, BBQ/Kebab FAN, Float sen- DC 7
sor, X-Origin sensor, Hot water heater thermistor
CN10 6 Cement resistor thermistor DC
CN11 18 Ionizer control, Laser sensor control, X-Origin encoder A,B phase DC
CN12 12 BBQ/Kebab ROM DC
CN13
CN14
8
2
NCU control
Pilot lamp
DC
DC
8
CN16 14 AC PCB control, Hot water pump DC
CN17 2 Back-up (Air pressure pump) DC
CN18 4 Pilot lamp DC
CN20 16 Laser sensor control, Front cover sensor DC
CN21 5 Laser sensor control, Exhaust FAN DC
CN23 10 For debug DC

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications >STATION IV PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.2 STATION IV PCB Assy. 1.0

CN24 3 Power input (+48V) DC
 Fuse rating
Check
1
LED
F1 045306.3 +48VPower input 6.3A D78 MP-M017194 6.3A FUSE
(10 pieces)
F2 04531.25 IO (+IO5V) 1.25A D79 MP-M017195 1.25A FUSE
(10 pieces)?
F3 04533.15 Cascade PCB (+48V) 3.15A D80 MP-M017196 3.15A FUSE No Cascade
F4 04533.15 IO PCB (+48V) 3.15A

(10 pieces)
D83 MP-M017196 3.15A FUSE
PCB
2
(10 pieces)
F5 04533.15 IO PCB (+24V) 3.15A D85 MP-M017196 3.15A FUSE
(10 pieces)
F6 04533.15 IO PCB (+24Vadj) 3.15A D87 MP-M017196 3.15A FUSE
(10 pieces)
3
 LED
4
D1-D4 FPGA debug LED
D5 CPLD written display LED
D78 +48V power input confirmation LED +Vpow-s
D79 IO PCB (+IO5V) confirmation LED +IO5V
D80 Cascade PCB (+48V) confirmation LED +Vcas-20
D82 IC in PCB (+48V) confirmation LED +5V
D83
D85
IO PCB (+48V) confirmation LED
IO PCB(+24V) confirmation LED
+Vcas-16
+24V 5
D87 IO PCB(+24Vadj) confirmation LED +24Vdj

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > DDR II PRAM (1GB) PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.3 DDR II PRAM (1GB) PCB Assy. 1.0
CN1
2
 Outline
Board name: DDRIIPRAM(1GB) PCB Assy (E105986)

3
Memory PCB for the print data
CN1 80 EPL3 main PCB connection DC

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Counter-electromotive Regenerative
Rev.
2.3.4 Counter-electromotive Regenerative PCB Assy 1.0
CN1
D1 CN2
3
 Outline 4
Board name: Counter-electromotive regenerative PCB Assy (E108339)
5
Prevent the power supply voltage rise by the motor back EMF (electromotive force).
 List of connectors
No. Pin Intended use AC/DC Remark

CN1
CN2
2
3
Motor drive power connection
Regenerative resistor connection
DC
DC 6
 LED
No
D1
Intended use
Lighting while power regeneration
Remarks
7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > SD Conversion PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.5 SD Conversion PCB Assy. 1.0
1
CN1
4
 Outline
Board name: SD Converter PCB Assy (E108449)
SD card slot is implemented.

5

CN1 14 EPL3 main PCB connection DC
6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Level Converting PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.6 Level Converting PCB Assy. 1.0
1
CN1
4
 Outline
Board name: Level converting PCB assy. (E109094)
Mounted position: in the electrical box
For IF PCB connection of the external unit.

5
Part No. Pin Purpose of use AC/DC Remark

CN1 5 EPL3 Main PCB connection DC Control IF of external
DSUB9 9 RS-232C IF DC
unit
6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 150LPI Encoder PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.7 150LPI Encoder PCB Assy. 1.0
 Outline 4
Board name: 150LPI encoder PCB assy. (E103852)
Mounted position: on the slider of printing unit
5
Encoder sensor PCB for the linear scale.
Part No. Pin Purpose of use AC/DC Remarks

CN1 4 Slider T PCB connection
DC
6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > T Head Power 16 PCB/T Head Power 9
Rev.
2.3.8 T Head Power 16 PCB/T Head Power 9 PCB Assy. 1.0
CN3
D19
D17 D18
2
F1
CN1 CN2 3
4
 Outline
Board name: T Head power 16 PCB/T Head power 9 PCB Assy.(E108669/E108989)
*Use A as maintenance parts to ensure part standardization.
Mounted position: in the carriage

5
Generate a power supply for the head drive.(The circuit that generates power for 9 PCB is divided into 9 rows.)
CN1 20 For head drive voltage control DC Connect to the slider T PCB
CN2 40 For head drive voltage out DC Connect to the slider T PCB
CN3 4 power input
DC
7
 Fuse Specifications
Check
8
No. Type Purpose of use Rate Maintenance part number Remarks
LED
F1 0453001. For head power supply 1A D18 MP-M018995 1A FUSE
(10 pieces)
 LED Specifications
Part No. Purpose of use Remarks

D17 LED for checking the head power supply

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > T Head Power 16 PCB/T Head Power 9
Rev.
2.3.8 T Head Power 16 PCB/T Head Power 9 PCB Assy.1.0

D18 LED for checking blown head power fuses
D19 LED for checking power supply

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > SLIDER T PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.9 SLIDER T PCB Assy. 1.0
CN3 CN1 CN2
D1 F1
CN21
D12 D13
D11
D2 F2 1
CN4
D7
D8
2
CN20
D9
D10 D3∼6
CN104
CN106
CN108
CN102
CN101
CN105
CN107
CN103
CN19
3
CN11
CN12
CN13
CN14
CN15
CN16
CN17
CN18
CN5
CN8 CN9
 Outline
Board name: Slider T PCB Assy.(E108793)
Location: In the carriage

4
Control Head and Liquid detection sensor, sub-tank heater, and other I/O control operations
CN1 26 Slider system IF connection (connect to the main PCB) DC
CN3 20 Slider system IF connection (optical fiber cable) DC
CN4
CN5
9
40
For debug
T Head Power 9(16) PCB IF
DC
DC 6
CN8 4 UVLED cooling FAN, UVLED Drive PCB cooling FAN DC
CN9 20 Pressure sensor, Negative sensor, UVLED thermistor, Back-up AD DC
CN11 5 Liquid detection sensor DC
7
CN18
CN19
5
10
Liquid detection sensor
UVLED Drive14 PCB connection
DC
DC
8
CN20 20 150LPI Encoder PCB connection, DC
LED pointer, Linear encoder sensor, Back-up sensor
CN21 22 SOLENOID VALVE(3 POS/ 2 PORTS_2 POS/ 4 PORTS) DC
CN101 20 Head IF(Head 1) DC

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > SLIDER T PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.9 SLIDER T PCB Assy. 1.0

1
 Fuse rating
Check
LED
2
F1 0453005. Cascade PCB (+48V) 5A LED1 MP-M018715 5A FUSE No Cascade
(10 pieces) PCB
F2 0453003. IO PCB (+48V) 3A LED1 MP-M017242 3A FUSE No IO PCB
1 (10 pieces)
 LED
No Intended use Remarks 3

LED1 Cascade PCB (+48V) confirmation LED
LED2 CPLD written display LED
LED3 SNS1 confirmation LED
4
LED7-10 FPGA debug LED
LED11 IO PCB (+48V) confirmation LED
LED12 IO PCB (+24V) confirmation LED +24V
LED13 IC in PCB (+5V) confirmation LED +5V
5

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > UVLED_Drive14 PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.10 UVLED_Drive14 PCB Assy. 1.0
CN5
D1 1
2
D16 - 28 D17 - 29
CN1 CN2 CN8 CN9

F1 F2
 Outline 3
Board name: UVLED_Drive14 PCB Assy.(E108651)
Mounted position: in the LED unit in the carriage
Control lighting of the UVLED.

4
5
CN1 20 UVLED PCB IF DC
CN2 20 UVLED PCB IF DC
CN5 24 UVLED drive PCB control IF DC Slider T PCB Connec-
tion
CN8 2 Power input for UVLED DC
6
CN9 3 UVLED PCB thermistor DC
*For the details of connecting destinations, refer to the block diagram
Check
7
LED
F1 045306.3 For UVLED power supply 6.3A MP-M017194 6.3A FUSE
CN1 (10 pieces)
F2 045306.3 For UVLED power supply 6.3A MP-M017194 6.3A FUSE
CN2 (10 pieces)
 LED Specifications 8
D1 CPLD (04) written display LED
D16-D29 LED for checking the UV-LED illumination

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications >4inch-LCUVLED PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.11 4inch-LCUVLED PCB Assy. 1.0
Relation between individual As and Bs and light block divisions
Block 2 Block 1
1
CN1
CN2 2
3
CN3
5
CN4
Block 4 Block 3 6
 Outline
Board name: 4inch-LCUVLED Assy.(R108694)
Mounted position: UVLED 7
PCB used as the light source for ink cure.The output intensity is set automatically depending on the printing
mode.
CN1 20 LED block1 drive power supply, Thermistor(TH1) input DC

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > PD AMP PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.12 PD AMP PCB Assy. 1.0
CN2
CN1
 Outline
Board name: PD AMP PCB Assy.(E107587)
2
Mounted position: in the NCU
The sensor PCB of NCU. 3

No. Pin Intended use AC/DC Remarks
4
CN1 8 Station IV PCB connection DC
CN2 2 LED Assy connection DC E107952 (NCU LED
Assy)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications >ID Contact PCB CN032 Single Assy.
Rev.
2.3.13 ID Contact PCB CN032 Single Assy. 1.0
2
CN1
3
 Outline
Board name: ID contact PCB CN032 single assy. (E106699)
Mounted position: in the ink supply unit 4

Read the ink ID.
 List of connector
5
Part No. Pin Purpose of use AC/DC Remark
CN1 2 CartIO PCB connection DC

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > CART IO PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.14 CART IO PCB Assy. 1.0
D1 D2 D3 D4
D5 D6 D7 D8
2
3
CN2 CN3 D31 CN4 D10 CN14
D32 CN11
4
CN13 CN10
CN1 F2 F3 CN15
CN12
CN16 CN5
5
CN9
CN8 CN7 CN6
 Outline
6
Board name: CART IO PCB Assy.(E107936)
Mounted position: in the ink supply unit
7
Control the ink valves, displays the LED corresponding to each slot.
Part No.
CN1
Pin
4 For Power supply
Purpose of use AC/DC
DC
Remarks
8
CN2 16 IO PCB IF (connect to COM32 IO PCB) DC Station IV PCB con-
nection
CN3 3 Cover sensor DC
CN4 9 For debug DC
CN5 18 Ink valve control DC
CN6 4 Bottle liquid level detection sensor DC Ink1

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > CART IO PCB Assy.
Rev.

1
CN14 8 Bottle liquid level detection sensor power supply DC
CN15 16 Ink IC control DC
CN16 12 Circulation motor, Circulation valve control DC
2
Check
LED
F2 0453002. IO Output 1 2A D31 MP-M017193 2A FUSE
(10 pieces)
3
F3 0453002. IO Output 2 2A D32 MP-M017193 2A FUSE
(10 pieces)
 LED Specifications

D1~D8
D10
Ink cartridge status display
Finished writing CPLD data display 4
D31 IO output1 check +48V_1
D32 IO output2 check +48V_2

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications >Color LCD SL PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.15 Color LCD SL PCB Assy. 1.0
[Button side]
D2 D2
1
2
[Connector side]
CN1
CN2
CN7 3
4
CN6 CN3
CN4
 Outline
Board name: Color LCD SL PCB Assy.(E108988) 5
Mounted position: in the operation panel section
Equipped with color 320 x240 dot LCD and the key SW, it is used for the operation of the printer.
6

CN1 9 For debug DC
CN2
CN3
54
18
Color LCD
Color LCD IF Connect to main PCB assy.
DC
DC 7
CN4 5 For debug DC
CN6 2 Cover sensor DC
CN7 4 Connect to RGB LED PCB assy. DC
8
 LED specification
Part No Purpose of use Remarks

D2 LED for ENTER key Blue

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > RGB LED PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.16 RGB LED PCB Assy. 1.0
1
D1
2
 Outline
Board name: RGB LED PCB Assy. (E107856)
Mounted position: in the operation panel section
3
Equipped with a status indicator LED at the bottom of the keyboard.
4

CN1 4 Color LCD PCB connection DC
5
 LED specification

D1 LED for indicating printer status

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > AC PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.17 AC PCB Assy. 1.0
CN1
CN3
F2 F1
1
CN7
2
CN9
3
 Outline
Board name: AC PCB Assy (E107795)
4
Location: Under the left maintenance space
Control the heater. Switch the 100V / 200V system.
 Connector specification
No. Pin Intended use AC/DC Remarks 5

CN1 4 AC input AC
CN3 6 Heater1 AC
CN7 4 SSR connection (Heater1,3) AC
CN9 5 Voltage change SW input DC
Zero cross point output
6
No Type Intended use Rate Check LED Remarks

F1 50T-125H Heater fuse 5x20 D29 12.5A AC protection
7
mm
F2 50T-125H Heater fuse 5x20 D33 12.5A AC protection
mm

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Negative Pressure Sensor 73 PCB
Rev.
2.3.18 Negative Pressure Sensor 73 PCB Assy. 1.0
CN1
2
 Outline
Board name: Negative pressure sensor 73 PCB Assy. (E107554)
3
Pressure detection of negative pressure side of the ink route.
Part No. Pin Purpose of use AC/DC Remarks 4

CN1 4 Slider T PCB connection DC

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Positive Pressure Sensor PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.19 Positive Pressure Sensor PCB Assy. 1.0
CN1
2
 Outline
Board name: Positive pressure sensor PCB Assy.(E105304)
3
For the pressure detection of the positive pressure side of the ink route
Part No. Pin Purpose of use AC/DC Remarks 4

CN1 4 Slider T PCB connection DC

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 5V Power Supply
Rev.
2.3.20 5V Power Supply 1.0
2
 Outline
Board name: 5V power supply (ZWS15B-5)
3
Mounted position: in electrical box
5V power supply PCB of the device.
Part No. Type Purpose of use AC/DC Remarks 4

CN1 B3P5-VH AC input AC
CN51 B2P-VH 5V output DC Main PCB connection

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 48V Power Supply
Rev.
2.3.21 48V Power Supply 1.0
2
 Outline
Board name: 48V power supply (RWS600B-48/R)
3
Mounted position: in electrical box
4
48V power supply PCB of the device.
Part No. Type Purpose of use AC/DC Remarks

 M3.5 screw AC input terminal (N) AC
5
 M3.5 screw AC input terminal (L) AC
 M3.5 screw GND terminal AC
 M5 screw – output terminal (GND) DC Connect to Main PCB / Station 4 PCB / Slider T PCB /
UV LED Drive PCB / T head power16/9 PCB.
 M5 screw + output terminal (48V) DC Connect to Main PCB / Station 4 PCB / Slider T PCB /
UV LED Drive PCB / T head power16/9 PCB.
6
CN81 B24B-PHDSS Remote ON/OFF control DC
 LED
No Type number Intended use Remarks

 – Main indication LED
7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Ink Related Parts
Workflow
3.1 3.2 3.3 3
Ink Related Parts Driving Parts Electrical Parts
3.4 3.5 3.6
Sensors UV UNIT Regular Replacement•
Regular Maintenance 4

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Ink Related Parts > Replacement of the Head Unit
Rev.
3.1.1 Replacement of the Head Unit 1.2
2
 List of replacement procedures
Item Work operation Description Ref.
3
Ink 1.  Ink discharge Discharge ink between the sub-tank and the head. 6.2.1
Covers 2.  Removing covers, etc. Remove the following covers.
 carriage cover F
Hot water 3.  Drain the hot water Drain the hot water. 4.3.3
Power supply 4.  Turning OFF the main power sup- Turn OFF the main power supply.
4
ply
Head 5.  Removing the head Remove the target head. 6.2.2
6.  Mounting the head. Mount a new head.
Hot water 7.  Filling hot water in the hot water Filling hot water in the hot water tube. 4.3.3
tube.
5
Power supply 8.  Turning ON the power supply Turn ON the sub power supply and the main power supply.
Ink 9.  Ink filling in the head Perform ink filling between the sub-tank and the head. 6.2.1
Adjust 10.  Checking the head ID Enter the head ID. 4.2.10
11.  Head adjust Perform slant adjustment, position adjustment and 4.2.2
stagger adjustment. 4.2.3
Covers
12.  Correction of dot position
13.  Mounting the covers
Perform dot position correction.
Mount the covers that have been removed.
4.2.4
6.1.1
6
Turn the main power OFF when turning the power OFF.
It is very dangerous if the sleep mode functions mistakenly during the operation.
7
 Be sure to wear protective glasses and working gloves during the operation.
Ink may get into your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you
touch the ink.
 Be careful of UV light as UV ink is used. Protect the machine from UV light with sheet or curtain.
8
Be sure to enter the head ID after replacing the head.

Rev.
 Head replacement procedure

Use the following procedure to replace the head when inspecting for failure, etc.
 Pay careful attention to the following when replacing the head.

1.Only discharge the ink, and do not perform cleaning.
2.Be careful to avoid subjecting the head to external light, as much as possible.
3.Be sure to attach a test pattern and the nozzle selection ALL pattern. The head and the test pattern
should match exactly. 1
If the head of the same No. is replaced continuously due to recurring failure, write the serial
number of the head on the test pattern to clearly identify the relationship between the failed
head and the test pattern.
2
4.Indicate the areas of concern (causes for replacement) on the test pattern with check or marks by
circling them.
 Packaging procedure
1. Print a test pattern and the nozzle selection ALL pattern.

Print example
3
Use a photo paper so that missing dots can be identified.
Mark
2. Mark locations where failures occurred.

Write down the serial number of the head, to show clearly that
4
the test pattern and head match exactly.
5
3. Discharge all ink from the head.
4. Remove the target head.(Refer to 6.2.2 Head Unit )
Never touch the tip of the nozzle.
5. Remove the cap of new Head.(x2)

6
7
?????

Rev.
6. Mount the cap (x2) you removed to the return head.
7. Place the head in the package.

Use the packaging material that the new head arrived inside.
Return head
8. Close the pack, wrap in an air cap. 1
Example of packaging
9. Pack along with the prepared test drawing in step1.
2
10. On the outside of the box, write the following information.
1).Model
2).Serial number
3).Ink type
3
4).Defective color
5).Head number

Rev.
 Needed information
If you plan to return the head in trouble etc, provide the following information.
㻰㼑㼒㼑㼏㼠㼕㼢㼑㻌㻴㼑㼍㼐㻌㻵㼚㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻰㼍㼙㼍㼓㼑㼐㻌㼐㼍㼠㼑㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻛㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻛
㻾㼑㼜㼛㼞㼠㼑㼐㻌㼐㼍㼠㼑㻌
㻰㼑㼍㼘㼑㼞
㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻛㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻛㻾㼑㼜㼛㼞㼠㼑㼐㻌㼎㼥㻌㻦
1
㻴㼑㼍㼐㻌㼕㼚㼒㼛㻚㻴㼑㼍㼐㻌㼚㼍㼙㼑
㻴㼑㼍㼐㻌㼟㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㻺㼛㻚
㻼㼛㼟㼕㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻺㼛㻌㼛㼒㻌㼍㻌㼐㼑㼒㼑㼏㼠㼕㼢㼑㻌㼔㼑㼍㼐
2
㻹㼍㼏㼔㼕㼚㼑㻌㼕㼚㼒㼛㻚㻹㼛㼐㼑㼘㼁㻶㻲㻙㻟㻜㻠㻞㻹㼗䊡㻌㻘㻌㼁㻶㻲㻙㻢㻜㻠㻞㻹㼗䊡㻌㻘㻌㼁㻶㻲㻙㻭㻟㻹㼗䊡
㻹㼍㼏㼔㼕㼚㼑㻌㻺㼛㻚㻌㻛㻌㻲㼃㻌㼢㼑㼞㼟㼕㼛㼚㻛㻌㻲㼃㻌㼂㼑㼞㻚
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㼗㻌㼗㼕㼚㼐㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㼕㼚㼗㻌㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㼟㼑㼠㻺㼛㻌㻛㻌㼅㼑㼟㻌䠄䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䊻䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䠅
㻾㻵㻼㻚㻾㻸㻼㻚㻌㼂㼑㼞㻚㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻛㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻻㼠㼔㼑㼞㻌㻾㻵㻼㻚㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌
㻾㼑㼟㼛㼘㼡㼠㼕㼛㼚
3
㻵㼚㼗㻌㼕㼚㼒㼛㻚㻷㼕㼚㼐㻌㼛㼒㻌㼕㼚㼗㻸㻴㻝㻜㻜㻌㻌㻘㻌㻌㻌㼁㻿㻝㻞㻜㻌㻌㻘㻌㻌㻼㻾㻙㻞㻜㻜㻌㻌㻘㻌㻌㻸㼁㻿㻙㻝㻡㻜
㻰㼑㼒㼑㼏㼠㼕㼢㼑㻌㼕㼚㼗㻌㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻮㼗㻌㻘㻹㼍㻌㻘㻯㼥㻌㻘㼅㼑㻌㻘㼃㻌㻘㻸㼙㻌㻘㻸㼏㻌㻘㻯㻸㻌㻘㻌㻼㼞
㻵㼚㼗㻌㻸㼛㼠㻌㻺㼛㻚
㻹㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼕㼚㼒㼛㻚㻷㼕㼚㼐㻌㼛㼒㻌㼙㼑㼐㼕㼍
㻱㼙㼎㼛㼟㼟㼅㼑㼟㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻛㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻺㼛㻌
4
㼀㼔㼑㻌㼜㼞㼕㼚㼠㻌㼑㼤㼏㼑㼑㼐㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼙㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼑㼐㼓㼑㼅㼑㼟㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻛㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻺㼛㻌
㻱㼚㼢㼕㼞㼛㼚㼙㼑㼚㼠㻴㼑㼍㼐㻌㼓㼍㼜
㼀㼑㼙㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼡㼞㼑㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㼔㼡㼙㼕㼐㼕㼠㼥䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䉝䚷䚷䚷䚷䠂
㻰㼡㼟㼠㻌㻔㼅㼑㼟㻦㻌㼕㼠㼟㻌㼗㼕㼚㼐㻕㻺㼛㻌㻛㻌㼅㼑㼟䠄㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌䚷㻌㻌㻌䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷㻌䚷䚷䠅
㻭㼙㼎㼕㼑㼚㼠㻌㼘㼕㼓㼔㼠㻌㼠㼛㻌㼙㼍㼏㼔㼕㼚㼑㻔㼅㼑㼟㻦㻌㼕㼠㼟㻌㼟㼕㼠㼡㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻕㻺㼛㻌㻛㻌㼅㼑㼟䠄㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌䚷㻌㻌㻌䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷㻌䚷䚷䠅
㻲㼕㼤㼕㼚㼓㻌㻶㼕㼓㻌㻔㼅㼑㼟㻦㻌㻯㼛㼘㼛㼞䞉㻿㼔㼕㼚㼑㻕㻺㼛㻌㻛㻌㼅㼑㼟䠄㻯㼛㼘㼛㼞䠖䚷㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌䚷㻌㻌㻿㼔㼕㼚㼑䠖䚷㻌㻌㼅㼑㼟㻌㻛㻌㻺㼛䚷䚷䠅
㼁㼟㼑㼐㻌㼟㼜㼑㼏㼕㼒㼕㼏㻌㼏㼔㼑㼙㼕㼏㼍㼘㼟㻌㼍㼞㼛㼡㼚㼐㻌㼠㼔㼑㻺㼛㻌㻌㻛㻌㻌㼅㼑㼟㻌㻌㻔㻷㼕㼚㼐㻦㻌䚷䚷㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌䠅
5
㻌㼙㼍㼏㼔㼕㼚㼑㻔㼅㼑㼟㻦㻌㻷㼕㼚㼐㻕
㻼㼑㼞㼕㼛㼐㼕㼏㻌㼞㼑㼜㼘㼍㼏㼑㼙㼑㼚㼠㻌㼛㼒㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼙㼕㼟㼠㻌㼒㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞
㻾㼑㼙㼍㼞㼗㼟㻔㻭㼚㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞㻌㼕㼚㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻕
㼀㼔㼑㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼑㼟㻌㼛㼒㻰㼕㼐㻌㼍㻌㼙㼑㼐㼕㼍㻌㼖㼍㼙㻌㼛㼏㼏㼡㼞㻫㼅㼑㼟㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻛㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻺㼛㻌

㻌㼜㼞㼛㼎㼘㼑㼙㻰㼕㼐㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼜㼞㼛㼎㼘㼑㼙㻌㼛㼏㼏㼡㼞㻌㼍㼒㼠㼑㼞㻌㼏㼔㼍㼚㼓㼕㼚㼓㻌㼍㻌㼙㼑㼐㼕㼍㻫㼅㼑㼟㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻛㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻺㼛㻌
6
㻌㼐㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㼟㼀㼔㼑㻌㼐㼍㼠㼑㻌㼛㼒㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼜㼞㼑㼢㼕㼛㼡㼟㻌㼔㼑㼍㼐㻌㼞㼑㼜㼘㼍㼏㼑㼙㼑㼚㼠
㻔㻴㼑㼍㼐㻌㼛㼒㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼟㼍㼙㼑㻌㼜㼛㼟㼕㼠㼕㼛㼚㻕
㻭㼚㻌㼡㼚㼡㼟㼑㼐㻌㼜㼑㼞㼕㼛㼐㻌㼣㼍㼟㻌㼙㼛㼞㼑㻌㼠㼔㼍㼚㻌㼍㻌㼣㼑㼑㼗㻚㻺㼛㻌㻌㻛㻌㻌㼅㼑㼟㻌㻌㻔㻌䚷䚷㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㼐㼍㼥㼟䠅
㻰㼕㼐㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼙㼍㼏㼔㼕㼚㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌㼡㼟㼑㼐㻌㼣㼕㼠㼔㼛㼡㼠㻌㼏㼛㼢㼑㼞㼟㻫㼅㼑㼟㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻛㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻺㼛
㼁㼟㼑㼞㻌㼍㼐㼖㼡㼟㼠㼑㼐㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼔㼑㼍㼐㻌㼕㼚㼐㼕㼢㼕㼐㼡㼍㼘㼘㼥㻚㻺㼛㻌㻛㻌㼅㼑㼟㻌㻔㻯㼛㼚㼠㼑㼚㼠㼟㻌㼛㼒㻌㼍㼐㼖㼡㼟㼠㼙㼑㼚㼠㻦㻌䚷
㻔㻴㼑㼍㼐㻌㼢㼛㼘㼠㼍㼓㼑㻌㻛㻌㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㻌㼛㼒㻌㼣㼍㼢㼑㼒㼛㼞㼙㻕㻕
㼀㼔㼑㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼑㼟㻌㼛㼒㻌㼚㼛㼦㼦㼘㼑㻌㼐㼞㼛㼜㻌㼛㼡㼠㻾㼍㼚㼐㼛㼙㻌㻌㻛㻌㻌㻿㼜㼑㼏㼕㼒㼕㼑㼐㻌㻌㻛㻌㻌㻼㼘㼑㼚㼠㼥
㻾㼑㼟㼠㼛㼞㼍㼠㼕㼢㼑
㻌㼣㼛㼞㼗㻌㼕㼚㼒㼛㻚
㻰㼕㼐㻌㼥㼛㼡㻌㼜㼑㼞㼒㼛㼞㼙㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼒㼛㼘㼘㼛㼣㼕㼚㼓㻌㼣㼛㼞㼗㼟㻌㼎㼑㼒㼛㼞㼑
㻌㼔㼑㼍㼐㻌㼞㼑㼜㼘㼍㼏㼑㼙㼑㼚㼠㻫
䠄㻼㼘㼑㼍㼟㼑㻌㼏㼔㼑㼏㼗㻌㼠㼛㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼎㼑㼘㼛㼣㻚䠅 7
㻸㼑㼍㼗㻌㼏㼔㼑㼏㼗䕕
㻯㼘㼑㼍㼚㼕㼚㼓䕕
㻭㼕㼞㻌㼏㼔㼑㼏㼗䕕
8
㻭㼕㼞㻌䕕
㻺㼛㼦㼦㼘㼑㻌㼣㼍㼟㼔䕕
㻼㼞㼑㼟㼟㼡㼞㼑㻌㼒㼑㼑㼐㼕㼚㼓㻌㼛㼒㻌㼏㼘㼑㼍㼚㼕㼚㼓㻌㼟㼛㼘㼡㼠㼕㼛㼚䕕
㻾㼑㼜㼘㼍㼏㼑㻌㼣㼕㼜㼑㼞䕕
㻾㼑㼝㼡㼑㼟㼠㻌㼍㼚㼐㼃㼍㼞㼞㼍㼚㼠㼥㻌䕕㻌㻔㻼㼘㼑㼍㼟㼑㻌㼒㼕㼘㼘㻌㼕㼚㻌㼍㻌㼏㼔㼑㼏㼗㻌㼙㼍㼞㼗㻌㼕㼒㻌㼥㼛㼡㻌㼞㼑㼝㼡㼕㼞㼑㻌㼍㻌㼣㼍㼞㼞㼍㼚㼠㼥㻚㻕
㻌㼟㼡㼓㼓㼑㼟㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻔㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼛㼞
㻌㼜㼞㼛㼏㼑㼐㼡㼞㼑㻕
㻯㼔㼑㼏㼗㻌㼒㼛㼞䕕㻌㻰㼑㼒㼑㼏㼠㼕㼢㼑㻌㼔㼑㼍㼐䕕㻌㼀㼑㼟㼠㻌㼜㼞㼕㼚㼠䕕㻌㻿㼍㼙㼜㼘㼑㻌㼛㼒㻌㼐㼑㼒㼑㼏㼠㼕㼢㼑㻌㼜㼞㼕㼚㼠
㻌㼍㼏㼏㼑㼟㼟㼛㼞㼕㼑㼟䕕㻌㼀㼔㼑㻌㼐㼍㼠㼍㻌㼛㼒㻌㼜㼞㼛㼎㼘㼑㼙㻌㼐㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㼟㻔㻮㼍㼏㼗㼡㼜㼐㼍㼠㼍㻕

Rev.
 Attachment
1. Used head (troubled head)

Return the head by discharging the ink and putting it in a bundled box. Shade the light with aluminum foil not
to contact the nozzle surface.
2. Test drawing (the one can check the state of the nozzle.)
1
3. Samples missing nozzle can be confirmed (finished goods)
If possible to be provided by the user.
4. Data that trouble occurs (backup files, etc.)
1). In order to suggest work improvement and treatment methods.
2). In particular, a print at the start of the color change, it is necessary at the time of jetting delay occurs (for
data can be a possible cause.)
2
[1] [2]: indispensable when returned. [3] [4]: to be sent back if provided from an user.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Ink Related Parts > Replacement of the Sub-tank
Rev.
3.1.2 Replacement of the Sub-tank 1.0

2
Ink 1.  Ink discharge Discharge ink between the sub-tank and the head. 6.2.1
ply 3
Covers 3.  Removing covers, etc. Remove the following covers.
 Carriage cover F
Sub-tank 4.  Removing the sub-tank Remove the target sub-tank. 6.2.1
Power supply
5.  Mounting the sub-tank
6.  Turning ON the power supply

Mount the new sub-tank.
Turn ON the main power supply and the power supply.

4
Ink 7.  Ink filling in the head Perform ink filling into the head and the sub-tank. 6.2.1
Covers 8.  Mounting the covers Mount the covers that have been removed. 6.1.1
5
6
 Be sure to wear protective glasses and working gloves during the operation.
touch the ink.
7
 Be careful of UV light as UV ink is used. Protect the machine from UV light with sheet or curtain.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Ink Related Parts> Replacement of the Circulation Pump
Rev.
3.1.3 Replacement of the Circulation Pump 1.1
 List of replacement procedures 2

Ink 1.  Ink discharge Discharge ink in the route. 4.2.9
ply 3
Covers 3.  Removing covers, etc. Remove the following cover. 6.1.1
 Cartridge rear cover H
 Cover LH
Pump head 4.  Removing the supply pump assy. Remove the target circulation pump assy..
5.  Mounting the supply pump assy. Mount the circulation pump assy..
6.2.8
6.2.8
4
Power supply 6.  Turning ON the power supply Turn ON the main power supply and the power supply.
Ink 7.  Ink filling Fill the route with ink.
Covers 8.  Mounting the covers Mount the cover that have been removed. 6.1.1
5
Be sure to wear protective glasses and working gloves during the operation.
Ink may get into your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you touch
the ink.
6
Use paper towels to clean the ink, and be careful not to pollute the surroundings with waste ink or
washing liquid.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Ink Related Parts> Replacement of the Ink Filter
Rev.
3.1.4 Replacement of the Ink Filter 1.0
3042MkII:x6
6042MkII:x8
 List of replacement procedures 2

Ink 1.  Ink discharge Discharge ink in the route. 4.2.9
Power supply
Covers
2.  Turning OFF the main power supply Turn OFF the main power supply.
3.  Removing covers, etc. Remove the following cover. 6.1.1
3
 Cartridge rear cover H
 Cover LH
Filter 4.  Removing the supply filter. Remove the target circulation filter. 6.2.9
5.  Mounting the supply filter. Mount the circulation filter. 6.2.9 4

Ink 7.  Ink filling Fill the route with ink.
Covers 8.  Mounting the covers Mount the cover that have been removed. 6.1.1
5
6
the ink.
Use paper towels to clean the ink, and be careful not to pollute the surroundings with waste ink or
washing liquid.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Driving Parts
Workflow
3.1 3.2 3.3 3
3.4 3.5 3.6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Driving Parts > Replacement of the X-axis Motor
Rev.
3.2.1 Replacement of the X-axis Motor 1.0
X-axis motor Assy.
Belt adjustment BKT
XM top BKT
X motor BKT
1
Item
Power supply
Work operation Description
1.  Turning OFF the main power sup- Turn OFF the main power supply.
Ref.
2
ply
Covers 2.  Removal of covers, etc. Remove the following covers. 6.1.1
 Table rear cover U
Connector 3.  Disconnect the connector Disconnect the connector.
3
X-axis motor 4.  Removal of the BKT Remove the XM top BKT and the X motor BKT. 6.3.1
assy.
5.  Loosen the fixing screw Loosen the fixing screw of the Belt adjustment BKT.
6.  Removal of the X-axis motor Remove the X-axis motor.
7.  Mounting of the X-axis motor Mount the X-axis motor. 4

Connector 8.  Connect the connector Connect the connector
Adjust 9.  Adjustment of the belt tension Adjust the tension of the belt.
Check 11.  Check of hunting Check if any hunting sound occurs when the motor is driv-
ing.
5
Covers 12.  Mounting of the covers Mount the covers that have been removed. 6.1.1
6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Driving Parts > Replacement of the Y-axis Motor
Rev.
3.2.2 Replacement of the Y-axis Motor 1.0
Belt tension fixing

screw
Y-axis motor Assy.

Tension adjustment spring
1
Item
Power supply
Work operation Description
1.  Turning OFF the main power sup- Turn OFF the main power supply.
Ref.
2
ply
 Cover RH
Y-axis motor
assy.
3.  Loosen the belt tension. Loosen the belt tension fixing screw and the tension
adjustment spring.
6.3.3
3
4.  Removal of the Y-axis motor Disconnect the connector and remove the Y-axis motor.
5.  Mounting of the Y-axis motor Connect the connector and mount the Y-axis motor so that
the vacuuming window turns to the front side.
Adjust 6.  Adjustment of the belt tension Adjust the tension of the belt.
4
Check 8.  Check of hunting Check if any hunting sound occurs when the motor is
driving.
9.  Mounting the covers

5
Covers Mount the covers that have been removed. 6.1.1

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Driving Parts > Replacement of the Z-axis Motor
Rev.
3.2.3 Replacement of the Z-axis Motor 1.0
1
Item Work operation Description Ref. 2

Power supply 1.  Turning OFF the main power Turn OFF the main power supply.
supply
3
 Rear cover U
 Rear cover R
 Rear cover L
Z-axis motor 3.  Z axis motor replacement Replace the Z-axis motor. 6.3.7
Assy.
4.  Adjustment of the belt tension
4
Adjust Adjust the tension of the belt.
Check 6.  Check of Table up/down Execute [#TEST] - [#AGEING].- [Z SERVO] 5.1.10

operation

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Electrical Parts
Workflow
3.1 3.2 3.3 3
3.4 3.5 3.6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Electrical Parts > Replacement of the EPL3 Main PCB B COM FW Assy.
Rev.
3.3.1 Replacement of the EPL3 Main PCB B COM FW Assy. 1.0
1

2
Advance 1.  Parameter and Log upload Before replacing the PCB, upload its parameter and Log 8.1.3
preparation upload to the PC. 8.1.5
Covers
ply
3.  Removing covers, etc. Remove the electrical box cover. 6.1.1
3
EPL3 main 4.  Removing the EPL3 main PCB B Remove the EPL3 main PCB B COM FW assy. 6.4.1
PCB B COM COM FW assy.
FW assy.
4
5.  Mounting the EPL3 main PCB B Mount the EPL3 main PCB B COM FW assy.
COM FW assy.
Parameter 8.  Parameter Download Download the parameters that had been UPLOAD. 8.1.3
5
download

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Electrical Parts > Replacement of the Slider T PCB Assy.
Rev.
3.3.2 Replacement of the Slider T PCB Assy. 1.0

2
ply
Covers
Slider T PCB
2.  Removing covers, etc.
3.  Removing the Slider T PCB Assy.
Remove the Y cover R and the Y cover L.
Remove the Slider T PCB Assy.

6.1.1
6.4.3
3
Assy.
4.  Mounting the Slider T PCB Assy. Mount the Slider T PCB Assy.
4

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Electrical Parts > Replacement of the ID Contact PCB
Rev.
3.3.3 Replacement of the ID Contact PCB 1.0
1
Item Work operation Description Ref. 2

ply
Covers 2.  Removing covers, etc. Remove the electrical box cover. 6.1.1
ID Contact
PCB
3.  Replacement of ID Contact PCB Replace the Cartridge Coupling Assy. 6.4.6
3
4
Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
Ink may get in your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you touch
5
the ink.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Sensors
Workflow
3.1 3.2 3.3 3
3.4 3.5 3.6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Sensors > Replacement of the Obstacle Sensor (Laser Sensor Assy.)
Rev.
3.4.1 Replacement of the Obstacle Sensor (Laser Sensor Assy.) 1.0
1
Item
Power supply
Work operation
1.  Turning OFF the main power supply
Description
Turn OFF the main power supply.
Ref.
2
Covers 2.  Removing covers, etc. Remove the following covers. 6.1.1
 Cover RH
 Side cover UR
Laser sensor 3.  Mounting of the laser sensor. Mount the laser sensor. 4.3.7 3
Initial setting 4.  Carry out the initial setting. Set the following. 4.3.7
 Each item
 Threshold
5.  Adjustment of the optical-axis of the
4
Adjust see “4.3.7 Adjustment of the optical-axis of the obstacle 4.3.7
obstacle sensors sensors”.
Covers 6.  Mounting of the covers. Mount the covers that have been removed. 6.1.1
5
 Name of each part
Laser emitter indicator 6

Output indicator
Digital display
7
Detection side
Threshold adjustment/Select button
Teaching/Enter button
Rotatable connector
8
(180 degree)
Threshold adjustment [connector type]
 The tightening torque for the connector type mounting screw: 0.5N•m max.
 A connector part might be damaged if putting excessive load in the rotatory direction by rotating
more than 180 degrees.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Sensors > Replacement of the Obstacle Sensor (Laser Sensor Assy.)
Rev.
3.4.1 Replacement of the Obstacle Sensor (Laser Sen-1.0
 Threshold adjustment (manual adjustment)

1. Push [] or [] shortly (2 sec. Max.). Then, present threshold
[Default value] will be blinking on the display.
Timer : oFF
Output mode : don 2. During when the threshold is blinking, it is adjustable by the
Sensitivity adjust : oFF [] or [] button. (adjustable range: 20~96)
Response time : 07
1
Threshold level :1
Display : on 3. Pressing the [○] button returns to the detecting mode.
Hysteresis : 4% If no operation, it automatically returns to the detecting mode in
External input : rtc 10 sec.
Auto teaching : oFF
Reset : no
The laterality of the table is within “85+-3 %”, the
adjustment is unnecessary.
2
 Each item
Press the [] or [] button until the display indicates [SEL] (approx. more than 2 sec.)
Pressing the button again to select a setting item and execute the detail setting.
3
[Response time setting]
0.35ms • 0.35ms = The unti-interference function does not work.
Response time setting

0.7ms
4
2ms
5ms
5
?
[Threshold adjustment]
High accuracy
In the case of [Fixed], it keeps the threshold that was
6
Threshold adjustment set in the manual setting. It can not be changed by
Middle
teaching.
Low
7
Fixed
?
[Hysteresis]
Set in 4%
Hysteresis
Set in 3% 8
Set in 2%
Set in 1%

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > UV UNIT
Workflow
3.1 3.2 3.3 3
3.4 3.5 3.6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > UV UNIT > Replacement of the 4inch-LCUVLED PCB Assy.
Rev.
3.5.1 Replacement of the 4inch-LCUVLED PCB Assy. 1.0

2
Covers
ply
2.  Removal of covers, etc. Open the front under cover T. 6.1.1
3
Remove the following covers.
 Y cover R
 Y cover L
4
 Carriage cover F
LED-UV unit 3.  Removal and disassembling of Remove the LED-UV UNIT and disassemble it. 6.6.1
the LED-UV UNIT
4.  Replacing Assy Replace the 4inch-LCUVLED PCB Assy.
5.  Assembling of the LED-UV Assemble the LED-UV UNIT and attach it.
5
UNIT and attaching it
Operation 8.  Operation checking of the LED- Check the operation of the LED-UV UNIT.
check UV UNIT
6
7
 Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
 Never touch the LED lens.(Do not touch it even if you are wearing gloves.)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > UV UNIT > Replacement of the UVLED Drive14 PCB Assy.
Rev.
3.5.2 Replacement of the UVLED Drive14 PCB Assy. 1.0

2
ply
Covers 2.  Removing covers, etc. Remove the front cover UR and the carriage cover. 6.1.1
3
LED-UV 3.  Removal and disassembling of Remove the LED-UV UNIT and disassemble it. 6.6.1
UNIT the LED-UV UNIT 6.4.5
4.  Replacing Assy Replace the LED-UV irradiation Assy.
5.  Assembling of the LED-UV

UNIT and attaching it
Assemble the LED-UV UNIT and attach it.
4
Covers 6.  Mounting of the covers Mount the covers which have been removed. 6.1.1
Operation 8.  Operation checking of the LED- Check the operation of the LED - UV UNIT
check UV UNIT
5
6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Regular Replacement• Regular Maintenance
Workflow
3.1 3.2 3.3 3
3.4 3.5 3.6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Regular Replacement• Regular Maintenance > Periodic Check Items
Rev.
3.6.1 Periodic Check Items 1.0
 Outline
This section shows the periodical maintenance work items recommended to keep the machine in good condition.
When the time limit has come, perform maintenance.
 Periodic Check Items
Item
Checking the 
Sub item
1 Upload of parameters
Remarks Ref.
1
machine condition
 2 Update of firmware Old ver.: New ver.:
 3 Checking the result of user’s care
2
 a Area around the heads
 b Station
 c Cleaning of suction table and operation

panel 3.6.2
 4 Mist filter
 5 Head condition Test drawing:

3
 Head adjustment:□Inclination
□Ink drop position
 6 Cleaning of UV-LED underside glass
4
 7 Exchange of hot water Once a year
Regularly replaced  1 Sub-tank Assy CE Once a year
parts
 2 Selective path pump Assy UV(2Pump) Once a year
 3 Tube pump Assy UV (Single pump) Once a year

5
4 Cap Assy CE Once a year
 5 Cartridge valve Assy Once a year

3.6.3
 6 Tube pump 4ASSY2 Once a year
 7 Bottle tank all Assy (packing) Once a year
 8 F seal rubber 300 Once three years
 9 Y drive motor all ASSY Once three years 6

 10 Servo motor Assy (X) Once five years
Greasing  1 Z drive screw Once a year
3.6.4
 2 Z drive Assy Once a year
Checking  1 Sensor test 7
 2 Operation test
 3 Linear encoder test
 4 Running meter
 a Operation time Value: [h]

3.6.5
8
 b Drawing area Value: [m 2]
 c Drawing length Value: [m]
 d Number of scans Value: [times]
 5 Parameter upload
 6 Online drawing confirmation

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Regular Replacement• Regular Maintenance > Checking the Machine Con-
Rev.
3.6.2 Checking the Machine Condition 1.0
 Outline
Grasps a device status before the work. Show the work items to eliminate current problems.
 Work items
1
Prohibit to use alcohol and organic solvents etc to clean sensor and covers.
Those will melt the resin and coating resulting to damage and scratches on the machine.
1. Upload the parameters to store the parameters of the machine.
2. When the firmware of the machine is not the latest version,
2
update the firmware.
3. Check the result of user’s maintenance with attention paid to the

following points.
■Area around the heads/ Lower surface of the carriage
3
The nozzle part
(Never touch it.) Check for ink sticking or dust accumulation. If necessary, tell
the user the cleaning method which uses Maintenance liquid
and UJ cleaning swab.
Clean the side
4
surface of the head
(shown in green)
with a clean stick.
Clean with a UJ
Clean with a cleaning swab and a
clean stick or a waste cloth
Glass surface waste cloth
■Station
Cap rubber Check the areas around the caps and wipers for ink sticking or
dust accumulation. If necessary, tell the user the cleaning
5
method which uses Maintenance liquid or Clean Stick.
6
Cap rubber cover
■Vacuum table, Operation panel and others

Check the following parts for paper dust accumulation or ink
sticking. 7
If necessary, tell the user the cleaning method which uses
natural detergent, waste cloth, or Clean Stick.
• Cover
• Vacuum table
• Operation panel
• Waste Ink Tank (volume of empty space) 8
4. Execute test drawing and check the head condition (for nozzle
clogging or jet deviation)
Perform slant adjustment and/or drop position adjustment, if
necessary.
5. Glass surface of the UV LED
Clean it with Clean Stick or waste cloth.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Regular Replacement• Regular Maintenance > Regularly Replaced Parts
Rev.
3.6.3 Regularly Replaced Parts 1.1
 Outline
Check the Regularly Replaced Parts with attention paid to the following points:
 Is there a possibility that trouble may occur in ink suction or wiper replacement work because user maintenance is
inadequate and thus the machine is badly stained?
 Is the rubber of the cap deformed?
 Can the stain, such as ink sticking, be removed completely?

1
 Are there any parts worn significantly?
 Regularly replaced parts

 Once a year 2
No.1 Sub-tank Assy CE No.2 Selective path pump Assy No.3 Tube pump Assy UV
(See 6.2.1 Sub-tank) UV(2Pump) (Single pump)
(See 6.2.7 Selective Path Pump) UJF3042MkII only.
(See 6.2.7 Selective Path Pump)
3
No.4 Cap Assy CE No.5 Cartridge valve Assy. No.6 Tube pump 4ASSY2
(See 6.2.3 Cap Assy.) (See 6.2.13 Cartridge Valve) (See 6.2.8 Circulation Pump)
5
No.7 Bottle tank all Assy (packing)

(See 6.2.12 Bottle Tank Assy)
7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Regular Replacement• Regular Maintenance > Regularly Replaced Parts
Rev.
3.6.3 Regularly Replaced Parts 1.1

 Once three years
No.1 Y drive motor all ASSY

(See 6.3.3 Y-axis Motor)
2
 Once five years
No.1 Servo motor Assy (X)

(See 6.3.1 X-axis Motor) 3

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Regular Replacement• Regular Maintenance > Greasing
Rev.
3.6.4 Greasing 1.0
 Outline
This section shows the parts to be greased periodically to suppress abrasion or abnormal sound during printer
operation.
 Parts to be greased
Z (Table Assy)
Shaft slider L, R 1
Guide shaft
Grease:
FLOIL MG-A1
Remarks: 2
3
Table Assy:
4
Z drive screw
Grease:
FLOIL MG-A1
Remarks:

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Workflow > Regular Replacement• Regular Maintenance > Checking
Rev.
3.6.5 Checking 1.0
 Outline
For the various sensors, fans, motors, etc., this section shows the work items for checking the use to date and inspec-
tions.
 Checking items
No. Item Description 1

1 Sensor test Perform all items defined in Sensor Check and make sure that there is no problem.
2 Operating test Perform all items defined in Operating Test and make sure that there is no problem.
3 Check Encoder Perform linear encoder test and make sure that there is no problem.
4 Checking the RUNNING
METER
Check the RUNNING METER and note down the following records.
a. Hours of machine use
2
b. Drawing area
c. Drawing length
d. Scan count
3
5 Upload of parameters Once adjusted values or settings are changed, upload the parameters again.
6 Checking on-line drawing Finally, perform test drawing and on-line drawing and make sure that there is no problem.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Operation Matrix
Adjustment Items
4.1 4.2 4.3 4
Operation Matrix Adjustment Function Mechanical Adjustment

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function
Adjustment Items
4.1 4.2 4.3 4

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Head adjustment Parallelism adjustment
Rev.
4.2.1 Head adjustment Parallelism adjustment 1.0
 Outline
Adjust the table flatness with the level foot.
Work is easy if raising the table by the JOG key beforehand.
1
 Work procedure
1. (in the manual operation with the power OFF) move the
carriage to the center of table.
2
2. Remove the following cover.
• Table rear cover U
3
3. Rotate the Z drive pulley and raise the table until the gap
between the table and the cut surface of the carriage base
becomes 2.5 mm.
4
The table stops in the state that it moves from the
Z drive pulley bottom to the top. The parallelism varies in the state
that it moves from the top to the bottom.
5
4. Move the carriage to 4 corners in the table and measure the gap
between the carriage and the table at each point. It is OK if there
is no difference more than 0.3 mm between the maximum and
the minimum values.
6
Within
±0.3mm Carriage
5. If it is NG, adjust the plane of the machine and check the
parallelism again.
Table 7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Head adjustment Parallelism adjustment
Rev.
4.2.1 Head adjustment Parallelism adjustment 1.0
6. When it becomes N.G. by all means, adjust only the level foot
Level foot under the point of the large gap.
Since the table automatically moves from the bottom

to the top and returns to the designated height when
the power is ON and pushing the [ENTER] key after
having let a table go up with a jog key, the up/down
movement is unnecessary.
1

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Head Slant Adjustment
Rev.
4.2.2 Head Slant Adjustment 1.2
 Outline
On the drawing with the built-in patterns, the slant and the back and forth positions of each head are checked and
mechanically adjusted.
 [HEAD ADJUST] consists of the slant adjustment and back/forth adjustment.

When either one of the above is adjusted, be sure to check the other. If any adjustment is required,
repeat both of the adjustments alternately until any adjustment is not required on both.
 When the head adjustment is incorrect, be sure to execute the adjustment since it affects other parame-
1
ter adjustments.
 Head Adjusting Flow
START
2
Pattern print (Slant adjust: Fine)
Adjusting (Slant adjust: Fine)
Head Slant
3
Adjustment
Pattern check No
Normal?
Yes
Pattern print (Position adjust) 1, 2
Adjusting (Position adjust: Normal) 1, 2
Head Back/Forth
4
Adjustment No
Pattern check
Normal?
Yes
Adjusted after Yes

Slant adjust?
No
5
Refer to 4.2.4 Print Adjustment

Rev.
 Outline of Head Slant Adjustment
 In case of 3 head model  In case of 4 head model

AB AB (for YCMKWW) AB AB AB (for LcLmYCMKWCl)
1
3 nozzle
3 nozzle
AB AB
318 nozzle
318 nozzle
150 dpi
150 dpi
318 nozzle
318 nozzle
150 dpi
150 dpi
Head1 Head2 Head1 Head2 Head3
2
Head3 Head4
 Slant adjust: Normal (Below figure: In the case of 4 head model)
3
enlarge NG OK
5
Specified value: 0±10µm
X (+)direction
Adjust so that the dots in the
overlapping area are in alignment.
 Slant adjust: Fine (Below figure: In the case of 4 head model) 6
enlarge
NG OK
7

X (+)direction
Adjust so that the dots in the
overlapping area are in alignment.

Rev.
 Work procedures
1. Set Media at X-origin
HEAD ADJUST
SLANT ADJUST >
Set the drawing origin as follows;
(Set in [LOCAL] - [ORIGIN])
X >= 0, Y > 0
POSITION ADJUST
2. Select [#ADJUST] - [HEAD ADJUST] - [SLANT ADJUST]. 1
3. Select “fine”.
#SLANT ADJUST
2
MODE :fine
4. Press the [ENTER] key to draw the pattern.
[ENTER]: To start Pattern drawing.
normal
[FUNC1]: Adsorption FAN ON/OFF
[FUNC2]: Set overlap amount (0~636)
[FUNC3]: Cap OFF
3
#SLANT ADJUST
PRINT START : ent
VACUUM OverLap Head Mov
HEAD TEMP. CONTROL
4
PLEASE WAIT
00->[00]
VACUUM
#SLANT ADJUST
PRINTING 5
6
NG OK 5. Check if no displacement occurs between the 1st scanning and
the 4th scanning of the head.
*If the adjustment is required, execute the following
adjustment.
 Check patterns on all heads (1-6).(Execute for all

heads even when one head is replaced.)
 If there is no displacement, execute “4.2.3 Head
7
Position Adjustment” successively.

Rev.
 Procedures of Head Slant Adjustment

6. Press the [Head Mov].
Slant fixing screw
7. Loosen the slant fixing screw of the target head.(x1)
Fixing screw of 8. Loosen the fixing screw of the adjustment lever.(x1)

the adjustment
1
lever
2
Adjusting 9. Rotate the slant adjustment screw according to the amount of
lever
displacement to adjust the slant.
Direction of turning the Micro Adjuster

To correct slanting left: Turn counterclockwise (CCW).
[Scope Image]
To correct slanting right: Turn clockwise (CW).
3
4
Counterclock
5
Clockwise wise
When the head has When the head has

slanted to left: CCW slanted to right: CW
6
Overlapped portion
Overlapped portion
7
;
<
10. Tighten the loosened slant fixing screw.(x1)
Tighten the fixing screw of the adjustment lever.(x1)
Tighten the screws with care that the head is not

shifted from the correct position. 8
11. Redraw Patterns and check if there is no slanting.
Repeat “Adjusting” - “Patterns Drawing” until no

more displacement is available.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Head Position Adjustment
Rev.
4.2.3 Head Position Adjustment 1.2
 Outline
The status of the gap of carriage in the front and back direction is checked.
 Outline of the position adjust (Below figure: In the case of 4 head model)
H1B H2B H3B

Before adjustment Before adjustment
1
After adjustment After adjustment 4

H1A H2A H3A
 Check procedure 6
1. Set the media to X origin.
#ADJUST >
Drawing origin as follows.
7
(Set [Local] - [Origin])
HEAD ADJUST > X >= 0, Y > 0
2. Select [#ADJUST] - [HEAD ADJUST] - [POSITION

POSITION ADJUST >
ADJUST].
3. Press the [ENTER] key to draw pattern. 8

#POSITION ADJUST [ENTER]: starts printing pattern.
PRINT START :ent
[] [] [] []: enters into the jog mode
(moves the origin of the pattern)
#POSITION ADJUST [FUNC1]:Adsorption FAN ON/OFF
PRINTING
[FUNC3]:Cap OFF

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Head Position Adjustment
Rev.
4.2.3 Head Position Adjustment 1.2
[Scope Image] Specified value: 4. Check the interval of pattern 1 as specified.

0±10µm
Specified value: 0 ± 10µm
Turn the H2 adjustment *If the pattern is out of specified, perform the following
lever in the CW direction.
adjustments.
Target
(H2B)
If performed an adjustment in the “Slant
1
(H3B)
Standard adjustment”, or “Position adjustment”, confirm from
the beginning again and repeat until both the
adjustment unnecessary.
 Head position adjustment procedure

2
1. Press the [Head Mov].
Fixing screw of the
adjustment lever
2. Loosen the fixing screw of the target head.(x1)
Fixing screw
3. Loosen the fixing screw of the adjustment lever.(x1) 3
4. Rotate the front and rear adjusting lever according to the
misalignment amount, and adjust the front and rear position.
4
Direction to turn the lever
Move the head to the back side: turn counter-clockwise (CCW)
Adjusting lever Move the head to the front side: turn clockwise (CW)
5. Tighten the loosened slant fixing screw.(x1) 5

Tighten the fixing screw of the adjustment lever.(x1)
Tighten the screws with care that the head is not
6
shifted from the correct position.
6. Redraw Patterns and check if there is no slanting.
Repeat “Adjusting” - “Patterns Drawing” until no

more displacement is available.
7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Print Adjustment
Rev.
4.2.4 Print Adjustment 1.1
 Outline
Draw the built-in patterns, and compensate the value so that the drop positions of other heads are on the same line as
the drop position of reference head (Head 3 row B, BK) in the Y-direction.
Check in advance that the skew adjustment was made based on the specified value.
1
 Work procedures
□SiDir
Print ADJUST
SiDir >
1. Set the media to X origin.
2
Drawing origin as follows.
(Set [Local] - [Origin])
X >= 0, Y > 0
2. Select [#Adjust] - [Print Adjust] - [SiDir]. 3

#PRINT ADJUST
Y DPI : 600
3. Select the resolution.
4. Press the [ENTER] key to draw the pattern.
4
[ENTER]: To start pattern drawing
[]: move to the screen to input compensation
#PRINT ADJUST
value (Without drawing)
SiDir :PRINT [] [] []: Jog mode start
(drawing origin movement)
HEAD TEMP. CONTROL

5
PLEASE WAIT
00->[00]
6
#PRINT ADJUST
PRINTING
7
Pattern drawing

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Print Adjustment
Rev.
4.2.4 Print Adjustment 1.1
Standard H3B
H1A H1B H2A H2B H3A H4A H4B
2
Reference head
Adjustment head
Collinear to reference head
3
Reference head mark
5. Check and compensate the patterns.

Check and execute the compensation for all head.
#PRINT ADJUST
[] / []: Compensating value input
4
H3B-H1A : 0
[ENTER]: Fix (Next)
Input Unit: 1 µm (24000 dpi)
-999~999
(Standard: less than 10µm)
 Check the pattern of the entire area, and inputs a
5
#PRINT ADJUST compensating value so that the difference is mini-
H3B-H4B : 0 mized.
Input the compensating value, referring to the fig-
ure below, if the displacement on the drop position
-999~999 of head applied for the compensation occurs either
right or left against the reference head.
(L: compensating value)
6
Adjustment head Adjustment head
Reference head
7
8
6. When compensated, draw and check the patterns again.
Repeat “Drawing - Checking (Compensating)” until

any compensation is not required.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >REPLACE COUNT
Rev.
4.2.5 REPLACE COUNT 1.1
 Outline
LCD display the following items of the machine.
 List of replace count.
No Select item Remarks

1 Bottle 1~6 (3 head model), 1~8 (4 head model)
2 No. of scans. Number of scans unit: [100 times] 1
3 Operating time Unit time of the power supply ON: [H]
4 Wiping Wiping number of times
5 Shot count Number of discharge operations per nozzle row Unit: [1000 times]
6 Print length
7 Print area
Drawing length [m]
2
Drawing area [m2]
8 Ink PIC IC chip error detection number of times of the bottle 1~6 (3 head model) / 1~8 (4 head
model)
 Work procedure 3
1. Select [#ADJUST]-[REPLACE COUNT].
#ASDJUST >
4
REPLACE COUNT >
2. Select the item to be displayed, and confirm with [ENTER] to

#REPLACE COUNT display.
Bottle1 : 0
5
Bottle1~8 [] / []: Switching
[ENTER]: Confirm (to the information display screen)
Bottle > [END]: Return
SCAN COUNT
USE TIME
6
:
INK PIC >

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Default Set
Rev.
4.2.6 Default Set 1.0
 Outline
Return each parameter to the initial value.
 Default set item list
No Item Operation Remarks
1
1 Shipping set Parameter initialization other than the adjustment
 Work procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST] - [DEFAULT SET].
#ADJUST
DEFAULT SET <ent>
2. Select the parameter to be initialized, and then fix it by

2
#DEFAULT SET [ENTER].
SHIPPING set >
[ENTER]: Confirms (to Confirmation display)
[END]: Return
3. Initialize by [ENTER]
3
#DEFAULT SET [ENTER]: Execute
INITIAL. OK? :ent
[END]: Return
Initialize
4

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Capping Adjustment
Rev.
4.2.7 Capping Adjustment 1.2
 Outline
Adjusts the location for capping. Adjusted value is saved in the system parameter
the ink.
 Pre-check 1
1. Align the center axis of the cap and the head.
Slider Block
In case of misalignment, adjust slider block so that the positions
of the cap and the head in the Y direction match.
3
 Adjustment procedure
2. Select [#ADJUST] - [CAPPING].
#ADJUST
CAPPING
4
3. Adjust the cap position.
#CAPPING
CAP POS. = 2.0mm
Adjust so that cap slider is 3 mm to the right from the place
where it reaches the top of the base. 5
[] / []: Horizontally shifts the head.
Plus numeric Minus numeric
direction direction [ENTER]: Confirms
[END]: Exit
PP
8

Rev.
4. When the gap between the bottom surface of the head and cap
#CAPPING Input [-1, 0] from top is 0 mm from a horizontal perspective, enter -1.0.
FLUSHING POS=1.0 this position.
[] / []: Shifts the cap.
[ENTER]: Finalizes (To Next)
PP
It is easier to adjust the position by checking heads 1
1
+HDG to 3, since head 4 is hidden by the carriage base.
&DS
#CAPPING
5. Adjust the position so that the gap between the bottom surface
of the head and cap top is 0 mm from a horizontal perspective.
2
PURGE POS. = 2.0
[] / []: Shifts the cap.
[ENTER]: Finalizes (To Next)
3
PP
 When the space of the head cap spreads out, be
+HDG careful because it leads the ink to collect to the
&DS
absorbent case of the wiper.
 When adjusting at the position remaining a gap

with the cap rubber, be careful since the wiper
absorbent liquefies early.
6. After adjustment, register with the [END] key and then 4
terminate the operation.

Rev.
 Check after adjustment

7. Turn off the power supply, and check that the carriage does not
move to the table side.
When the excitation of the motor has been cut, the carriage may
move to the table side by itself.
At this time, the cap Assy moves to the bottom, and it results in
1
capping defect.
2
Power OFF->The carriage moves by itself.
The cap slider moves to the position at which

4
it goes down, and it results in capping defect.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL >Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Wiper Adjustment
Rev.
4.2.8 Wiper Adjustment 1.1
 Outline
Adjust the wiper position.
Adjusted value is saved in the system parameter.
 Work procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST] - [ADJUST WIPER].
1
#ADJUST >
ADJUST WIPER >
2
2. Adjustment of wiper.
#ADJUST WIPER
WIPER POS. = 2.0 Head is moved to the wiping position of the No. 1 head, the
-20.0~20.0 wiper is moved to the rear side (a position which is visible from
the space below the head).
[] / [] Adjust the head position.
Aligning the center position of the head and the 3

wiper.
[] / []: Horizontally shifts the head

Head
[ENTER]: Register•Next
Wiper nozzle
[END]: Return 4
#ADJUST WIPER
WIPER START POS.=0.0
3. Adjust the wiper start position.
The wiper moves to the start position of the front wiper.
5
Adjust the wiper start position with[] / [].
[] / [] : Move the wiper
6
[ENTER] : Register•END
[END] : Return
[FUNC1] : Move the head to the wipe position
[FUNC2] : Move the wiper
7
1 mm 4. Adjust the wiper position to 1 mm from the mechanical stopper.
5. Perform the cleaning operation and check the operating

position.
Head
8

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Head Wash
Rev.
4.2.9 Head Wash 1.1
 Outline
Cleans the ink channels inside the head, damper and tube.
When modifying ink type or ink set, empties the ink out of the channel and cleans the inside using the washing liquid.
 Available cleaning liquid: FL007-Z-BA

 Available maintenance liquid: SPC-0568 F-200/LF-200 maintenance liquid
As non-filling state remains after the completion of cleaning, the Initial Filling or filling of 1
corresponding head is required.
 Procedure
 Discharge 2
1. Select [#ADJUST]-[HEAD WASH].
#ADJUST >
HEAD WASH >

3
2. Select [DISCHARGE].
#HEAD WASH
Carry out the discharge after the confirmation of display when a
4
DISCHARGE
WASH waste ink tank warning occurs.
3. Select the head for washing.

#HEAD WASH In case of
HEAD [YCMKWW] 3042MkII 4color+WW [] [] [] []: Select the head
[ENTER]: Fix (the carriage moves.)
5
PLEASE WAIT
4. Install the cap.

SET CAPGOM
<ent> [ENTER]: to the next step
5. Remove the washing bottle for each head to be washed.

6
#HEAD WASH
[ENTER]: Discharge washing liquid
REMOVE INK BOTTLE :ent
Wait a while to proceed to the next step.
7
Discharging
PLEASE WAIT
 Use a syringe to discharge the cycle route. (~Step 16.)
If not selecting the cycle route, omit the procedure for discharging ink inside the cycle route (Step 6. to
Step 16.).
8

Rev.
4.2.9 Head Wash 1.1
Tube 6. Use a 50cc syringe with a tube and fitting attached.

Cycle route
is discharged with a
fitting: MP-M603012 or MP-M603013
Fitting
1
7. Remove the bottle rear cover.
8. Disconnect the fittings of the ink tube of the white ink tank.
2
White ink tank
3
9. Connect the syringe, and discharge the ink inside the cycle
route.
Continue suctioning the ink until there is none left.
10. Connect the fitting that have been disconnected at Step 8.

5
11. Open the front under cover T.
12. Remove the carriage cover F.

13. Disconnect the fitting before the sub-tank in the white path. 6
7
Sub-tank
14. Connect the syringe, and discharge the ink inside the cycle
route.
Continue suctioning the ink until there is none left.
8

Rev.
4.2.9 Head Wash 1.1
15. Connect the fitting that have been disconnected at Step 13.
16. Press the [ENTER] Key.
Complete :ent
 Remove the cap
REMOVE CAPGOM
<ent>
17. Remove the cap.
[ENTER]: End 1
 Wash
#HEAD WASH
WASH
18. Select [WASH].
Carry out the discharge after the confirmation of display when a
2
DISCHARGE waste ink tank warning occurs.
19. Select the head for washing.
3
#HEAD WASH In case of
3042MkII 4color+WW [] [] [] []: Select the head
HEAD [YCMKWW]
[ENTER]: Fix (the carriage moves.)
PLEASE WAIT
SET CAPGOM
<ent>
20. Mount the cap soaked in the washing liquid.
[ENTER]: To the next step 4
21. Set the washing bottle.
#HEAD WASH
[ENTER]: Washing starting
5
SET WASHING LIQUID :ent
22. Suction the washing liquid to clean the route.

WASHING
PLEASE WAIT Wait a while to proceed to the screen for step 2.
23. Repeat Step 2. to Step 22. again. (total 3 times)
6
Repeat Step 2. to Step 17. again.
Order of the head washing

(1)Ink discharge
(2)Washing
(3)Washing liquid discharge
(4)Washing
7
(6)Washing
8
24. As non-filling state remains after the completion of washing,
the Initial Filling or filling of corresponding head is
required.(Refer to 9.1.1 Initial charging of Ink)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Head ID
Rev.
4.2.10 Head ID 1.0
 Outline
HEAD ID represents each head characteristic written at ex-factory. The variation between heads is unified by input-
ting the value to printer.
 Be sure to enter the head ID after replacing the head.
1
 Keep the HEAD ID label near the main unit
 Work procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST] - [HEAD ID].
#Adjust
2
HEAD ID >
2. For heads A and B, enter the values printed on the label

(2) (1) attached to the bags that contained the heads. 3
(4) (3)
#HEAD ID H1-A
HDV=227V (AL=4)
1)Enter value (1) for HDV.
A decimal point is omitted, and it's enter. 4
[ENTER]
#HEAD ID H1-A
2)Enter value (2) for AL.
5
HDV=227V (AL=5)
6
[ENTER]
3)Enter value (3) for HDV.
#HEAD ID H1-B If there are no values below the decimal point, enter “0.”
HDV=220V (AL=5)
7
[ENTER]
4)Enter value (4) for AL.
#HEAD ID H1-B
HDV=220V (AL=6)
[ENTER]
H2-A, H2-B
5)Enter the Head ID about another head.
8
H3-A, H3-B
H4-A, H4-B(6042MkII only)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Head ID
Rev.
4.2.10 Head ID 1.0
3. If you enter values for all the heads, you return to the original
[ENTER]
screen.
#Adjust
HEAD ID >

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Shot Count Reset
Rev.
4.2.11 Shot Count Reset 1.0
 Outline
This section describes how to “reset the shot count” and “reset the offset value of the Head driving power voltage” of
selected head.
Use this menu when you replace the head.
 Work Procedures
1
1. Select [#ADJUST] - [RESET SHOT COUNTS].
#ADJUST
RESET SHOT COUNTS:ent
2. Select a head and set whether or not to reset, and then press 2
#RESET SHOT COUNTSS ENTER key.
HEAD [cmYCMKWW]
[] / []: Select head
[] / []: Select whether or not to reset
3
Head to be reset: Displayed
Head not reset: Not displayed
[ENTER]: Confirm
[END]: Back
4
3. Determine whether you reset the offset voltage of the head
#OFFSET VOLT selected in the Step 2 or not.
INITIAL.OK? :ent
[ENTER]: Reset it.
[END]: Not reset it.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Head Voltage Adjustment
Rev.
4.2.12 Head Voltage Adjustment 1.3
 Outline
This section describes the head voltage adjustment which is performed when the ink discharge becomes unstable and
the deflection of ink drop flight path occurs. As an adjusted value, an offset value for the head-specific reference volt-
age is set.
If this adjustment does not improve the situation, the head needs to be replaced.
Do not carry out this item basically.

Carry it out as needed only when a color sense does not match by replacing the head. 1
 Check
#ADJUST >
1. Set the media in the table.
2
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST> 2. Select [#ADJUST] - [HEAD VOLT ADJ].
Normal Wave > 3

LD MODE > 3. On the selection screen, select the waveform to be adjusted.
Please set it after setting the head gap to the fol-
4
CHECK > lowing.
Normal waveform: Head gap 2 mm
ADJUST
LD mode: Head gap 4 mm
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST
PRINT START :ent
HEAD TEMP.CONTROL
PLEASE WAIT
4. Select [SELECT]. 5
00->[00]
5. Press [ENTER] and print a pattern.

#HEAD VOLT ADJUST
6
PRINTING [ENTER]: Starts printing a pattern.
Pattern Drawing
Check Pattern (all color)

6. Check the pattern.
In case of 4 head model
7
Enlarge a single shot line from nozzle row of each color and
check the dots in the line.
If the deviation of each dot in Y direction is within the
Good example Bad example
following range, the color (nozzle row) is considered
acceptable.
8
“0 ±30 um”
Single shot from one
nozzle row
Acceptable deviation
of each dot in the If the deviation is big as shown in “Bad example” in the left
same nozzle row: figure, perform the voltage adjustment described below.
“0 ±30 um”
0±30μm

Rev.
 Work Procedures
7. Select [#ADJUST] - [HEAD VOLT ADJ].
#ADJUST >
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST> 8. On the selection screen, select the waveform to be adjusted.
Normal Wave >

Please set it after setting the head gap to the fol-
lowing.
1
LD MODE >
Normal waveform: Head gap 2 mm
LD mode: Head gap 4 mm
ADJUST >
CHECK 9. Select “ADJUST” for [SELECT], and Press [ENTER] key. 2

10. Select the nozzle row (color) to be adjusted.
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST Select target nozzle
SELECT:H1-Ac) [] / []: Select nozzle
3
H1-B(m) [ENTER]: Confirm (next)
H2-A(Y)
H2-B(C)
H3-A(M)
H3-B(K)
H4-A(W)
H4-B(Cl)
11. Enter the offset voltage used when printing a pattern for
#HDV :[ 0.0]V Enter test start voltage adjustment.
4
start : -3.0V e.g.: -30.0V
-3.0~+3.0 (The pattern will look like the image shown in the step 11
below.)
#HDV :[ 0.0]V Enter test finish voltage
stop : 3.0V e.g.: 3.0V 1),Set the offset voltage for printing the first pattern.
-3.0~+3.0 (-3.0 to +3.0V, increments of 0.1V).
#HDV :[ 0.0]V
step : 0.5V
Enter step value from
test start to test finish
e.g.: 0.5V
2),Set the offset voltage for printing the last pattern.
(-3.0 to +3.0V, increments of 0.1V).
5
0.1~1.0
3),Set the voltage added at every step from the above 1) to 2).
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST>
PRINT STRT :ent (0.1 to +1.0V, increments of 0.1V)
HEAD TEMP.CONTROL The entered values are reflected to the reference

voltage of the head.
6
PLEASE WAIT
00->[00] (A preset offset value will be ignored.)
7
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST
PRINTING
12. Press [ENTER] key to start printing.
Pattern Drawing Clear the voltage value of density adjusting.
13. Find the optimum offset value.

Enlarge the pattern and find the offset value which presents the
acceptable (within the specified range), smallest deviation in Y 8
direction.
+3.0 +2.5 +2.0 +1.5 +1.0 +0.5 +0.0
Print the patterns from the test start voltage to the test
finish voltage (both set in the step 9) in increments of set The acceptable range of deviation is given in the step 5.
step value.
* Numerical values indicate offset values for the head

Rev.
14. Set the offset voltage.
#HD V :[ 0.0]V Enter the value considered optimum in the step 11.
H1-A(Lc): *.*V
-3.0?+3.0

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Dot Volume Adjustment
Rev.
4.2.13 Dot Volume Adjustment 1.1
 Outline
Adjust the dot volume.
Do not carry out this item basically.

Carry it out as needed only when a color sense does not match by replacing the head.
1
 Check
1. Select [#ADJUST] - [ADJ DOT VOLUME].
#ADJUST >
2. Press the [ENTER] key to execute dot volume adjustment.
ADJ DOT VOLUME > 2
3. [Check Position] or [Adjust] selection screen is displayed.
3
#ADJ DOT VOLUME
Check Position
ADJUST
<When checking the ink discharge position>
(1) Place a piece of paper and so on at the front right of the
#ADJ DOT VOLUME table, and then press the [] key.
4
PLEASE WAIT
(2) Y bar moves forward, and then ink is discharged once.
<When adjusting>
#ADJ DOT VOLUME
(1) Press the [] key to enter adjustment menu.
ADJUST
Check Position (Proceed to the following steps)
#ADJ DOT VOLUME

HEAD No. :1
4. Select the head number for flushing.
[]/[]: Select head number
5
1~8
[ENTER]: Confirmation (Next)
#ADJ DOT VOLUME 5. Select the dot size to be flushed.
6
DOT SIZE :S
[]/[]: Select dot size
M, L
[ENTER]: Confirmation (Next)
6. Designate the number of shots.

#ADJ DOT VOLUME
shot :100000 []/[]: Select number of shots
7
1000~99990000 [ENTER]: Confirmation (Next)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Dot Volume Adjustment
Rev.
4.2.13 Dot Volume Adjustment 1.1
7. Perform positioning correction and flushing.

#ADJ DOT VOLUME
[]/[]/[]/[]: Move head
JOG/ENT(Flushing)
[Z]/[Z]: Raise/lower table
[ENTER]: Begin flushing
#ADJ DOT VOLUME

Head1 OFFSET:0.0V
8. Set the head voltage offset value.
[]/[]: Designate offset voltage value 1
-3.0~3.0 [ENTER]: Confirm and return to step 6
[END]: Return to step 7
#ADJ DOT VOLUME
2
shot :1000000

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >SERIAL No.
Rev.
4.2.14 SERIAL No. 1.0
 Outline
Confirming and changing of the serial No. of UJF-30_6042MkII.
Normally, don’t change the serial No., which has been registered.
1
 Work procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST] - [SERIAL No.].
#ADJUST >
SERIAL No. > 2

2. Confirm the serial No., or change it.
3
#Serial No. [] / []: to move Cursor
S/N 00000000
[] / []: to change Value(0-9,A-Z)
[ENTER]: Fix
[END]: Return

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Dealer No.
Rev.
4.2.15 Dealer No. 1.0
 Outline
Check and set the dealer No.
For dealer No., 8-digit alphameric characters (0 to 9, A to Z) can be input.
 Procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST] - [DEALER No.].
1
#ADJUST >
DEALER No. >
2
2. Input (check) the dealer No.
#DEALER No. [] / []: to move Cursor
D/N 10000000
(When the cursor is at the right end or the left
end, even if the key is pressed, it does not
move.)
[] / []: to change Value
[ENTER]: Fix
[END]: to cancel inputting
3

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Origin Adjustment
Rev.
4.2.16 Origin Adjustment 1.0
 Outline
The pattern is drawn and the origin position (the drawing reference point located at the front right) is parameter-com-
pensated.
 Work Procedures
#ADJUST >
1. Display [#ADJUST] - [ORIGIN ADJUST]. 1
ORIGIN ADJUST >
Print > 2. Press the[] key to draw the pattern. 2

Pattern drawing (size Y:45mm, X:35mm)
Reset
Initialize adjustment value.
HEAD TEMP. CONTROL
PLEASE WAIT
00->[00] 3
#ORIGIN ADJUST
PRINTING
#ORIGIN ADJUST
3. Measure the distance between the corner part of pattern and the 4
edge of the table.
X= 22.0 Y= 32.0
Enter the measured value
[],[]: To move Cursor.
[],[]: To change Compensating value
(unit: 0.1mm, 12.0 - 37.5) 5
[ENTER]: To register Compensating value
Measure
Pattern
6
4. After compensated, draw the pattern again, and then measure
the distance between the corner part of pattern and the edge of
the table.
Measure
Repeat until the displayed value and the measured value
become the same.
Table
Media
 When the origin adjustment, adsorption function
does not operate. Do direct printing on the table. 7
 Remove the media to perform adjustments.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Table Adjustment
Rev.
4.2.17 Table Adjustment 1.1
 Outline
When table height is 53mm, calculate the offset value of the Z coordinates for the head gap to be 1.5mm.
 (To the head gap to 1.5mm) 53.0mm or more table height can be specified. Be careful so that the table
is not to stepping out or conflict with the dead.
1
 Head gap adjustable range of this adjustment is ± 5mm. (If the adjustment beyond this range is
required, it may correspond in mechanical adjustment)
 After the adjustment, press the ENTER key, the point is MAX (53.0mm).
 Work procedure
TABLE ADJUST >

1. Select [#ADJUST] - [TABLE ADJUST].
2
2. Select [SLIDER:ON].
#TABLE ADJUST >

SLIDER :ON
#TABLE ADJUST 43.00 3

COMPLETED :ent
(JOG: 0.01mm)
3. Adjust so that the gap between the table and the cut surface of
the carriage base becomes 2.5 mm.
The reference surface of the bottom of carriage base
4
is in following four places (circular convex shape).
Carriage
2.5 mm
[Bottom view]
5
Table
Carriage base
4. Up and down the table to adjust the height. 6

(Adjust with 10μm units)
[] [] [] []:Switching (4 corners of the table)
[FUNC1][FUNC2]:Table up and down (adjustment)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Table Adjustment
Rev.
4.2.17 Table Adjustment 1.1
 Register the point as the position of 53 mm where

the table height displayed on the LCD becomes
maximum when adjusted with JOG so that the gap
between the table and the cut surface of the car-
riage base becomes 2.5 mm.
[Reason] When the position of 53mm at the table
1
adjustment is determined, the table can not be
raised to the higher position. But the lower direc-
tion is adjustable by “Media Thickness” to lower.
 If head gaps vary by more than 0.3 mm, the flat-
ness of the table or the mounting position of the
heads is incorrect and needs to be adjusted.
 Don’t touch the triangle cam and under the table.
 Confirm that a wobble on the left side of X guide
2
shaft is normal.
5. End by pressing [ENTER] key.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function > Feed Comp 2
Rev.
4.2.18 Feed Comp 2 1.0
 Outline
Compensates basic feeding amount of media. (Provides a baseline value for user compensation value.)
Adjust this when the parameter is initialized or the head is replaced.
2
By this adjustment, the user compensation value is cleared.
 Procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST] - [FEED COMP 2].
#ADJUST >
FEED COMP2 >

3
2. Draw an adjustment pattern.
4
#FEED COMP 2
PRINT START :ent [ENTER]: to execute drawing.
[]: to move to the adjustment screen
HEAD TEMP. CONTROL (Without drawing)
PLEASE WAIT [END]: to complete drawing and input compensation
00->[00] value.
#FEED COMP 2
PRINTING
5
3. Check the adjustment pattern.
6
A pattern having width
of media is drawn.
Resolution is 150 dpi.
Compensation value is
too large.
7
Compensation value is
too small.
8
4. Enter the compensation value.
#FEED COMP 2 Compensation value: -9999 ~ 9999
ADJUST = 0
[] / []: to change the adjustment values.
[END]: to cancel inputting
In actual feeding amount compensation, compensation

value for each feed set in the Setup function is added
to this compensation value.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Angle Adjustment
Rev.
4.2.19 Angle Adjustment 1.1
 Outline
This is for production adjustment. Not usually use in fields.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Network
Rev.
4.2.20 Network 1.0
 Outline
Set the network parameters related to log e-mail transmission.
 Network Item List
No Item Default value Remarks

1 IP address 0.0.0.0 (DHCP Server inquiry) 0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
2 Default gateway 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255 1
3 DNS address 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
4 Sub-net mask 24 8 - 31
5 SMTP address rm.mimaki.jp
6 POP3 address
7 User name
rm.mimaki.jp
UJF-3042
2
8 POP before SMTP ON ON, OFF
9 APOP ON ON, OFF
10 IP address verifica-
tion
0.0.0.0
3

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Sub Tank
Rev.
4.2.21 Sub Tank 1.0
 Outline
Perform this at head replacement and sub-tank replacement.
 Procedure
 Ink Discharge
1
1. Select [#ADJUST] - [Sub Tank]
#ADJUST >
Sub Tank >
2. Select [Discharge Ink]. 2

Discharge Ink > [] / []: Select
FILL UP INK [ENTER]: Fix
Discharge Ink
3. Select the head for ink discharge.
[] [] [] []: Select the head
3
HEAD [cm______]
[ENTER]: Fix
Discharge Ink 4. Press the [ENTER] key to start discharging.
4
PLEASE WAIT
 Ink Fillup
1. Select [FILL UP INK].

FILL UP INK > [] / []: Select
Ink Discharge
[ENTER]: Fix
5
2. Select the head for ink fillup.
FILL UP INK [] [] [] []: Select the head
6
HEAD [cm______]
[ENTER]: Fix
FILL UP INK 3. Press the [ENTER] key to start the filling.
PLEASE WAIT
4. End of Work (to Cleaning)
CLEANING
7
****************

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Gap Adjustment
Rev.
4.2.22 Gap Adjustment 1.1
 Outline
Corrects the table lowering amount after the gap check so that a correct head gap can be calculated from the position
of the optical axis at the time of a gap check.
Head
1
Gap adjustment value (Design value:1.2mm) Optical axis
User Settings
Head Gap
Additional lowering amount after the gap check
Media
Table
2
Media Thickness
Before adjusting the gaps, be sure to carry out “Table Adjust (Refer to 4.2.17 Table Adjustment),” and
make sure that the head gap is 1.5 mm.
 Work procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST] - [GAP REVISE].
3
#ADJUST >
2. Place the jig “OPT-J0425 Finishing Block 10” in the center of
the table.
4
GAP REVISE >
(If it is not available, a 10 mm block or thickness gauge can be
used instead.)
#GAP REVISE
GAP CHECK :ent 3. Display “The check screen to start the operation”.
Press the [ENTER] key.
5
4. After the edge of the jig is detected, the table lowers 0.3 mm
** GAP CHECK ** and stops, and the LCD screen changes to the state shown at the
PLEASE WAIT bottom of the figure on the left.
If the screen does not change, press the [ENTER] key again.
GAP REVISE
#Z Highest POS [Z U/D]
6
ADJUST: 1.00mm
JOG: 0.01mm
5. Using the [] [] keys, move the carriage to a point right
above the jig.
6. By [TABLE-UP/DOWN], adjust so that the gap between the
X= 0.0 Y= 0.0
TABLE HEIGHT 0.0
precision surface at the carriage bottom and the jig becomes 2.5
mm.
7
At this point, the head gap in relation to the jig becomes 1.5
Carriage
mm.
8
[Bottom view]
Table
Carriage base

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Gap Adjustment
Rev.
4.2.22 Gap Adjustment 1.1
7. Press the [ENTER] key to apply the adjustment value.

(Y then turns the cap on, and X moves to VIEWPOS.)
#GAP REVISE
Complete :ent
You can change the configured adjustment value by changing the system parameter “SNSR GAP.”.
1

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Time Set
Rev.
4.2.23 Time Set 1.0
 Outline
Set the time.
 Procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST] - [SET TIME].
#ADJUST >
SET TIME >

1
2. Set the time.

#Time Set
2016.10.01
> [] / []: to change the select item.
[] / []: Select
2
[ENTER]: Fix

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Purge
Rev.
4.2.24 Purge 1.0
 Outline
Perform the purging adjustment.
 Procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST] - [Purge]
#ADJUST >
Purge >
1
2. Select the head for the purging adjustment.

#Purge
HEAD [1234]
[] [] [] []: Select the head
[ENTER]: Fix
2
#Purge
Start <ENT>

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >POINTER OFFSET
Rev.
4.2.25 POINTER OFFSET 1.0
 Outline
Print the adjustment pattern and adjust the location of the LED pointer and print origin (Nozzle A Column).
 Procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST] - [POINTER OFFSET].
#ADJUST >
1
POINTER OFFSET >
2
2. Make necessary adjustments.
[ENTER]: Starts drawing.
After drawing is completed
[], [], [], []: LED pointer movement
Align the LED pointer to the pattern position
shown on the left (intersection of the straight
LED pointer
lines).
[ENTER]: Settings
3
[END]: Cancellation of input
This function perform adjusting only once.
4
When drawing is performed, readjustment is neces-
sary because adjustment value is reset.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Cap Cleaning
Rev.
4.2.26 Cap Cleaning 1.0
 Outline
Attach cap auxiliary rubber and clean by suction.
 手順
1. Select [# ADJUST] - [CAP CLEANING].
#ADJUST >
1
CAP CLEANING >
CAP CLEANING 2. Select the head for cleaning. 2

HEAD[cmYCMKWW] > [] [] [] [] : Select head
[ENTER] : Confirm
Please attach the cap
auxiliary rubber dipped
in washing liquid 3. Attach cap auxiliary rubber
CAP CLEANING
[ENTER] : Start cleaning 3
PLEASE WAIT>
4. Remove cap auxiliary rubber
REMOVE CAPGOM
[ENTER] : End 4

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Matrix > Mechanical Adjustment
Adjustment Items
4.1 4.2 4.3 4

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment >Carriage Slant Adjustment
Rev.
4.3.1 Carriage Slant Adjustment 1.0
 Outline
2
Perform carriage vertical-tilt and slant adjustment for right and left directions.
3
the ink.
Perform the “Table Adjust (Refer to 4.2.17 Table Adjustment)” before this adjustment.
After adjusting the table, use the thickness gauge to measure the gap between the table and the precision
4
surface of the carriage base, and carry out this adjustment only if the gap is larger than 2.5 mm +/- 0.1.
 Procedures
 Removing and mounting procedure of mist suction duct Assy.
1. Set the table height to 53 mm.
2. Turn OFF the power supply.

5
3. Open the following covers.
• Front under cover T.
• Front cover.
4. Remove the mist suction inlet.

6
Remove the hook (x1), and pull it to the front.
Without this work, you cannot access to the screws at

the left side.
7
mist suction inlet

8

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment >Carriage Slant Adjustment
Rev.
4.3.1 Carriage Slant Adjustment 1.0
Procedure of front/rear tilt adjustment
5. Manually move the carriage over the table.

6. Loosen the screws (x4) for fixing the base holder.
3
7. Measure the gap between the table and the base of the carriage
using a thickness gauge.
Measurement point:4 corners of the precision surface of the
carriage base
4
The rated value: 2.5±0.1mm(1.0 mm higher than the nozzle
surface)
2.5±0.1mm
4 corners of the precision surface of the carriage base 5
8. Tighten the screws that were loosened.(x4) 7

Make sure that the carriage does not move when you
tighten the screws.
9. Close the front cover and the front under cover T. 8

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment >LED-UV Height Adjustment
Rev.
4.3.2 LED-UV Height Adjustment 1.0
Be sure to complete Head Adjust (Refer to 4.2.2 Head Slant Adjustment, 4.2.3 Head Position
Adjustment, 4.3.1 Carriage Slant Adjustment) before carrying out this adjustment.
 Outline
The up/down position of the LED-UV Unit is mechanically adjusted.
3
 Work procedure
 Check the Height
4
1. Raise the table to the highest position.
ORIGIN SET UP
TABLE HEIGHT 53.0
2. Turn OFF the main power supply.

• Front under cover T
• Front cover 5
4. Manually move the carriage over the table.
5. Measure the gap between the LED-UV Unit and table using a
thickness gauge.
Measurement point: The lowest position of the LEDUV
6
Unit base
The rated value: 2.0±0.25mm
If the measured value is out of the specified range, adjust the height
7
of the LED-UV Unit.
㻞㻚㻜㼼㻜㻚㻞㻡㼙㼙

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment >LED-UV Height Adjustment
Rev.
4.3.2 LED-UV Height Adjustment 1.0
 Adjustment procedure
6. Loosen the Fixing screw of LED-UV Unit.(x2)
7. Adjust the gap between the LED-UV Unit and the upper surface
of the table so that it settles within the specified range. After 2
that, tighten the LED-UV Unit fixing screw.
The measurement point and adjustment value are specified
in the Step 5.
8. Return the carriage to the station, and close the cover. 3

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment >Drain the Hot Water•Filling Hot Water
Rev.
4.3.3 Drain the Hot Water•Filling Hot Water 1.2
 Outline
When carrying out “Replacement of head unit (6.2.2 Head Unit), Replacement of hot water pump(6.2.10 Hot Water
Pump)”, you need to drain the water out of the hot water route.Follow the steps below to drain hot water or refill the
route with hot water.
 Work procedure
 Drain the hot water
1. Remove the following cover.
• Cartridge rear cover H 1
2. Remove the fitting (x1).
Drain hot water for approximately 1 minute.
3. Confirm that the hot water has drained completely, and

reconnect the fitting (x1).
2
Hot water tank

3
5. Perform the “Replacement of head unit” or “Replacement of hot
4
water pump”.
 Filling hot water
1. Remove the following covers.
• Front under cover TL
• Maintenance under cover
2. Remove the tubes on the [in] side and [out] side of the water
inlet.
5
Out side In side Spread a waste not to damage surround.
3. Following the LCD instruction, fill the route with the mixed
Water FillUp
To 400cc fillup [ENT]
water of 400 cc. 7
When using a 100 cc syringe, use the tube removed
in Step 2.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment >Drain the Hot Water•Filling Hot Water
Rev.
4.3.3 Drain the Hot Water•Filling Hot Water 1.2
4. Insert the syringe to the port at the left side (Out side) and start
Water FillUp
drawing the water out slowly.
Path FillUp [ENT] When hot water starts coming out, continue pumping it out until
there is no more air mixed in it.
Hot water does not come out the first time you try to pump it
out.
Because priming water is necessary due to the
structure of the centrifugal pump, if not executing 1
this process, warm water does not circulate and an
error occurs.

in Step 2.
2
5. Fill up the mixed water of 100 cc from the [in] side port.
Water FillUp
To 100cc fillup [ENT]
3
in Step 2.
6. Close the port of water inlet. 5

Make sure that the fitting is not loosened by the
fitting’s reaction force.
7. Close the front under cover TL and the maintenance under 7

cover.
8. Turn the power ON to make the hot water circulate and fill the
hot water tube.
8
9. Carry out the initial filling of the ink.
Refer to “9.1.1 Initial charging of Ink”.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Station Height Adjustment
Rev.
4.3.4 Station Height Adjustment 1.0
1
Station adjustment plate
 Outline
Adjust the height of the station.
2
 Be sure to work with the main power to ON. In the power OFF state, the machine does not recognize
the change.
 Perform adjustment at Head gap (Low).
3
 Work procedure
4
• Maintenance under cover R
2. Loosen the screws (x4) used for Station adjustment plate
adjustment.
5
3. Loosen the hexagon socket head screws (x4) and make an
adjustment to set at below approximate value, then tighten the
nuts.
Adjustment value; approximate 6.9mm 6
 Measure in multiple places.
Adjust by rotate x4  When using auxiliary rubber for caps, make sure it
does not interfere with the head.
Head 6.9mm
7
Carriage Base CE
Tighten after
adjusting
8
Cap Slider F Cap
4. Tighten up 4 loosened screws used for station base adjustment.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Adjustment Function >Station Height Adjustment
Rev.
4.3.4 Station Height Adjustment 1.0
5. Attach the cap cover.
After installation, move the carriage manually on the

cap, and check no failure.
After this adjustment, check the capping.(4.2.7 1

Capping Adjustment)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment >Wiper Height Adjustment
Rev.
4.3.5 Wiper Height Adjustment 1.0
2
 Outline
Adjust the height of the wiper.
Be sure to work with the main power to ON. In the power OFF state, the machine does not recognize the
change.
3
 Work procedure
1. Remove the absorber case.
5
2. Loosen the fixing screws (x4)
6
If you cannot carry out the adjustments in step 3 with
loosened screws, carry out the following adjustments.
Use the adjustment screws(x4) to adjust the distance
between the wipers and the protrusions (standard
surface of the carriage base) in the 4 corners of the
carriage to the same height.
Adjustment screw x4
Carriage base 8
Measuring point

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment >Wiper Height Adjustment
Rev.
4.3.5 Wiper Height Adjustment 1.0
L R 3. Move the wiper slider, and confirm the wiper rubber so that
there is approximately 1.0 mm (at Gap is Low) from the nozzle
Check the right and left
surface.
Nozzle surface
0.5 䡚
After the adjustment, check the clearance between
1mm
Wiper rubber 0.8mm the NCU unit.
2
R Check the back and forward F
0.5 䡚
Nozzle surface 0.8mm
1mm
Wiper 3
Wiper Slider

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment >Encoder Sensor Position Adjustment
Rev.
4.3.6 Encoder Sensor Position Adjustment 1.0
 Outline
Adjust the position of 150LPI-Encoder PCB Assy (Encoder sensor)
 Work procedure
Be sure to work with the main power to ON. In the power OFF state, the machine does not recognize the
change.
1
• Carriage cover F
2. Loosen the screw (x1) of L encoder sensor BKT.
L encoder sensor BKT
2
3
Linear encoder 150LPI encoder PCB Assy.
4
3. Adjust the height of 150LPI encoder PCB Assy, and fix the
screw.
5
㻝㼙㼙
150LPI encoder PCB

Assy.
Linear encoder
There is a scale
above the center of
the sensor ditch.
4. While moving the carriage from the right end to the left by
6
hand, confirm the two points below.
150LPI encoder PCB Assy.
• Linear encoder scale upper part does not come into contact
with the 150LPI- encoder board Assy.
• The lens of 150LPI- encoder PCB Assy is not in the above
linear encoder scale top.
7
Do not touch
5. After fixation with screws, conduct the following test to check
whether there is abnormality.
Lens
• Encoder check (Refer to 5.1.11 Check Encoder)
8
Linear encoder

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment >Adjustment of the optical-axis of the obstacle sensors
Rev.
4.3.7 Adjustment of the optical-axis of the obstacle sensors 1.2
 Outline
To protect the print head, check if the optical axis of the LED transmission sensor is at the specified height, and adjust
it if necessary.
The appropriate height of the light axis for this unit is 1.2 mm under the head surface”.
 Adjust under the state that the carriage cover is attached.

 Make the right/left maintenance cover closed.
1
 Adjustment standard
1. Remove the cover RH. (screw x10)
2. Attach the table support shaft 50 to Table Assy. (2 eachx4) 2

At the set-up, it is not necessary to set [HEAD
HIGHT] - [TABLE SPACER] to 100 mm.
3
Cover RH
3. Set [HEAD HIGHT] - [TABLE HEIGHT] to 153 mm.
4
ORIGIN SET UP
X= 0.0 Y= 0.0
TABLE HEIGHT 153.0
5
TABLE-DOWN VACUUM TABLE-UP
4. Indicating [#ADJUST] - [#ADJUST SENSE], move the car-

#ADJUST SENSE riage above the table with the JOG key.
X= 466.0 Y= ----- OFF
TABLE HEIGHT 53.0 At this time, check if the head gap is 2.5 mm above the preci-
sion surface. If NG, carry out [TABLE ADJUST].
TABLE-DOWN ↓ TABLE-UP
It is necessary to wait for more than 10 minutes after
turning the power ON for warming up the sensor.
6
5. Display [#ADJUST] - [#ADJUST SENSE], press [TABLE-
DOWN] and set the table height at 43 mm.
6. Move the carriage to the center with the jog key and adjust the
table height to enter 10 mm block (OPT-J0068_UJF finishing
7
block 10) and 2.2 mm thickness gauge between the carriage
10 mm block precision surface and the table. (Table Up/ Down on LCD)
Reflector
8
[Bottom view]
Table
Thickness gauge
Laser sensor
Carriage base

Rev.
4.3.7 Adjustment of the optical-axis of the obstacle 1.2
7. Under the state that the carriage is capped-in, placing the 10

#ADJUST SENSE mm block at the right side of table, check if the sensor value is
X= 466.0 Y= ----- OFF within 85 +/- 3%.
TABLE HEIGHT 53.0
If the right side is OK, place the block at the left side and do the
same thing.
1
TABLE-DOWN ↓ TABLE-UP
8. Remove the block from the table and check if the sensor value
is 100 +/-3% when the carriage is capped-in. And check if the
sensor value is more than 90% when moving the carriage to the
Block of 10 mm
maintenance space side by pushing the right/left key.
Block of 10 mm
2
Reflector 9. Attach the cover RH not to touch the sensor and finish the work
when the checked results of the step 7 & 8 are OK.
If either one is NG, execute the following optical axis

readjustment.
Laser sensor
3
 Procedure to readjust the optical axis.
4
There are three adjusting mechanisms; [right/left adjustment], [forward leaning adjustment] and [up/down
adjustment] for the optical axis adjustment.
 At the time of adjustment, work while the carriage cover is attached.

 After having operated each adjusting mechanism, make sure to execute the F2 key teaching every
5
time. (If adjusting with the adjust screw of each adjusting mechanism, make sure to check the sen-
sor level after executing the teaching.
 Teaching (setting of the standard)

Set the sensor level, which is achieved when carried out by pushing the key, as the 100 % of
standard values.
Because it is the standard value, execute in the state that there is no obstacle (aluminum block) and
the carried is capped-in.
6
In addition, execute while the screws of each adjusting mechanism were tightened by all means.
Because, even if executing the teaching and setting the standard, under the condition that the
screws were loose, fastening a screw will change the optical axis slightly and the standard will
7
change.
1. Remove the side cover R and side cover UR.
2. Execute the teaching while the carriage is capped-in.
8
Side cover R
Side cover UR

Rev.
3. Operating the right/left keys, move the carriage to the limit of

Carriage maintenance space.
In this condition, execute the [right/left adjustment] so that the
sensor level becomes more than 90.
2
4. Execute the [forward leaning adjustment] until the difference
Block of 10 mm between the result of placing a 10 mm block at the right side of
the table and that at the left side becomes less than 6%.
Reflector Block of 10 mm
At this time, the value is not required to be close to
85%. It is easier to make a laterality value smaller
early.
3
Sensor level: within 85±3%
Block of 10 mm
5. Placing the 10 mm blocks on the right/left sides of the table,
execute the [up/down adjustment] until the sensor level 4
becomes within 85±3%.
Reflector Block of 10 mm
Since to get a fine result by one time of the step 4 & 5
5
is difficult, repeat the adjusting process by checking
the value.
6. Execute the step 4 & 5 to get the sensor level within 85±3% and
Laterality: within 6% then confirm the step 3.
6
7. If it is out of range, execute the [right/left adjustment] again and
repeat the step 3, 4 & 5 to make it in the target value.
8. After adjustment, attach the side cover R and the side cover UR.
(Refer to the detail in [Mounting of the covers])
Side cover R
7
8
Side cover UR

Rev.
 [Right/left adjustment] procedure

1. Loosen the fixing screw (x2) of area sensor holder.
2. Loosen the screw of head adjustment cam P. 2

3. Adjust the leaning of sensor by rotating the head adjust cam P.
Head adjustment cam P Clockwise The sensor turns to left.
3
Counterclockwise The sensor turns to right.
4. Tighten the screw of head adjustment cam P.
When loosening the screw, be careful that the head

adjust cam P does not move.
4
5. Tighten the fixing screw (x2) of area sensor holder.

Rev.
 [Forward leaning adjustment] procedure

1. Loosen the sensor adjust arm fixing screws (x2).
2. Loosen the screw of head adjustment cam P. 2

3. Adjust the leaning of sensor by rotating the head adjust cam P.
Clockwise The sensor turns upward.
3
Counterclockwise The sensor turns downward.
4. Tighten the screw of head adjustment cam P.

Head adjustment
cam P
When loosening the screw, be careful that the head
adjust cam P does not move.
4
5. Tight the screw of sensor adjust arm fixing screws.
5
6. After completing the adjustment, attach the removed cover.
After the adjustment, while attaching all parts except
the side cover UR, re-check if the adjust value is
within the criteria.
6
 [Up/down adjustment] procedure
1. Loosen the height fixing screw (x4) of sensor.
2. Adjust the height of sensor by rotating the height adjustment
Height adjustment
screw
screw (x1).
7
Clockwise The sensor move upward.
Counterclockwise The sensor moves downward.
3. Tighten the height fixing screw (x4) of sensor. 8

Rev.
 Mounting of the covers

1. Mount the cover RH. (screw x10)
3 2. Mount the Side cover UR.(screw x4)

1 Tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure on the left.
4
Be careful because a sensor level changes when
fixing screws  and  with applying pressure. 1
2
2
3. Mount the Side cover R.(screw x4)
1 Tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure on the left.
3
fixing screws  and  with applying pressure.
3
2 4
4
4. Mount the Side cover R. (screw x4)
Tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure on the left.

fixing screws  and  with applying pressure.
5
5. Close the maintenance under cover.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment >Adjusting the leveling of unit
Rev.
4.3.8 Adjusting the leveling of unit 1.3
 Adjust it with a level meeting the following precision.

Sensitivity: 0.35 mm/m or less, precision: +-1.0 mm/m or less
 If you can not arrange a level, use the level application of smartphone. (It is preferable to adjust the
sensitivity)
 If the camera lens on the back of the smartphone interferes , calibrate it in advance in a horizontal
place with the lens part not touching the measurement surface. In addition,It is impossible to check
the flatness.
1
 Work procedure of horizontal (front/back) adjustment
1. Move the vacuum table assy. backward.
2
(In case of 3042MKII, it is a metal plate table.)
Vacuum table assy.
3
2. Placing a level gauge (or a smart phone) on the linear guide rail,
4
Level gauge (or a smart phone)
check the level.
Linear guide rail Execute the level check at 4 corners (right/left/front/

back) on the linear guide rail.
6
[Front side] [Position to check flatness]
7
[Back side]

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Adjustment Items > Mechanical Adjustment >Adjusting the leveling of unit
Rev.
4.3.8 Adjusting the leveling of unit 1.3
3. Adjust the level at 4 corners (right/left/front/back) on the linear

guide rail by the level foot.
Level foot
Do not completely fix the level foot.
Loosen
Clockwise: Up
1
Counterclockwise: Down
 Work procedure of horizontal (right/left) adjustment

1. Move the vacuum table assy. to the center of printer.
2
2. Raise the vacuum table assy. from the bottom to the top.
3. Put a level gauge (or a smart phone) at the front center of the
4
Vacuum table Assy.
vacuum table assy. and carry out the level check.
4. Put a level gauge (or a smart phone) at the center of the vacuum
table assy. and carry out the level check.
5
5. When there is a wobble after adjustment, carry out “4.2.1 Head
adjustment Parallelism adjustment”.
 Never do the adjustment of the triangle cam and
Level gauge (or a smart phone) the table support shaft.
 In the case of a certain model of smart phone
6
which camera interferes, it is impossible to
check the flatness. Need to prepare a level
separately.
6. Adjust the level of the main unit with the level foot (x4).
Level foot
Do not completely fix the level foot. 7
8
7. Carrying out the level check again to adjust the front/back level
of the main unit.
The front/back horizontal adjustment greatly influ-
ences the flatness of the table and the right angle pre-
cision in drawing.
8. After completing the adjustment, fix the level foot by tightening

the lock nut (x4) with a wrench.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function
Test Items
5.1 5.2
5
Test Function Other Test

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > Check Pattern
Rev.
5.1.1 Check Pattern 1.1
 Outline
Following 15 “CHECK PATTERN” types are printable.
100% 50% 25% 6.25%

Nozzle check Vertical line Horizontal line Diagonal line
Gradation V-1B1W H-1B1W Feed
1
Grid Impact assessment Discharge evaluation
 List of check pattern
No Item Selectable Values / Description

1 Select a pattern Select a desired one among the check patterns listed above.
2
3
X resolution (X DPI)
Y resolution (Y DPI)
150, 300, 600, 900, 1200 dpi
300, 600, 900, 1200 dpi
2
4 Drawing direction Drawing direction: Uni direction
Dividing number
X=150: 1, 2, 4, 8 pass
X=300: 1, 2, 4, 8 pass
X=600: 2, 4, 8, 16 pass
X=900: 3, 6, 12, 24 pass
3
X=1200: 4, 8, 16, 32 pass
5 Line width 1 ~ 1500 dot (can be specified at the selection of vertical line, horizontal line diagonal line
and grid)
6 Interval 1 ~ 9999 dot (can be specified at the selection of vertical line, horizontal line and diagonal
line)
4
7 Grid size 1 ~ 100 mm (can be specified at the time of grid selection)
8 Select drawing size X: 10 ~ 420 mm
Y: 10 ~ 300 mm (3042MkIIseries), 10~610mm (6042MkIIseries)
9 Select drawing color __ MCYK 5
10 Start drawing [ENTER]: Star drawing
11 During drawing [END]: Drawing discontinuation

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > Sensor Test
Rev.
5.1.2 Sensor Test 1.2
 Outline
To test each sensor.
 List of SENSOR TEST
Sensor Function LCD display

Cover
Front cover
Display the status of cover
Display the status of front cover
OPEN/CLOSE
OPEN/CLOSE
1
Y origin Display the status of photo sensor (Y origin) ON/OFF
X origin Display the status of photo sensor (X origin) ON/OFF
Z Origin
Wiper Origin
Display the status of photo sensor (Z origin)
Display the status of work sensor
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
2
Work sensor Display the status of station origin sensor ON/OFF
BBQ Origin Display the status of BBQ sensor ON/OFF
3
Liquid level sensor 1 Lo Display the status of Liquid level Lo sensor ON/OFF
- 8 Lo
Liquid level sensor 1 Hi Display the status of Liquid level Hi sensor ON/OFF
- 8 Hi
Liquid level sensor 1 Lmt Display the status of Liquid level Lmt sensor ON/OFF
4
- 8 Lmt
Pump motor 1 Display the status of Pump motor 1 ON/OFF
Pump motor 2 Display the status of Pump motor 2 ON/OFF
(4 head model4 head model only)
Hot water Float sensor Display the status of Hot water Float sensor ON/OFF
Bottle tank 1~8 Display the status of Float sensor of the Bottle tank ON/OFF
5

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > Cartridge Sensor
Rev.
5.1.3 Cartridge Sensor 1.1
 Outline
To check cartridge sensor.
 Content
To check the operation of the ink end sensor, and whether the cartridge IC is included.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > Check Memory
Rev.
5.1.4 Check Memory 1.0
 Outline
To check each memory of the machine.
 Content
Item Content
SDRAM check Executes read/write check of SDRAM.
 When a DATA error occurs, “SDRAM D:xxxxxxxx” is displayed. 1
 When a Address error occurs, “SDRAM A:xxxxxxxx” is displayed.
F-ROM check Executes hash check of F-ROM.
 When a check sum error occurs, “F-ROM SUM ERROR” is displayed.
2
S-RAM check Executes read/write check of S-RAM.
 When a DATA error occurs, “S-RAM D:xxxxxxxx” is displayed.
 When a Address error occurs, “S-RAM A:xxxxxxxx” is displayed.
* When data does not agree, the check process is discontinued and memory address, write/read data at occurrence of the error are
displayed.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > Keyboard Test
Rev.
5.1.5 Keyboard Test 1.0
 Outline
To test the panel switch.
 Content
When the panel switch is pressed, the name of the switch is displayed on the LCD.
1
If none is pressed, “NONE” is displayed on the LCD.
When you press the [END] key, “Test end” is displayed and the keyboard test is completed.
Using [] / [] keys, confirm the keyboard buzzer rumbling.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > LCD Test
Rev.
5.1.6 LCD Test 1.0
 Outline
To check the LCD indication.
 Content
Switch the color to indicate by the [ENTER] key.
When you press the [END] key, the LCD is completed.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > Check Temp.
Rev.
5.1.7 Check Temp. 1.1
 Outline
Possible to check the temperature of temperature monitoring parts.
 Content
The temperature shown in the table below is displayed.
Display
HEAD1a~4b
Content
Temperature of the Head 1a~3b (3 head model) / 1a~4b(4 head model).
1
LED UV1~4 Temperature of the LED UV.
LCD The room temperature.
Hot water heater
UV DRV1_1~1_3
Temperature of the Hot water heater.
Temperature of the UV DRV.
2

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > Check Ink IC
Rev.
5.1.8 Check Ink IC 1.0
 Outline
To check the IC of ink bottle.
 Content
Check is performed by reading the IC chip data, and then displays the number of errors.
1
When an error occurs, “CNT=1 ERR=1” is displayed.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > UV Level Check
Rev.
5.1.9 UV Level Check 1.2
 Outline
Operates for measuring the amount of light of LED-UV.
 Work procedure
1
Wear protective eye wear to prevent injury to your eyes.
 TEST UV ILLUMINANCE(AUTO)
1. Select [#TEST]-[CHECK UV LEVEL].
2
#TEST
CHECK UV LEVEL > [] / []: Select
[ENTER]: Fix
2. Select [TEST UV ILLUMINANCE].

#CHECK UV LEVEL
TEST UV [] / []: Select
[ENTER]: Fix
3
CHECK UV ON/OFF
UV Temperature
3. Align the sensor part of the light checker installed on the
CHECK UV LEVEL measurement jig with the mark on the front right side of the
SET THE TOOL :ent table.
Take care to prevent misalignment of the position in

the X direction, and upward movement of the sensor 4
and jig.
measurement jig
Sensor part
6
4. Set the range of the UV light checker to “H”, and then set the
mode to “DHMAX”.
7
Press the button on the
left side several times
until the display on the
8
LCD screen says Set to “H”.
“DHMAX”.
Part No. (above picture): C9386 (HAMAMATSU)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > UV Level Check
Rev.
5.1.9 UV Level Check 1.2
5. Select [Start Check UV(AUTO)].

CHECK UV LEVEL
Start Check UV(AUTO)> The table and LED UV unit move automatically
START CHECK UV(MANUAL)>
from (1) to (4), and the UV LED lump light up.
Pinning Unit 1fff ← Do not change
UV Level 28 ← Do not change
FUNCTION BIT
1
** CHECKING **
PLEASE WAIT
2 UV LED Lump 1
UVLED lamp lights
at measuring 3
position (1)
4
Result:1 2
Check the measurements
of the measurement jig.
6. Check that it is 1000 mW or more
VACUUM UV When it is less than 1000 mW
3
 Replace the LED glass
Check the measurements in the same  Replace the 4inch-LCUVLED PCB Assy.
manner in (2) to (4). (Refer to 3.5.1)
 TEST UV ILLUMINANCE(MANUAL)
CHECK UV LEVEL
1. Execute “TEST UV ILLUMINANCE(AUTO):Step 1.~Step 4.”. 4
Start Check UV(AUTO)> *Follow the instructions in “TEST UV
START CHECK UV(MANUAL)> ILLUMINANCE(AUTO):Step 3.” to place the measurement
Pinning Unit 1fff ← Do not change
UV Level 28 ← Do not change jig in the correct position on the table.
5
FUNCTION BIT
2. Select [START CHECK UV(MANUAL)].
** CHECKING **UV OFF 3. Move the table.
X= 0.0 Y= 0.0
TABLE HEIGHT 0.0 (Move the jig to the position of the UV LED lump.)
[] / []/[]/ []: Move the table
6
[ENTER]: UV LED lump: ON/OFF
Do not leave the light on for a long time in the same

location.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > Aging
Rev.
5.1.10 Aging 1.0
 Outline
For the durability testing, continuous reciprocating operation is executed.
 List of aging items
Name of Test Function

XYZ AGEING*
XY AGEING*
Continuous reciprocating operation of the X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis
Continuous reciprocating operation of the X-axis and Y-axis
1
X AGEING* Continuous reciprocating operation of the X-axis
Y AGEING* Continuous reciprocating operation of the Y-axis
Z AGEING*
Ink discharge pump
Continuous reciprocating operation of the Z-axis
Continuous operation of ink discharge pump motor (up to 24)
2
WIPER MOTOR Continuous reciprocating operation of wiper motor (up to 9999 times)
WIPE HEAD Repeat wiping operation (up to 9999 times)
3
CAPPING Repeat capping operation
CLEANING Run the cleaning operation at the specified number of times (up to 500 times)
FLUSHING Repeat flushing operation (maximum 9999 times)
Communication For development debugging
4
Aging Total Time Initialization of Aging Total Time
XY measure
INIT ORIGIN Set the aging initialize origin.
CIRCULATION Continuous operation of circulation pump motor (up to 24)
Air Pump Continuous operation of air pressure pump motor (up to 24)
HOT WTR PUMP Continuous operation of hot water pump motor (up to 24) 5
*If you run while ink-filled, there is a case in which ink from the head leaks.
When execute [Y Aging] and [XY Aging], because there is a risk of ink leakage, keep laying waste cloth
etc below in advance.
6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > Check Encoder
Rev.
5.1.11 Check Encoder 1.1
 Outline
To check Y linear encoder and the operation of the Y-axis motor encoder.
 Work procedure
 Y linear encoder
1
Move the carriage by JOG key operation and check the performance of the linear encoder and the Y-axis motor
encoder.
1. Select [# TEST] - [CHECK ENCODER] -[Y Encoder].
#Test >
2. Display the coordinate value of the motor encoder in M and of
the linear encoder in E in mm unit and pulse unit.
2
Check Encoder >
Slider moves right and left with [] [] key.
Y Encoder >
Auto Judg
M:****.*mm ***,***puls
E:****.*mm ***,***puls 3
 Automatic judgment
To check linear encoder and the operation of the Y-axis motor encoder automatically. 4
1. Select [# TEST] - [CHECK ENCODER] -[Auto Judg] .
#Test >
Check Encoder >

5
Auto Judg >
Y Encoder
2. Input the Scan speed (S) and the Scan acceleration (A). 6
#Check Encoder
Y: S= 800 A=1.00
3. Press the [ENTER] key to start the operation.
7
#Check Encoder
EXECUTE :ent
PLEASE WAIT
8
4. The results are displayed.
M =851.4 E =3410.8 An error message is displayed if the result values are
Mc= 0.0 Ec= -4.0
anomalous.
Ms= 52521 Es=24248
Mm=222889 Em= 4819
Mr= 52521 Er=24152

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > Check Encoder
Rev.
5.1.11 Check Encoder 1.1
5. An error message is displayed if the threshold value is

ERROR exceeded.
M/E DIF:0.50%
The difference between Y-axis motor encoder and Y linear
encoder is displayed.
1
 Origin encoder
Check the operation of the origin encoder.

1. Select [# TEST] - [CHECK ENCODER] -[ORG ENCODER].
#Test >
Check Encoder >

2
ORG ENCODER >
2. Check the value of the origin encoder. 3

X= 80
Y= 80

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > Event Log
Rev.
5.1.12 Event Log 1.0
 Outline
To display the event log.
 Content
As this is a function for development, the details are not disclosed.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > Check Message
Rev.
5.1.13 Check Message 1.0
 Outline
Error messages and warning messages are displayed.
 Content
You can display error messages and warning messages with [][] key in order.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > Test Hardware
Rev.
5.1.14 Test Hardware 1.0
 Outline
Port test of the hardware
 Content
As this is a function for development, the details are not disclosed.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > Valve Test
Rev.
5.1.15 Valve Test 1.2
 Outline
Confirm whether the valve about ink circulation system opens and close definitely.
 Work procedure
1. Select [# TEST] - [VALVE TEST].
#Test >
1
2. Select the valve which is confirming.
Valve Test > Press [ENTER] key.
3. Confirm that vale is switched with [] [] key.

2-Way Air Valve >
*_(=under bar) is displayed, OFF
2
3-Way Air Valve >
3-Way Ink Valve > *Numerical is displayed, ON
Circulation Valve >
example:
2-Way Air Valve 2-Way Air Valve This indicated Head 1 and 2
:______ :12______ is ON, others are OFF.
 List of valve test items 3

Valve Contents LCD display
2 way air valve 2 way valve to select the head. It switch air supply to up or 1 - 3 (3 head model) / 4 (4 head model) ;
downstream sub-tank of each head from 1 to 3 (3 head model) / indicate each head number
4 (4 head model). OFF; Close, ON; Open 4
3 way air valve 3 way valve to switch positive pressure or negative pressure. It 1; Negative pressure, 2; Positive pressure
common to all head switch negative or positive air path. OFF; Close, ON; Open
Ink valve Ink supply change valve 1 -8; indicate each ink supply valves
5
number
OFF; Circulation path, ON; Ink supply
path
Circulation Valve Circulation valve 1 -2; indicate each circulation valves
number
OFF; Close, ON; Open
6
When valve test is confirmed, ink circulation system becomes stop status.
When ink circulation system is re-stated, re-start in manual after end of the test.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > Air Pressure Check
Rev.
5.1.16 Air Pressure Check 1.2
 Outline
Check whether the pressure pump involved in the ink circulation system makes an appropriate pressure. Use to iden-
tify air leak position or like.
 Work procedure
1. Select [# TEST] - [Air Pressure Check].
1
#Test >
Air Pressure Check >
2
Negative Pressure >
Positive Pressure (Check) >
Atmospheric Pressure >
Positive Pressure >
P/N :-8.23=P: 15.22

PUMP:ON 160[====]
Please Wait 3
 Check items
Item
Negative The target value upstream -2.3kPa
Contents
4
pressure If it does not reach the target value, it is possible that air leak occurs in the place in front of the two-way valve.
Check the connection status of the tube and the chamber.
If open the valve, there is a risk of the ink overflow or the ink entering the
5
pressure path. Sufficient attention should be given to the liquid surface changes
in the sub-tank.
Positive Operate at the pump rotation speed configured at startup.

Pressure (Check)
As it is for confirmation, do not adjust the throttle valve.
Atmospheric Measure the pressure of the path in positive pressure condition without turning the pump on and confirm the
6
pressure atmospheric pressure.
Since the ink comes out from the nozzle surface, carry out the cleaning after
opening the valve. When operate to move the carriage without performing
7
cleaning, there is a possibility that ink dripping.
Positive pressure Target range 17.5kPa

Adjust the throttle valve screw to fit into the target range.
If the positive pressure does not reach the target value, it sounds a beep sound.
When weaker than the target value (low) long buzzer sound of the interval
When stronger than the target value (high) short buzzer sound of the interval
Since the ink comes out from the nozzle surface, carry out the cleaning after 8
opening the valve. When operate to move the carriage without performing
cleaning, there is a possibility that ink dripping.
When run air pressure check, it will be a state where the ink circulation system is stopped.
When resume the ink circulation system, manually resume after completion of the test.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > NCU
Rev.
5.1.17 NCU 1.1
NCU (nozzle missing dot detect unit) is optional with UJF-3042MkII.
 Outline
Possible to check and adjust the condition of the sensitivity and slant of sensor and the discharge position for the
NCU (nozzle missing dot detect unit).
1
 Work procedure
 Sensor check
#Test >
1. Select [#Test] - [NCU] - [Sensor Test].
[] / []: Select
2
[ENTER]: Execute
NCU >
2. Press the [ENTER] key.
3. Change the display by pressing the [ENTER] key. 3

#NCU
Check Sensor <ent> Value can be kept as is.
4
Check Light Vol
= 100
Sens Check Thd

= 130
5
Number Of Exe.
= 10
4. It is acceptable if the numeric value in the left figure is not less

#NCU than 130.
Value :190 Check the value.
OK with 130 and more. It is necessary to replace the NCU unit if the value is less than
130.(Refer to 6.5.8 NCU Assy.(Nozzle missing dot detect unit))
The numeric value means the sensitivity of the

6
sensor of NCU unit.
 Slant adjustment
#NCU
Slant Adjust
5. select [Slant Adjust].
[] / []: Select
7
[ENTER]: Execute
7. Check four numeric numbers in the left figure.

• It must be other numbers than “---”.
8
•
Slant Adjust
Rear :0 [0.1mm]  Assuming the numbers from the top in order, , .
Front:3 [0.1mm]   -  must be within 5.
If the above two points are satisfied, the NCU unit does not
slant. (not need to adjust.)
Slant: [Rear: Head1(2,3)]-[Front: Head4]

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > NCU
Rev.
5.1.17 NCU 1.1
If it is NG, loosen the nut for adjust screw and adjust

it to be the specific value (within 5) by turning the
adjust screw.
Adjust screw
2
 Discharge position
#NCU
FlsPositionAdj.
8. Select [FlsPositionAdj.].
[] / []: Select 3
[ENTER]: Execute
4
10. Change the display by pressing the [ENTER] key.
Check Light Vol
= 32 Value can be kept as is.
Width
= 26
#NCU
11. Press the [ENTER] key. 5
Start [ENT] 12. Check four numeric numbers () in the left figure.
#Shot Position adjust OK if they are other than “---”. (Only  for 3 head model)
Check four numeric
6
1:-13 2:-14 [0.1mm]
numbers.
3:-13 4:-15 [0.1mm]
OK, if  The numbers from 1 to 6 indicate the head num-
5:--- 6:--- [0.1mm] • other than “---”. bers.Heads 5 and 6 are unused.
 The unit is [0.1mm]. (-6=-0.6mm)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > SD Card
Rev.
5.1.18 SD Card 1.1
 Outline
Check if it is possible to access to a SD card and files in it.
• “Printing-related data” is saved in the SD card. (“Print data” is not saved.)
• Prohibit connect or disconnect other than the failure.
• In principle, use the included SD card (Panasonic 128MB/512MB). (No operation guarantee of the other cards.)
• SD card needs to be formatted in FAT format. If there is a problem with the format of the included SD card, use 1
“FAT16 / ALC16KB” (refer 10)Included SD card initial format function “FAT16/ALC16KB”and re-format.
When run the format, data files are all deleted.

2
3
For more information about the error code, see “SD error details”, “FS error details”, and “MF error details” below.
When run the file-related test function, there is a case that unnecessary files remain on the SD card.
After the test, run “Test Data Clear” (refer 8)Test File Deletion “Test Data Clear”) to delete the unneces-
sary files.
1) Read / Write Operation check “RW Check” 4

Check the alignment of the Write data and Read data, and display the results. Use in the process inspection.
1. Select [#Test]-[SD Card]-[RW Check].
5
#Test
SD CARD [ENT] [] / []: Select
[ENTER]: Execute
#SD Card
RW Check [ENT] 2. Press the [ENTER] key.
3. Wait for about 5 minutes during operation checking.
6
#RW Check
Please wait
Create a test data file on the SD card, and execute the
RW check three times.

Rev.
5.1.18 SD Card 1.1
4. Check the result.

#RW Check
:OK OK, if it is [OK].
Result Result and handling

OK The SD card is successfully accessed, and can Read
and Write properly.
1
Error 603 SD card-related error has occurred
Error701~788 • Re-insert the SD card
• Check the connection of the SD card PCB and cable.
In case it is not reintegrated, even so,

• Replace the SD card.
2
• Replace the SD card PCB.
Error 601 ~620 File-related or print condition-related error has
(Excluding occurred
Error603) • [In case of Included SD card]
Error101~513 Execute 10)Included SD card initial format
function “FAT16/ALC16KB” and perform the
3
format.
[In case of the other SD cards]
Execute 12)SD error details and perform the
format
4
*Refer 14)Detail of MF Error for the details of the error
2) Check the FAT type (Format check1) “FAT Type”
Examine the format state of the SD card and display. Use in the process inspection.
#Test
1. Select [#Test]-[SD Card]-[FAT Type]. 5
SD Card [ENT] [] / []: Select
[ENTER]: Execute
#SD Card
6
FAT Type [ENT]
#FAT TYPE 3. Wait for about1second during the operation check.

Please wait
Read the FAT information from the SD card to deter-
mine the FAT type.
#FAT TYPE
OK, if it is [FAT16] or [FAT32] or [FAT12].
7
:FAT16
Default FAT type of SD card (Panasonic,128MB/512MB) for
this product is [FAT16].

Rev.
5.1.18 SD Card 1.1

FAT32 If the value is in the left, it can be used.
FAT16 It is formatted in FAT type that can be used in the
FAT12 product.
UnKnown It is formatted in FAT type that can not be used in the
1
product.
• Format the SD card in “FAT16/ALC16KB” refer
10)Included SD card initial format function “FAT16/
ALC16KB”) “FAT16/ALC16KB” initial format func-
tion of the included SD card
• Replace the SD card
2
Error 1 SD card not recognized
• Re-insert the SD card
Error 2 ~ An error occurred while communicating with the SD
card
• Check the connection of the SD card PCB

3
*Refer 12)SD error details for the details of the error.
4
3) Check the Allocation unit size (Format check2) “AllocUnitSize”
Examine the format state of the SD card and display. Use in the process inspection.
#Test
SD Card [ENT]
1. Select [#Test]-[SD Card]-[AllocUnitSize].
[] / []: Select
5
[ENTER]: Execute
#SD CARD
AllocUnitSize [ENT] 2. Press the [ENTER] key.
#AllocUnitSize
Please wait
3. Wait for about1second during the operation check. 6
Read out the FAT information from the SD card to
calculate the allocation unit size.
#AllocUnitSize
4. Check the result. 7
:16,384[B] Pass if the value is one of seven values between 512[B] and
32,768[B] below.
The default allocation unit size of SD card (Panasonic, 128MB/
512MB)for the product is 16,384[B].
8

Rev.
5.1.18 SD Card 1.1

512[B] If the value is in the left, it can be used.
1,024[B] It has been formatted with the available allocation
2,048[B] unit size in the product.
4,096[B]
8,192[B]
16,384[B]
32,768[B] 1
UnKnown Allocation unit size can not be identified.
• Format the SD card in “FAT16/ALC16KB” refer
• Replace the SD card 2
Error 2 ~ An error occurred while communicating with the SD
card
3
4
4) Connect condition “Connection”
Display the result of connection process run to the SD card. 5

Can be used for checking insertion of SD card and cable connections.
1. Select [#Test]-[SD Card]-[Connection].
6
#Test
[ENTER]: Execute
#SD Card
:Connection [ENT] 2. Press the [ENTER] key.
Run the connection start processing to the SD card.

#Connection
ON OK, if it is [ON]
8
ON Properly connected
• Check the connection of SD card PCB

Rev.
5.1.18 SD Card 1.1
5) Check the size “Size”
Display the results of product sizes which were examined by accessing to product information on the SD card.
1. Select [#Test]-[SD Card]-[Size].

#Test
[ENTER]: Execute
1
#SD Card
:Size [ENT] 2. Press the [ENTER] key.
 Read the card-specific information from the SD

card to verify product size.
 It is different from the free space.

2
In case of 128MB
#Size Included SD card (Panasonic) is
128,450,560[B]
128MB:[128,450,560[B]]
3
In case of 512MB 512MB:[495,452,160[B]]
#Size
495,452,160[B] Result Result and handling
128,450,560[B] Properly checked the size.(128MB SD card)
495,452,160[B] Properly checked the size.(512MB SD card)
Value other than Size is wrong
above • Check if a SD card is for exclusive use.
4
Error 2~ An error occurred while communicating with the
SD card
5

• Replace the SD card PCB. 6
6) Check the minimum read access “Sector0”
Display a part of the data (fixed value of format dependent) obtained in the minimum access (512B).
7
1. Select [#Test]->[SD Card]->[Sector0].
#Test
[] / []: Select
8
SD Card [ENT]
[ENTER]: Execute
#SD Card
:Sector0 [ENT] 2. Press the [ENTER] key.
Read the data of the sector No.0 from the SD card.

Display the data of 4Byte amount from 508th Byte.
(If it is FAT format **** 55aa fixed)

Rev.
5.1.18 SD Card 1.1

#Sector0
000055aa The value of the included SD card (Panasonic128MB/512MB)
is [000055aa]

000055AA Properly checked the size
Value other
than above
Format of the SD card is wrong.
• Format the SD card in “FAT16/ALC16KB” refer 1
2
Error 2~ An error occurred while communicating with the SD
card
3

4
7) Specified sector Read access confirmation “Sector”
The display designated address of the data (4 bytes) obtained by accessing the specified sector (512MB).
5
1. Select [#TEST]-[SD Card]-[Sector].
#Test
SD card [ENT] [] / []: Select
[ENTER]: Execute
#SD Card
Sector [ENT] 2. Press the [ENTER] key.
3. Specify the sector number to access.

[] / []: Digit selection (0-8 digits)
6
[] / []: Value selection (0-9)
[ENTER]: Confirm
4. Specify the address of the sector to be accessed. (4-byte units)

[] / []: Selected value (0 to 508,4-byte unit)
[ENTER]: Confirm
7
Sect00000000 Adr508
:000055aa
Display 4Byte data which are read from specified
sector and specified address of the SD card.
8

Rev.
5.1.18 SD Card 1.1

The value of the included SD card (Panasonic128MB) is
[000055aa]at the specified sector[010000] and specified
address[508]
1
######## Check the value of specified sector and specified
address before and confirm if the value is obtained
successfully or not.
Error 2~11 An error occurred while communicating with the SD
card 2
3
4
8) Test File Deletion “Test Data Clear”
Delete all the files in the following names that are on the SD card. “SDF*****.***” (Files that begin with SDF).
1. Select [#TEST]-[SD Card]-[Test Data Clear].

#TEST
5
[ENTER]: Execute
#SD Card
Test Data Clear [ENT] 2. Search the root directory of the SD card, and delete the file with
the name beginning with “SDF”
6
#Test Data Clear
PLEASE WAIT If [OK], there is no file with the name beginning with “SDF” in
the root directory of the SD card.
#Test Data Clear
:OK
OK Deleted the test file successfully
• Run the test function 1) to 5) to confirm and handle the
error content.
7
Error 2 File-related error has occurred
error content.
*Refer 13)Detail of FS Error for the details of the error. 8

Rev.
5.1.18 SD Card 1.1
9) SD card free space check function “Blank Size”
Check the free capacity of the SD card and display.
1. Select [#TEST]-[SD Card]-[Blank Size].

#TEST
SD card [ENT] [] / []: Select
[ENTER]: Execute
1
#SD Card
Blank Size [ENT] 2. Press the [ENTER] key.
Check the free space by reading the format information from
the SD card.
2
It is different from the SD card product size.
The free space of the included SD card (Panasonic) is as fol-

#TEST Data lows, when the SD card is formatted in “FAT16/ALC16KB”
PLEASE WAIT
128MB SD card: “128,352,256[B]”
512MB SD card: “493,335,008[B]”.
3
#TEST Data
:OK Result Result and handling
###,###,###[B] Free space was successfully verified
Error 1 Occurred SD card-related errors
4
error content.
error content.
*Refer 13)Detail of FS Error for the details of the error.
5
10) Included SD card initial format function “FAT16/ALC16KB”
Run the format of the same content as the included SD card.
6
1. select [#TEST]-[SD Card]-[Format]-[FAT16/ALC16KB].
#TEST
[ENTER]: Execute
#SD card
Format [ENT] 2. Press the [ENTER] key.
#Format
FAT16/ALC16KB [ENT]
3. Execution confirmation screen is displayed.
7
#FAT16/ALC16KB
Format OK? [ENT]

#FAT16/ALC16KB
PLEASE WAIT
#FAT16/ALC16KB
:OK

Rev.
5.1.18 SD Card 1.1
If OK, formatting is complete.

OK Format has been successfully completed.
Error 1 Occurred SD card-related errors
error content.
• Try the format with “AUTO”. (refer 11)Recommended
1
conditions automatically identified format function
“AUTO”)Recommended conditions automatically
identified format function “AUTO”)
2
If it still does not recover,
• replace the SD card.
11) Recommended conditions automatically identified format function “AUTO”
Depending on the size of the SD card, it runs the format by the recommended conditions are automatically 3
identified.
When reformatting the product equipped with SD card, it is recommended to use FAT16/ALC16KB.
Refer 10)Included SD card initial format function “FAT16/ALC16KB”)
Initial format function of included SD card “FAT16/ALC16KB”
4
1. select [#TEST]-[SD Card]-[Format]-[AUTO].
#TEST
[ENTER]: Execute
#SD Card
Format [ENT] 2. Press the [ENTER] key. 5
3. Execution confirmation screen is displayed.
#Format
AUTO [ENT] 4. Press the [ENTER] key.
#AUTO
Format OK? [ENT]
6
7
#AUTO
PLEASE WAIT If OK, formatting is complete.

#AUTO
:OK OK Format has been successfully completed.
8
• Run the test function 1) to 5)to confirm and handle the
error content.
• Try the format of “FAT16/ALC16KB” refer
ALC16KB”)
If it still does not recover,
• replace the SD card.

Rev.
5.1.18 SD Card 1.1
12) SD error details
Summarize the error related to access to the SD card below.
Error1 is when SD card is not recognized when it is not inserted or bad connection.
Error2 or later errors (which are connected to) are the communication error with the SD card.
Error code
(Error #)
Result and handling 1
1 SD card not recognized
2 An error occurred while communicating with the SD card
• Re-insert the SD card 2

3
 Detail of Error code
Error code Error Category Error content
4
(Error #)
1 Connection SD card not recognized
2-10 (not used)
11 Internal processing Abnormality occurs in IO control processing
12 Internal processing Can not be written due to write-protected
<supplement> In fact it does not occur because this product does not distin-
guish write-protect 5
13 Internal processing Data inaccessible for the connection process is not completed
14 Internal processing It was set outside the range of parameter values
6
15-20 (not used)
21 Communication Error (DMA Read) Start bit abnormal (SD controller error)
22 Communication Error (DMA Read) Receive FIFO over run (SD controller error)
23 Communication Error (DMA Read) Data time out (SD controller error)
24 Communication Error (DMA Read) Data CRC abnormal (SD controller error)
25 Communication Error (DMA Read) Other error (SD controller error) 7
26 Communication Error (DMA Read) It did not become a data communication state (at the start of communication)
27 Communication Error (DMA Read) It did not become data communication possible state (communication at the
end)
8
28 Communication Error (DMA Read) Read Start command is not accepted
29 Communication Error (DMA Read) The waiting time of reception completion is time out.
30 Communication Error (DMA Read) The waiting time of DMA completion interrupt is timeout
31 Communication Error (DMA Read) The waiting time of DMA CH0 stop is timeout
32-40 (not used)
41 Communication Error (DMA Write) Start bit abnormal (SD controller error)

Rev.
5.1.18 SD Card 1.1
Error code Error Category Error content

(Error #)
42 Communication Error (DMA Write) Transmission FIFO under run (SD controller error)
43 Communication Error (DMA Write) Data time out (SD controller error)
44 Communication Error (DMA Write) Data CRC abnormal (SD controller error)
1
45 Communication Error (DMA Write) Other error (SD controller error)
46 Communication Error (DMA Write) It did not become a data communication state (at the start of communication)
47 Communication Error (DMA Write) It did not become data communication possible state (communication at the
end)
48 Communication Error (DMA Write) Write start command is not accepted
49 Communication Error (DMA Write) The waiting time of Transmission completion is timeout 2
50 Communication Error (DMA Write) The waiting time of SD controller complete interrupt is timeout
51 Communication Error (DMA Write) The waiting time of DMA completion interrupt is timeout
52 Communication Error (DMA Write) The waiting time of DMA CH0 stop is timeout
53-60
61
(not used)
Communication Error (CPU Read) Start bit abnormal (SD controller error)
3
62 Communication Error (CPU Read) Send FIFO under run (SD controller error)
63 Communication Error (CPU Read) Data time out (SD controller error)
64
65
Communication Error (CPU Read)
Communication Error (CPU Read)
Data CRC abnormal (SD controller error)
Other error (SD controller error)
4
66 Communication Error (CPU Read) It did not become a data communication state (at the start of communication)
67 Communication Error (CPU Read) It did not become data communication possible state (communication at the
end)
68-80 (not used) 5
81 Communication Error (CPU Write) Start bit abnormal (SD controller error)
82 Communication Error (CPU Write) Send FIFO under run (SD controller error)
83 Communication Error (CPU Write) Data time out (SD controller error)
84 Communication Error (CPU Write) Data CRC abnormal (SD controller error)
6
85 Communication Error (CPU Write) Other error (SD controller error)
86 Communication Error (CPU Write) It did not become a data communication state (at the start of communication)
87 Communication Error (CPU Write) It did not become data communication possible state (communication at the
7
end)
88 Communication Error (CPU Write) Write start command is not accepted
89-100 (not used)
101 Data conveyors Write value and Read value is mismatched

Rev.
5.1.18 SD Card 1.1
13) Detail of FS Error
Summarize the error which is related to the file access as below.
• Error1 is the SD card-related errors.
• Error2 and later are file / format related errors (can access to the SD card).
Error code
(Error #)
Result and handling 1
1 SD-related error has occurred.
• Run the test function 1) to 5)to confirm and handle the error content.
2
2 File / format-related errors are occurred.
• Run the test function 1) to 5) to confirm and handle the error content.
14) Detail of MF Error
3
Summarize the error which is related to access to the printing-related data file below.
• Error603 and Error701~788 is SD card-related error.(Such as not inserted, bad connection, or poor communication)
Re-inserting the SD card, replacing the SD card, or confirming the SD card slot connection can solve most of the
errors.
• Error601~620 is file-related error.(Such as no specified file or not enough free space)

The SD card is accessed.
Reformatting the SD card can solve most of the errors. 4
However, when the SD card is reformatted, all the files will be deleted.
If print condition data has been downloaded on the SD card, the print condition data needs to be downloaded again.
• Error101~513 is print condition data file-related error.(Such as abnormal size and broken data)
5
The SD card is accessed.
Reformatting the SD card can solve most of the errors.
However, when the SD card is reformatted, all the files will be deleted.
If print condition data has been downloaded on the SD card, the print condition data needs to be downloaded again.
Error code
(Error #)
Result and handling
6
603 SD-related error has occurred.
701~788 • Run the test function 2)to5)to confirm and handle the error content.
601~620 File / format-related errors are occurred.
• Run the test function 2)to5) to confirm and handle the error content.
• In the process inspection, reformat using the format function in 10).
• After the installation, reformat using the format function in 10), and download the printing-related data again.
7
101~513 Occurred data-related errors
• Run the test function 2)to5) to confirm and handle the error content.
• In the process inspection, reformat using the format function in 10).
• After the installation, reformat using the format function in 10), and download the printing-related data again.
8

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > LED
Rev.
5.1.19 LED 1.0
 Outline
ON/OFF test of the keyboard LEDs is executed.
 List of LED
LED Type
OFF
Power LED
Light OFF
Power button light ON
1
LED Red Red light ON
LED Green Green light ON
LED Blue
LED R & G
Blue light ON
Yellow light ON
2
LED R & B Purple light ON
LED G & B Light blue light ON
3
LED R & G & B White light ON

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > Option Check
Rev.
5.1.20 Option Check 1.0
 Outline
Execute the optional operation check.
 List of option item
Item
Ionizer
1

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > Action
Rev.
5.1.21 Action 1.1
 Outline
Check the movement of individual moving part of the device.
 List of items
Items Content
Absorption fan
UV LED fan
Check the movement of the absorption fan
Check the movement of the UV LED fan
1
UV DRIVER fan Check the movement of the UV DRIVER fan
Pilot lamp RED Check lighting of the pilot lamp RED.
Pilot lamp YELLOW
Pilot lamp GREEN
Check lighting of the pilot lamp YELLOW.
Check lighting of the pilot lamp GREEN.
2
LED pointer Check lighting of the LED pointer.
Exhaust fans Confirm operation of exhaust fan (only for option setting)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > Kebab
Rev.
5.1.22 Kebab 1.0
 Outline
Check the operation of the kebab option.
 Work procedure
 Action
1
Check the operation of kebab.
1. Select [# TEST] - [Kebab] -[ACTION].
#Test >
Kebab >
ACTION >
2
1. Check the operation of the Kebab motor.
Kebab motor
[] / []: ON/OFF
3
:OFF
ON
 Sensor test
Check the sensor of kebab.

1. Select [# TEST] - [Kebab] -[SENSOR TEST].
4
#Test >
Kebab
5
>
SENSOR TEST >
Mark Sensor = 1023

Y= 80
2. Check the mark sensor value.
6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > MDL command Test
Rev.
5.1.23 MDL command Test 1.0
 Outline
Check the MDL command.
 Work procedure
Check the MDL command.
1. Select [# TEST] - [Kebab] -[MDL command Test].
1
#Test >
MDL Command Test
2
Cmd:WORKSET REQUEST
result: SUCCESS
3
buf[ 0]=M (ASC)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Test Function > MDL command Test
Rev.
5.1.23 MDL command Test 1.0

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Test Items > Other Test
Test Items
5.1 5.2
5
Test Function Other Test

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Covers
Disassembly and Reassembly

6.1 6.2 6.3 6
Covers Ink-related Parts Drive System
6.4 6.5 6.6
Electrical Parts Sensors UV Parts
7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Covers > Cover Layout
Rev.
6.1.1 Cover Layout 1.0
 Printer front
Slider PCB Cover
Bottle Top Cover
Bottle Cover R
1
Y cover L
Bottle front cover
Remove the Y cover R
Y cover R
Front under cover TL

2
Maintenance under cover L
Front cover U
3
Open the Front under cover TL
Cover RH
Side cover R
Front under cover T
Maintenance under cover R
Maintenance cover L
Side cover UR
4
Waste liquid tank cover
Waste liquid tank door
 Printer rear
Y cover R
5
Y cover L
6
Bottle top cover
Bottle cover L
Bottle rear cover
Side cover L
7
Electrical box cover
Side cover UL
Table rear cover R Cartridge

Cover LH
8
rear cover H
Table rear cover U
Table rear cover L

Cable cover(There is also
an other side.)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Covers > Cover Layout
Rev.
6.1.1 Cover Layout 1.0
 Carriage
2
Carriage cover stay
Carriage cover F
3
 Table
Open/close cover U
5
X side cover FL
Open/close cover L Open/close cover R
6
KB side cover L
X side cover FR
Front cover F
KB side cover R
7
Keyboard cover

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts

6.1 6.2 6.3 6
6.4 6.5 6.6
7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Sub-tank
Rev.
6.2.1 Sub-tank 1.1
2
the ink.
 Be sure to start the work after confirming the work procedure.(Refer to “3.1.2 Replacement of the
3
Sub-tank”)
 Take care not to pollute the surroundings with waste ink or washing liquid.
 Work procedure
 Removing the sub-tank
1. Select [#ADJUST] - [Subtank]-[Discharge Ink]. 4

(Refer to 4.2.21 Sub Tank .)

• Front cover U 5
• Carriage cover stay
4. Remove the fitting(x3) from the sub-tank.
Fitting(x3)
6
 Take care not to stain any object by ink dripping.
 Use a waste cloth for curing.
Sub-tank
7
5. Remove the screw(x1).

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Sub-tank
Rev.
6.2.1 Sub-tank 1.1
6. Remove the sub-tank holding.
sub-tank holding
1
7. Lift the sub-tank, remove the liquid level sensor in the back of
2
the sub-tank, and remove the sub-tank.
Liquid level Sensor
3
 Mounting the sub-tank
8. Mount a new sub-tank to the head after attaching the liquid

level sensor to it.
4
Make sure that the sub-tank is inserted into the head
sufficiently. Otherwise, a leak may occur.
5
9. Attach the sub-tank holding and fix the screws while pushing it
down.
6
Make sure that the sub-tank holding does not skew.
10. Turning ON the power supply.
7
11. Perform [#ADJUST] - [Subtank] - [FILL UP INK], fill ink to
the sub-tank.
(Refer to 4.2.21 Sub Tank .)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Head Unit
Rev.
6.2.2 Head Unit 1.1
Be sure to wear protective glasses and working gloves during the operation. 2
the ink.
3
 Be sure to start the work after confirming the work procedure. (Refer to “3.1.1 Replacement of the
Head Unit”)
 Work procedure
1. Select [#Adjust] - [Head Wash]-[Discharge].

Discharge ink in the sub-tank. 4
2. Drain the hot water.(Refer to 4.3.3 Drain the Hot Water•Filling
Hot Water”Drain the hot water”)
5
• Carriage cover stay
• Front cover U
• Y cover R
6
• Slider PCB Cover
5. Remove the hot water tube(x1) in the head front side.
6. Remove the fittings.
fitting x2
It isn't necessary to remove front fitting (x2) about
Head1~2 (3 head model) / 3 (4 head model).
[Rear]
7
Sub-tank
Hot water tube
8
3 head model: - Head1 Head2
4 head model: Head1 Head2 Head3
:The fitting which isn't Head3

removed.
Head4
[Front]
7. Remove the Head FFC from the Slider PCB.

Rev.
6.2.2 Head Unit 1.1
8. Remove the head unit assy.(Screwx1)
9. Remove the liquid level sensor(x2) in the back of the sub-tank

from sub-tank.
liquid level sensor
1
10. Pull the sub-tank holding to the front and remove it.(Screwx1)
2
Sub-tank holding
3
11. Lift the sub-tank(x2), and remove them from the head unit.
5
12. Remove the sub-tank fixed BKT.(Screwx2)
13. Remove the sub-tank pad(x2).

6
7
sub-tank pad
14. Remove Head earth plate.(Screwx2)

Rev.
6.2.2 Head Unit 1.1
15. Pull the head FFC(x2) upwards to remove them.
1
16. Remove the head holder(x2).(screw x 1 each)
17. Pull the AD plate CE downwards to remove it. 3
5
18. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
When attaching the AD plate, push the head toward

you and down to fix it.
①
rear
?
6
②
The side with the

front 7
label is turned to the
left.
19. Fill the hot water tube with hot water.(Refer to 4.3.3 Drain the
Hot Water•Filling Hot Water”Filling hot water”)
20. Perform [ADJUST] - [Subtank] - [FILL UP INK], fill ink to the

8
sub-tank.
After installing the head unit Assy, carry out all the
adjustments necessary to adjust the head
position.(Refer to “3.1.1 Replacement of the Head
Unit”)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Cap Assy.
Rev.
6.2.3 Cap Assy. 1.0
2
Turn the main power OFF when turning the power OFF. It is very dangerous if the sleep mode functions
mistakenly during the operation.
3
the ink.
 Be sure to start the work after confirming the work procedure.

 Work procedure
4
• Maintenance under cover
2. Remove the fitting under the station.

Open the cable clamp to help take out the tube.
5
3. Remove the screw(x2) which fix the cap assy.
7
4. Lift the cap assy and remove from the station.
 Take care not to lose the cap spring.

Cap Assy.
8
 Be careful not to spill waste ink.
Cap spring

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Cap Assy.
Rev.
6.2.3 Cap Assy. 1.0
 When installing the cap assy, position the side with

tension to the front.
 When connecting the fitting, check the tube tag to

make sure that the tube tag and the suction pump
2
number match when you install the part.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Wiper Unit
Rev.
6.2.4 Wiper Unit 1.0
Turn the main power OFF when turning the power OFF. It is very dangerous if the sleep mode functions 2
3
the ink.
4
 Work procedure
5
2. Remove the absorber case (+absorber).
absorber
Take care not to contaminate the surroundings with
6
ink.
7
absorber case
3. Remove screws (x3) of the wiper base, and remove the Wiper
unit.
8
Wiper base

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Wiper Unit
Rev.
6.2.4 Wiper Unit 1.0
4. Release the clamp under the station and disconnect the wiper
Wiper motor connector
motor connector.
5. Disconnect the wiper origin sensor connector.
Wiper origin sensor

1
6. When replacing only the motor, 2

1)Remove the motor gear. (set screw x1)
2)Remove the motor. (screw x2)
3
The clearance between the motor and base should be
0.5 mm when the motor is replaced.
Set screw
4
Motor
Motor gear

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Wiper Cleaner
Rev.
6.2.5 Wiper Cleaner 1.0
1
2
the ink.

3
 Work procedure
1. Remove the following covers. 4
2. Remove the Wiper cleaner Assy. (screw x2)

6
Attach as cleaning solution is spread over the entire
wiper. Recommend to install the left side slightly
lower.
7
NG OK

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Pump motor
Rev.
6.2.6 Pump motor 1.0
1
3042MkII 6042MkII
the ink.
3
4
 Work procedure

• Cover RH
2. Remove the Selective path pump Assy.(Refer to 6.2.7

5
Selective Path Pump)
6
3. Remove the connector.
4. Remove the Pump motor Assy.(x2, with screw x2)

Connector

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Pump motor
Rev.
6.2.6 Pump motor 1.0
5. “MP-M011578 Motor all assy 1”
Motor all assy 1

2

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Selective Path Pump
Rev.
6.2.7 Selective Path Pump 1.1
Selective Path Pump Assy. x2
Pump 2
Pump 1
1
In case of 3 head model Pump1: Single port / Pump2: 2 ports
In case of 4 head model Pump1: 2 ports / Pump2: 2 ports
 Turn the main power OFF when turning the power OFF. It is very dangerous if the sleep mode func-
tions mistakenly during the operation.
2
 Be sure to wear protective glasses and working gloves during the operation.
touch the ink.

3
4
 Work procedure
• Cover RH
Front side
2. Remove the tubes from the Caps(x3:3042MkII,x4:6042MkII),
remove the Fitting connected to the pump tube.
5
Step motor Pump base (3 head model: x3, 4 head model: x4)
6
3. Remove the pump tube connected to the waste ink tank.(x2)
7
4. Remove the connector.
8
Waste ink tank side x2

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Selective Path Pump
Rev.
6.2.7 Selective Path Pump 1.1
5. Remove the Selective path pump Assy. (x2, with screw x2)
1
Do not install the ink tube in the wrong position.

●In case of 3 head model
2
To cap 3
(front)
To cap 4 (back)
To cap 2 (back)
To waste ink tank
5
●In case of 4 head model
To cap 3 To cap 4 (back)

(front)
7
To cap 2 (back)
8
To waste ink tank
To cap 1
(front)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Circulation Pump
Rev.
6.2.8 Circulation Pump 1.1
Be sure to wear protective glasses and working gloves during the operation. 2
the ink.

 Take care not to pollute the surroundings with waste ink or washing liquid. 3
 Work procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST]-[HEAD WASH] -[DISCHARGE].
#HEAD WASH
DISCHARGE
WASH
2. Select the white ink head, and press [ENTER]. 4
The white ink is discharged.
#HEAD WASH Refer to 4.2.9 Head Wash for details on the discharge process.
HEAD [______WW]
White ink discharge

5
6
• Cartridge rear cover H
• Cover LH
• Bottle rear cover
No.7 tank bottom path

5. Remove the fitting (x8) and the tube (x8).
No.7 sub-tank
7
No.8 tank bottom path
No.8 sub-tank
No.7 tank
circulation port
8
No.8 valve
No.6 valve
No.8 tank circulation port

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Circulation Pump
Rev.
6.2.8 Circulation Pump 1.1
6. Remove the circulation pump base and circulation pump gear

together with the pump sheet metal.(screw x2 each)
1
8. As non-filling state remains after attachment, the Initial Filling

or filling of corresponding head is required.
2
(Refer to 9.1.1 Initial charging of Ink)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Ink Filter
Rev.
6.2.9 Ink Filter 1.2
3 head model: x6
4 head model: x8
Ink may get into your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you touch 2
the ink.

3
 Work procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST]-[HEAD WASH] -[DISCHARGE].
2. Turn OFF the main power supply. 4

5
4. Remove the aluminum foil.
Keep the aluminum foil to reuse it.

(The foil acts as a shield.)
5. Remove the fitting(x2 for each).

6

Rev.
6. Push the hooks under the filter BKT, and remove the filter.

3
Attaching in a direction rear side is higher
rear front 4
8. As non-filling state remains after attachment, the Initial Filling 5

or filling of corresponding head is required.
(Refer to 9.1.1 Initial charging of Ink)
 Air-bleeding method 6
1. Select [#ADJUST] - [Sub Tank]
#ADJUST >
7
Sub Tank >
2. Select [FILL UP INK].

FILL UP INK > [] / []: Select
8
[ENTER]: Fix
Ink Discharge

Rev.
3. Select the head for ink fillup.

FILL UP INK [] [] [] []: Select the head
HEAD [cm______]
[ENTER]: Fix
FILL UP INK 4. Press the [ENTER] key to start the filling.
PLEASE WAIT
5. End of Work (to Cleaning)
CLEANING
**************** 1

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts > Hot Water Pump
Rev.
6.2.10 Hot Water Pump 1.0
1
2
the ink.

2. Drain the hot water (Refer to 4.3.3 Drain the Hot Water•Filling 4
Hot Water”Drain the hot water”)
5
4. Disconnect the relay connector.
5. Disconnect the Coupler of a tube(x1)

Coupler Disconnect the fitting(x1).
6
Hot water pump
Fitting

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts > Hot Water Pump
Rev.
6.2.10 Hot Water Pump 1.0
6. Remove the Pump BKT.(Screwx2)
1
7. Remove the hot water pump.

• The tube is reused.
4
Refill the hot water tube with hot water after
installation.(Refer to 4.3.3 Drain the Hot
Water•Filling Hot Water”Filling hot water”)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Air Pressure Pump
Rev.
6.2.11 Air Pressure Pump 1.0
2
the ink. 3
4
 Work procedure
5
2. Remove the air tube(x2).

3. Remove the air pump base.(screwx2)
Be careful not to drop the air pump base.

6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Bottle Tank Assy
Rev.
6.2.12 Bottle Tank Assy 1.0
the ink. 2
3
 Work procedure
1. Remove the bottle.
4
2. Execute [#ADJUST]-[HEAD WASH] -[DISCHARGE] to
discharge the ink.(Refer to 4.2.9 Head Wash” Discharge”)
5
6
• Bottle Top Cover
• Bottle Cover R
• Bottle Cover L
5. Remove the tube.

• Parts other than the cycle route: tube (2 spots marked with red
7
circles, 1 spot marked with a green circle)
• Cycle route: tube (2 spots marked with red circles) + fitting (1 spot
marked with a blue circle)
Make sure that the ink does not leak during work.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Bottle Tank Assy
Rev.
6.2.12 Bottle Tank Assy 1.0
6. Remove the tank Assy.(screwx3)
Remove the entire tank BTK from the base, as you

may not be able to access the screws on some of the
tanks.(screwx3)
1
Tank BKT
2
7. Remove the liquid level detection sensor Assy.
Liquid level
detection sensor
Assy
5
Replace the tube you have removed from the tank

Assy, or cut the tip of the tube.
6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Cartridge Valve
Rev.
6.2.13 Cartridge Valve 1.1
1
the ink. 2
3
 Work procedure

discharge the ink. (Refer to 4.2.9 Head Wash” Discharge”)

• Bottle Top Cover
to connector 4. Remove the cable connector. 5
5. Push the hook to remove the ink valve.

7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Cartridge Valve
Rev.
6.2.13 Cartridge Valve 1.1
6. Disconnect tube (x2) with the fitting.
Take care not to contaminate the surroundings with

ink.

1
Take care not to lose the F seal rubber.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Check Valve
Rev.
6.2.14 Check Valve 1.0
1
the ink. 2
 Work procedure
3
discharge the ink. (Refer to 4.2.9 Head Wash” Discharge”)

• Bottle top cover
4
• Bottle cover R
• Bottle cover L
3. Remove the tube(x1) on the check valve underside.
4. Remove the check valve.(screwx2) 5

If you cannot access the check valve or tube, remove
Screw the entire tank BKT. (screwx3)
Check valve
Tube 6
7
Tank BKT
5. Remove the check valve. (screwx1)
6. Connect the tube removed in the Step.4 with a new valve.
7. Install the check valve.(screwx1)

8
8. Connect the tube (x1) to the underside of the check valve.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Check Valve
Rev.
6.2.14 Check Valve 1.0
 When connecting a tube, cut the tube that was con-

nected with the old valve by about 5mm.As the end
of the tube is spread, it may cause disconnection or
leakage.
 If the tube is short, replace it.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Mist Filter 1
Rev.
6.2.15 Mist Filter 1 1.0
1
2
the ink.

3
4
 Work procedure

2. Pull the mist suction inlet to the front while pulling the duct
Duct guide
5
guide hook upwards.
 After replacing the mist filter 1, place the mist suc-

tion inlet in its original position by turning the side
with the opening to the right, placing the inlet onto
1 the rail, and inserting it.
6
2
Mist suction inlet
7
Opening in the mist suction inlet
8
Mist filter1

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Mist Filter 2
Rev.
6.2.16 Mist Filter 2 1.0
2
3
the ink.

 Work procedure
4
2. Keep the hook(x1) on the mist filter box pressed downwards,
and pull the element to the front.
5
1
Mist filter BOX

6
2
8
Mist filter

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System

6.1 6.2 6.3 6
6.4 6.5 6.6
7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > X-axis Motor
Rev.
6.3.1 X-axis Motor 1.1
2
Be sure to start the work after confirming the working process. (Refer to “3.2.1 Replacement of the X-
axis Motor”)
3
 Work procedure
4
2. Disconnect the connector of the X-axis motor Assy.

3. Remove the screw(x2) of the XM top BKT.
X top BKT
5
6
4. Loosen the nut(x1) and bolt(x1) of the belt adjustment BKT.
7
Belt adjustment BKT.
Nut
8
Bolt

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > X-axis Motor
Rev.
6.3.1 X-axis Motor 1.1
5. Remove the X motor BKT.(screwx2)
X motor BKT
1
X-axis motor Assy. 6. Remove the X-axis motor Assy from the belt adjustment
BKT.(screwx3)
Belt adjustment BKT 3

OK OK NG NG 7. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
4
 After the tightening, check the belt tension and
engagement by touching.
 The timing belt must be placed at the center of both
pulleys so as to be in perpendicular.
(to the right is acceptable)
5
 After assembled, adjust the belt tension.
(Specific tension: 60N•m)
Perpendicular The belt is The belt is Belt is
to the center to the right to the left slanted
between

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > X-drive Belt
Rev.
6.3.2 X-drive Belt 1.1
2
Be sure to start the work after confirming the working process.
3
 Work procedure
4
2. Remove the screw(x2) of the XM top BKT.

Tension of the X drive belt is released.
X drive belt
3. Remove the XM top BKT.(screwx2)

6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > X-drive Belt
Rev.
6.3.2 X-drive Belt 1.1
4. Remove the X-drive belt.
1
OK OK NG NG
2
3
between

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Y-axis Motor
Rev.
6.3.3 Y-axis Motor 1.1
2
Be sure to start the work after confirming the working process. (Refer to “3.2.2 Replacement of the Y-
axis Motor”
3
 Work procedure
4
• Cover RH
2. Loosen the screws for fixing the Y-axis motor belt tension, and
reduce the tension of the belt.
3. Remove the tension adjustment spring.
4. Remove the FG line. 5

FG line 5. Disconnect the connector(x2) of the Y-axis motor Assy.
tension adjustment spring
Y belt 6. Remove the Y belt.
7. Remove the Y-axis motor Assy.(screwx4)

6
Be careful not to drop the Y-axis motor Assy.
Y-axis motor Assy. 7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Y-axis Motor
Rev.
6.3.3 Y-axis Motor 1.1

OK
Horizontal in the middle
 For the belt, check the belt tension and engagement
OK by touching.
Horizontal but upper
 For the timing belt, place the belt at the center of
both pulleys so as to be in level.(The upper is also
NG
1
Shifted lower acceptable.)
NG  After attachment, rotate the pulley several times to

adapt the belt.
Slanting

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Y-drive Pulley
Rev.
6.3.4 Y-drive Pulley 1.0
2
 Work procedure

• Cover RH
3
2. Loosen the screws(x2) from the Y-SP plate on the left side of
the main body, and release the tension of the Y drive belt.
You can access a screw from hole of the cover LH. 4
3. Remove the D BKT U.(screwx2)

5
D BKT U
6
Do not remove the Y-drive belt from the slider.
4. Loosen the screws (x3) for fixing the Y-axis motor belt tension,
7
O ring and reduce the tension of the belt.
Y drive pulley
5. Remove the O-ring from the top of the Y-drive pulley, and then
8
remove the two belts to detach the Y-drive pulley.
Take care not to lose the O-ring.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Y-drive Pulley
Rev.
6.3.4 Y-drive Pulley 1.0

OK
Horizontal in the middle
Mount the Y-axis motor so that the belt is horizontal
OK and centered on the Y drive pulley (upper side is also
Horizontal but upper acceptable).
NG
1
Shifted lower  After the tightening, check the belt tension and
NG  The timing belt must be placed at the center of both
Slanting
pulleys so as to be in perpendicular.(to the right is
acceptable)
 Rotate the pulley several times to adapt the belt. 2

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Y-drive Belt
Rev.
6.3.5 Y-drive Belt 1.0
2
 Work procedure
3
1. Open the Front under cover T.

• Front cover U
• Carriage cover
3. Loosen the screws (x2) from the Y-SP plate on the left side of
4
You can access a screw from hole of the cover LH.
5
4. Remove the Y-drive pulley.(Refer to 6.3.4 Y-drive Pulley)
6
5. Remove the sub-tank(x4) from the head unit.(Refer to 6.2.1
Sub-tank)
You cannot access the belt holder if you do not

remove the sub-tank.

Rev.
6. Remove the belt holder from slider base.(screwx2)

Belt holder
Slider base
1
7. Slide out the connection point of the Y-drive belt, and remove
either the left or right Belt presser (screw x1) from the belt
holder, and remove the Y drive belt.
2
3
Belt holder
Belt presser
8. Stick together the ends of the old belt and the new belt using 5
rubber tape or the like, and make one revolution of the belt.
Old belt
New belt 9. Once the belt has made one revolution, remove the joining tape
Make one revolution of
the belt. and pass the belt through the rear side of the slider.
6
Tape
Engage the tooth of belt ends with

belt holder.
10. Align the Belt holder and the teeth on the left and right belt
ends, and attach the belt presser to the Belt holder while 7
engaging the teeth. Then tighten the screw.
Belt Holder 8
11. Attach the belt holder and slider using a screw.

Rev.
12. Tighten the screws on the Y-SP plate on the left side of the main
body, and increase the Y drive belt tension.
After assembled, adjust the belt tension.
13. Reverse the disassembly procedure for the subsequent

reassemblies.
1

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Linear Encoder Scale
Rev.
6.3.6 Linear Encoder Scale 1.0
Turn the main power OFF when turning the power OFF. It is very dangerous if sleep mode functions
2
While at work, be sure not to attach fingerprints or oil to the linear encoder scale. Also, pay attention not
to break or scratch it. (If contaminated, clean the scale with a neutral detergent.)
 Work procedures
3
4
• Front cover U
• Carriage cover
3. Loosen the screws(x2) from the Y-SP plate on the left side of
You can access a screw from hole of the cover LH. 5
6
4. Remove the screws from the right end of the linear encoder
Scale holder R scale, and detach the Scale holder R and Linear encoder scale.
7
Linear encoder scale

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Linear Encoder Scale
Rev.
6.3.6 Linear Encoder Scale 1.0
5. Remove the screw from the left end of the linear encoder scale,
Scale base L
and detach the Scale holder L and Linear encoder scale
Scale holder L together with the springs.(screwx2)
Spring
Linear encoder scale 1
6. Remove the Linear encoder scale (screw x1).
Scale holder L200
Spring 2
Linear encoder scale

3
Scale holder L
7. Peel off the left end (the side with short shape hole) of the
protection film on the new Linear encoder scale.
4
While at work, be sure not to attach fingerprints or oil
to the linear encoder scale. Also, pay attention not to
break or scratch it. (If contaminated, clean the scale
5
with a neutral detergent.)
8. Mount the Scale holder L on the Linear encoder scale so that

the surface where the protection film is stuck faces to the Y bar
side.
9. Engage the Scale holder L with the scale base L through a

spring, and mount the Linear encoder scale while peeling off
6
the protection film.
8
10. Reverse the disassembly procedure for the subsequent
reassemblies.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Z-axis Motor
Rev.
6.3.7 Z-axis Motor 1.1
Be sure to start the work after confirming the working process. (Refer to “3.2.3 Replacement of the Z-
axis Motor”)
2
 Work procedure
3
• Table rear cover R
• Table rear cover L
2. Move the table all the way to the back, and lift it to its highest
4
position.
4. Disconnect the Z-axis motor connector.
5
Z-drive belt
connector
6
5. Remove the screw(x3) of the Z motor BKT.
The Z-drive belt tension becomes loose.
6. Remove the Z-drive belt. 7

Z motor BKT

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Z-axis Motor
Rev.
6.3.7 Z-axis Motor 1.1
7. Remove the Z-axis motor Assy.(screwx2)
2

3
4
between

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Z-drive Belt
Rev.
6.3.8 Z-drive Belt 1.0

2
 Work procedure

3
2. Move the table to the rearmost, it raises to the uppermost
position.

4. Disconnect the Z-axis motor connector.
5. Remove the screw(x3) of the Z motor BKT.

The Z-drive belt tension becomes loose. 5
Z-drive belt 6. Remove the Z-drive belt.
6
Z motor BKT
Z-axis motor connector

7

8
between

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Z-drive Screw
Rev.
6.3.9 Z-drive Screw 1.0
2
3
 Work procedure
1. Remove the Table rear cover U.
4
2. Open the front cover.
3. Remove the adsorption connector panel from the lifting
lifting frame frame.(Screwx2)
4. Remove lifting frame cover.
Adsorption connector panel

7
5. Remove the Z motor reinforcing plate.(screwx4)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Z-drive Screw
Rev.
6.3.9 Z-drive Screw 1.0
6. Loosen the screw of the Z motor BKT.

Z motor BKT (Refer to 6.3.7 Z-axis Motor)
Remove the belt from the TN15-40 pulley.
TN15-40 pulley
1
Belt
Rear side
7. Remove the TN15-40 pulley from the Z-drive screw.

(Cap bolt x1)
2
3
8. Remove the Z bearing-BKT.(Screw x4)
6
Z bearing-BKT
Z-drive screw
9. Remove the Z-drive screw.

7
 Grease the thread part when attaching a new Z-

drive screw.
Grease used: [FLOIL]
8

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Drive System > Table
Rev.
6.3.10 Table 1.0
 Work procedure
2
1. Make a printer the next state.
1), Move the table all the way to the front.
2), Move the Carriage to the capping position.
3), Raise the Table to the highest position.
3
Lift straight up
4
4. Lift and remove the Table.
Since 6042MkII comes with a vacuum table, remove

the connectors before lifting the table.
Hold both sides of the Table and lift it straight up. If

not, the parts specified in the following figure may be
damaged.
5
Table Guide mechanism

6

7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts

6.1 6.2 6.3 6
6.4 6.5 6.6
7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > EPL3 Main PCB B COM FW Assy
Rev.
6.4.1 EPL3 Main PCB B COM FW Assy 1.1
1
 Outline
If EPL3 main PCB assy. has replaced, various parameters must be registered to EPL3 main PCB assy. ROM after the
replacement. Considerable time is required to readjust and reconfigure these settings. Therefore, for ease of use and 2
better printing quality, copy (upload) the setting value to a PC before replacement, and write (download) the copied
settings onto the EPL main PCB assy. from the PC after replacement.
3
If it is impossible to upload the parameters, conduct Parameter Draw to note the setting values. Then
manually register the values after replacing the EPL3 main PCB assy.
 Work procedure
After turning off the sub and main power switches, unplug the power cord. Make sure to take 15 minutes
before restarting the operation. It is very dangerous if sleep mode functions mistakenly during the 4
operation.
Moreover, the PCB may be damaged in case electric charge still remains inside.
Also, there is a possibility of electric shock because of high power voltage applied to the high-pressure
part of the power supply PCB assy. Take care to avoid contact with it.
A button type lithium battery is used for this board. Warn following 1)~4). 5
1), Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
2), Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacture.
Recommended type: [CR1220]
3), Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
4), When the battery is replaced with a new one, pay attention to the polarity at replacing.
6
1. Turn the main power OFF and pull the power plug out from the
main unit.
7
2. Remove the Electrical box cover.
3. Disconnect all connectors on PCB.
4. Remove the EPL3 Main PCB B COM FW Assy. (screw x6)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Station IV PCB Assy.
Rev.
6.4.2 Station IV PCB Assy. 1.1
1
 Work procedure
operation.
1. Turn the main power OFF and pull the power plug out from the
3
main unit.
2. Remove the Electrical box cover.

4. Remove the Station IV PCB Assy.(screw x6)
4
6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Slider T PCB Assy.
Rev.
6.4.3 Slider T PCB Assy. 1.1
 Work procedure
2
before restarting the operation. It is very dangerous if sleep mode functions mistakenly during the
operation.
3
Be sure to start the work after confirming the work procedure.
(Refer to “3.3.2 Replacement of the Slider T PCB Assy.”)
4
1. Turn the main power OFF.

• Y cover R
• Y cover L
• Slider PCB cover 5
4. Remove the Slider T PCB Assy.
screw: P3x8SMW x4
6
7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > 150LPI -encoder PCB Assy.
Rev.
6.4.4 150LPI -encoder PCB Assy. 1.0
1
 Work procedure
2
operation.
3
4
3. Remove the L-encoder sensor BKT.(screw x1)
5
6
4. Remove the 150LPI -encoder PCB Assy.(screw x2)
8
Adjust the encoder sensor position after

assembled.(Refer to 4.3.6 Encoder Sensor Position
Adjustment)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > UVLED Drive14 PCB Assy
Rev.
6.4.5 UVLED Drive14 PCB Assy 1.1
1
 Work procedure
operation.
Be sure to start the work after confirming the work procedure.(Refer to “3.5.2 Replacement of the
3
UVLED Drive14 PCB Assy.”)
1. Turn the main power OFF.

4
• Y cover R
• Y cover L
• Slider PCB cover
Rear side
4. Remove Drive PCB BOX.
5
Rear side: screw x3
Front side
Front side: screw x2
7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > UVLED Drive14 PCB Assy
Rev.
6.4.5 UVLED Drive14 PCB Assy 1.1
5. Remove the UVLED Drive14 PCB Assy.(screw x4)

2

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > ID Contact PCB
Rev.
6.4.6 ID Contact PCB 1.0
1
 Work procedure
2
 Be sure to start the work after confirming the work procedure.(Refer to “3.3.3 Replacement of the ID
Contact PCB”) 3
 Take care not to pollute the surroundings with waste ink or washing liquid.

• Bottle front cover 4
2. Remove the ID contact PCB socket.(screw x1)
The back of the “bottle front cover”
6
3. Remove the ID contact PCB Assy by releasing the stopper(x2).
8
After attachment, fill the ink.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > CART IO PCB Assy.
Rev.
1
 Work procedure
3
 Take care not to pollute the surroundings with waste ink or washing liquid.

• Bottle front cover
4
3. Remove the CART IO PCB Assy.(screw x3)
CART IO PCB Assy.

5
Be careful not to squeeze the harness when you close

the bottle front cover. 6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Color LCD SL PCB Assy.
Rev.
1
 Work procedure
2
operation.
3

• KB side cover R
• KB side cover L
2. Remove the Keyboard cover.(screw x4)
5
3. Disconnect the FFC from the Key Board PCB.
6
 When the FFC is connected, be sure not to mistake
the frond and back.
 Do not connect it at an angle.
Lower side
7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Color LCD SL PCB Assy.
Rev.
4. Remove the Keyboard BKT.(screw x4)
1
5. Remove the Keyboard PCB Assy.(screw x6)
3
 Make sure that the Key Tops are oriented properly

and the contacts are free from fatigue. 4
 Make sure that the LCD surface and the inside of
the LCD of the nameplate are free from scratches,
dust and dirt or fingerprints.
 Tighten the screws in the order shown. After
assembly, press every button and make sure that a 5
click is felt.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > AC PCB Assy.
Rev.
6.4.9 AC PCB Assy. 1.0
1
 Work procedure
After turning off the sub and main power switches, unplug the power cord. Make sure to take 15 minutes 2
operation.
3
4
• Front under cover L
• Maintenance under cover L
• Maintenance cover L
2. Remove the AC PCB Assy.(screw x4)
5
6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Negative Pressure Sensor 73 PCB
Rev.
6.4.10 Negative Pressure Sensor 73 PCB Assy. 1.1
1
 Work procedure
2
operation.
3

• Y cover R
• Y cover L
2. Remove the negative pressure sensor 73 PCB Assy.(screw x1)
4
4. Remove the air tube. 6


MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Electrical Parts > Positive Pressure Sensor PCB Assy.
Rev.
6.4.11 Positive Pressure Sensor PCB Assy. 1.1
1
 Work procedure
2
operation.
3

• Y cover R
• Y cover L
2. Remove the positive pressure sensor PCB Assy.(screw x1)
4
4. Remove the air tube. 6


MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors

6.1 6.2 6.3 6
6.4 6.5 6.6
7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Sensor Layout
Rev.
6.5.1 Sensor Layout 1.1
 Printer front
Magnetic sensor for liquid level 3 point detection

(3 head model: x6, 4 head model: x8)
1
Front cover sensor
Maintenance
cover sensor 2
Back of the cover
3
Maintenance
cover sensor
Photo sensor (Z-origin)
Back of the cover
4
 Printer rear
Photo sensor (X-origin)

X displacement sensor
8

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Sensor Layout
Rev.
6.5.1 Sensor Layout 1.1
 Carriage
Positive pressure sensor

Negative pressure sensor
Photo sensor (Y origin)

1
Y displacement sensor
2
Linear encoder sensor
Magnetic sensor for liquid level 3 point detection
(3 head model: x6, 4 head model: x8)
3
Selective path pump sensor
Selective path pump sensor
4
(4 head model only)
Obstacle sensor
Wiper origin sensor

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Photo Sensor (X-origin)
Rev.
6.5.2 Photo Sensor (X-origin) 1.0
2
 Work procedure
3
• Table rear cover L
• Table rear cover R 4
2. Remove the origin sensor BKT-X.(screw x2)
3. Disconnect the connector.

5
Origin sensor BKT-X 6

4. Remove the photo sensor and the X displacement sensor.(screw
x1)
7
Photo sensor X displacement sensor

8

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Photo Sensor (Y-origin)
Rev.
6.5.3 Photo Sensor (Y-origin) 1.0
2
 Work procedure
3
• Y cover R
2. Move the carriage to the center.

3. Remove the origin sensor BKT.(screw x2)
4
Photo sensor
5
5. Remove the photo sensor.
Origin sensor BKT

6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Y Displacement Sensor
Rev.
6.5.4 Y Displacement Sensor 1.0
2
 Work procedure
3
• Y cover R
4
2. Remove the Y displacement sensor BKT.(screw x1)
Y displacement sensor
5
Y displacement
sensor BKT
6
4. Remove the Y displacement sensor.(screw x1, stopper x2)
8

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Photo Sensor (Z-origin)
Rev.
6.5.5 Photo Sensor (Z-origin) 1.0
2
 Work procedure
3
2. Remove the table. (Refer to 6.3.10 Table)

elevation frame
3. Remove the elevation frame. 4

6
5. Remove the photo sensor.
Photo sensor
8

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Obstacle Sensor
Rev.
Reflector Obstacle sensor

Reflector
Obstacle sensor 1
2
 Work procedure
3
• Cover RH
 Obstacle sensor
• Side cover R
• Side cover UR 4
2. Release cable fixing.
Area sensor BKTR
4. Remove the area sensor BKTR.(screw x3)

5
5. Remove the obstacle sensor from the obstacle sensor

BKT.(fixing screw x3)
7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Obstacle Sensor
Rev.
 Reflector
6. Remove the reflector. (screw x2)

2
After assembling, be sure to adjust the light axis.
Refer to “4.3.7 Adjustment of the optical-axis of
3
the obstacle sensors”

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Maintenance Cover Sensor
Rev.
6.5.7 Maintenance Cover Sensor 1.0
Front under cover TL Front under cover T
2
 Work procedure
3
4
Same way at right and left
2. Loosen the screw(x1).
Remove the maintenance cover sensor BKT from the front
under cover T.
6
Same way at right and left
3. Disconnect the sensor.
4. Remove the fixing screw (x2).
7
Confirm that the sensor reacts after you turn the

power on.
8

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > NCU Assy.(Nozzle missing dot detect unit)
Rev.
6.5.8 NCU Assy.(Nozzle missing dot detect unit) 1.0
NCU (Nozzle missing dot detect unit) is an option for UJF-3042MkII.
2
3
 Work procedure
4
2. Move slowly the carriage onto the table by hand.
4. Remove the NCU waste tray. (take off a hook, stopper x4).
5
NCU pad
6
NCU waste tray
5. Remove screws (x2) on the NCU frame, and then remove the 7
NCU Assy.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > NCU Assy.(Nozzle missing dot detect unit)
Rev.
6.5.8 NCU Assy.(Nozzle missing dot detect unit) 1.0

Press against the adjustment screw and affix.
1
Adjustment screw

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts

6.1 6.2 6.3 6
6.4 6.5 6.6
7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts > LED-UV Unit
Rev.
2
3
the ink.


• Y cover R 5
• Y cover L
3. Remove the slider T PCB cover.
Slider T PCB cover
6
front rear 4. Move the carriage onto the table by hand.
rear front
7
5. Remove the connector (Left figure: red frame x3) and the
front rear
junction connector (Left figure: blue frame x2) from the
8
UVLED Drive14 PCB
UVLED Drive14 PCB.
Open the cable clamp to help take out the tube.
6. Move the carriage to the original location.
7. Pull the harness on the LED-UV unit to the front.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts > LED-UV Unit
Rev.
8. Pull all the harnesses to the front.
9. Remove the LED-UV unit with the LED side plate.(screwx2)
 Remove the upper screws first, and then remove

the lower screws.
 A note regarding the lower screws
Remove the screws by inserting the screwdriver 1
between the LED-UV unit and mist suction duct as
illustrated in the figure below.
(Be careful not to drop the screws.)
2
 Hold the LED-UV unit and mist suction duct, keep
them in the position illustrated in the figure below,
and pull them out.
(Be careful not to drop the screws.)
LED-UV unit
3
Mist suction duct
Screwdriver
4
During assembly, tighten the screws (x2)
temporarily, and carry out “LED-UV Height
5
Adjustment”.(Refer to 4.3.2 LED-UV Height
Adjustment)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions
Troubleshooting
7.1 7.2
7
Details on Errors and Malfunctions Detailed Methods of Coping with
the Malfunctions

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > Concerning Errors and Malfunctions
Rev.
7.1.1 Concerning Errors and Malfunctions 1.0
 Outline
This chapter describes the troubleshooting for UJF-30_6042MkII.
 Rough Identification of the Source of the Trouble

At the beginning of troubleshooting, it is necessary to identify roughly which functions the trouble relates to.
1
Problems can be roughly classified into those that relate to the printer itself and those that involve the connection
between the printer and the host computer.
 Problems with the printer itself

The cause of the trouble can be identified by executing appropriate functions or using test functions.
 Problems concerning the connection to the host computer
2
Hardware: Broken wire or faulty contact of cables
Software: Transmission by improper application setting
In the standard setting of UJF-30_6042MkII, priority is given to the host computer.

Check the settings on the host computer to see if there is any improper parameter setting.
3
START
Precautions in maintenance
4
Is there error message? Yes Refer to 7.1.2 List of Error Messages
5
No
Trouble due Yes Refer to 7.2 Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions
to the print quality? (Add information sequentially)
No
6
Rough identification of error source
Execute appropriate functions or use test func-
tions of UJF-30_6042MkII
Do the
7
above functions operate No
normally?
Yes
Troubles on the host computer side

If this troubleshooting cannot correct the trouble, check to see if the same trouble occurs with another
host computer (if possible).
8

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > Concerning Errors and
Rev.
7.1.1 Concerning Errors and Malfunctions 1.0
 Checking Procedure
This section describes troubleshooting procedures for the problems for which error messages are displayed.
1. Identifying the error category
The causes of errors can be classified into the following categories:
 Handling error on the host computer side

1
 Trouble on the host computer side
 Trouble with the Interface Cable
2
 Printer handling error
 Printer mechanical trouble
 Printer hardware trouble
 Printer firmware trouble
2. Initial action
3
Refer to the error message, and judge whether the trouble lies on the host computer side or on the printer side.
 Has any of the interface conditions (printer model setting, command, communication conditions, etc.) been
changed? 4
 Does the trouble occur under specific conditions?
 Does the same trouble occur repeatedly?
3. Failure on the printer side

5
Take the following steps to repair the printer.
6
 Uploading and checking of parameters
 Reinstalling of firmware
 Checking of FFC and cable connections
 Replace the defective part (sensor, etc.) or make the necessary adjustment.
 Replace the PCBs. 7

4. Repair at the factory
If the error recurs even after the corrective measures specified here are taken, return the printer to the factory of
MIMAKI for repair.
8

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Error Messages
Rev.
7.1.2 List of Error Messages 1.2
 List of Error Messages （1/8）

No. LCD Cause List of Countermeasures
1 ERROR 108 Head connection can not be confirmed. 1. Check FFC connection between the Slider T PCB
HD CONNECT[1234] and the head which is displayed error.
2 ERROR 108 Head temperature is less than -10°C or 80°C 2. Replace the Slider T PCB with a new one.
HD THERMIS[1234] or more. (Refer to 3.3.2)
1
3. Replace the print head with a new one.
(Refer to 3.1.1)
3 ERROR 122 FW update failed or error occurs in SDRAM 1. Update F/W. (Refer to 8.1.2)
CHECK:SDRAM of main PCB. 2. Replace the EPL3 main PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.1)
4 ERROR 128 Abnormality comes into communication 1. Update F/W. (Refer to 8.1.2)
2
HDC FIFO OVER between the EPL3 main PCB and Slider T 2. Check cable connection between the EPL3 main
PCB. PCB (CN104/CN105) and the Slider T PCB
5 ERROR 128 Abnormality comes into communication (CN1/CN3).
HDC FIFO UNDER between the EPL3 main PCB and Slider T 3. Replace the EPL3 main PCB with a new one.
PCB (Refer to 3.3.1)
4. Replace the Slider T PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
3
5. Replace the Y-axis Motor with a new one.
(Refer to 3.2.2)
6 ERROR 129 Battery on the main PCB dead. 1. Replace a battery equipped on the EPL3 main
BATTERY EXCHANGE PCB with new one. (CR1220)
• The new battery should be the same product or
the equivalent.
• Discard the old battery according to the
instruction from the maker.
2. If the problem persists after replacement the
battery, replace the EPL3 main PCB.
4
(Refer to 3.3.1)
7 ERROR 12a Detected an abnormality of ink ejection trig- 1. Check that the scan parameter is the default value.
HDC SPEED ger. 2. Update F/W. (Refer to 8.1.2)
5
Discharge trigger is detected at a rate that 3. Conduct a linear encoder test.
exceeds the period of the discharge waveform. 4. Check if there is dirt or scratch on the linear scale.
5. Replace the liner encoder sensor with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.4)
6. Replace the liner encoder scale with a new one.
(Refer to 6.3.6)
6
7. Replace the encoder PCB with anew one.
(Refer to 6.4.4)
(Refer to 3.3.2)
8 ERROR 130 Abnormality comes into communication 1. Update F/W. (Refer to 8.1.2)
HD DATA SEQ between the EPL3 main PCB and Slider T 2. Check cable connection between the EPL3 main
PCB. PCB (CN104/CN105) and the Slider P PCB
(CN1/CN3).
3. Replace the EPL3 main PCB with a new one. 7
(Refer to 3.3.1)
(Refer to 3.3.2)
8
(Refer to 3.2.2)
9 ERROR 148 Abnormality occurs in the log control. 1. Initialize event log.
E-LOG SEQ ([#TEST] - [EVENT LOG] - [DATA CLEAR]
key - [ENTER] key)
2. Replace the EPL3 main PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.1)

Rev.

10 ERROR 151 EPL3 main PCB 1.2V power supply is 1. Check the output voltage of the LFA15F-5-J1/
Main PCB V1R2 abnormal. ZWS15B-5 (+4.9V~5.3V).
11 ERROR 152 EPL3 main PCB 2.5V power supply is 2. Replace the power supply above, when the output
Main PCB V2R5 abnormal. voltage is abnormal.
12 EPL3 main PCB 3.3V power supply is 3. Replace the EPL3 main PCB with a new one.
1
ERROR 153
Main PCB V3R3 abnormal. (Refer to 3.3.1)
13 ERROR 154 EPL3 main PCB 5V power supply is
Main PCB V05 abnormal.
14 ERROR 157 EPL3 main PCB VTT power supply is
Main PCB VTT abnormal.
15 ERROR 16e EPL3 main PCB 3.3VB power supply is
2
Main PCB V3R3B abnormal.
16 ERROR 18a EPL3 main PCB V_CORE power supply is
Main PCB V_CORE abnormal.
17 ERROR 18c EPL3 main PCB 12V power supply is 1. Check the output voltage of the RWS600B-48/R
Main PCB V12 abnormal. EHFP (+47V~+49V), LFA15F-5-J1/ZWS 15B-5
(from +4.9V to 5.3V).
3
2. Replace the power supply above, when the output
voltage is abnormal.
(Refer to 3.3.1)
18 ERROR 1ce Slider P PCB 24V power supply is abnormal. 1. Check the output voltage of the RWS600B-48/R
SLIDER PCB V24 EHFP (+47V~+49V).
19 ERROR 1cf Slider P PCB 1.8V power supply is abnormal. 2. Replace the power supply above, when the output
SLIDER PCB V1R8 voltage is abnormal.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
4
20 ERROR 1d9 EPL3 PCB 48V power supply is abnormal. 1. Check the output voltage of the RWS600B-48/R
Main PCB V48-1 EHFP (+47V~+49V), LFA15F-5-J1/ZWS 15B-5
(from +4.9V to 5.3V).
5
2. Replace the power supply above, when the output
voltage is abnormal.
(Refer to 3.3.1)
21 ERROR 1db Station IV PCB 48V power supply is 1. Check the output voltage of the RWS600B-48/R
Station4 PCB V48 abnormal. EHFP (+47V~+49V).
6
22 ERROR 1dc Station IV PCB 24V power supply is 2. Replace the power supply above, when the output
Station4 PCB V24 abnormal. voltage is abnormal.
23 ERROR 1dd Station IV PCB 24-AdjV power supply is 3. Replace the Station IV PCB with a new one.
Station4 PCB abnormal. (Refer to 6.4.2)
V24-A
24 ERROR 1de Slider T PCB 1.2V power supply is abnormal. 1. Check the output voltage of the RWS600B-48/R
SLIDER PCB V1R2 EHFP (+47V~+49V).
7
25 ERROR 1e0 Slider T PCB 3.3V power supply is abnormal. 2. Replace the power supply above, when the output
SLIDER PCB V3R3 voltage is abnormal.
26 ERROR 1e2 Slider T PCB 48V power supply is abnormal. 3. Replace the Slider T PCB with a new one.
SLIDER PCB V48 (Refer to 3.3.2)
27 ERROR 1e6 DDRII PRAM PCB cannot be detected. 1. Check the connection of the DDRII PRAM PCB.
PRAM SIZE 2. Replace the DDRII PRAM PCB with a new one.
8
SHORTAGE
(Refer to 3.3.1)
28 ERROR 201 Command error 1. Check if the output set of the PC matches the set
COMMAND ERROR Other data than commands is received of the machine side.
29 ERROR 202 Parameter error 2. Change the profile.
PARAMETER ERROR Parameter out of the numeral value range is 3. Check if there is no trouble on the USB Cable.
received 4. Replace the USB Cable.
(Refer to 3.3.1)

Rev.

30 ERROR 203 Maintenance command 1. Check the PRM file.
Ment Command Operation of a maintenance command fails 2. Check the number of each parameter.
(if PRM matches up to the machine.)
31 ERROR 206 Received the print data of non-printable 1. Check the print data output conditions of the RIP
PRINTING MODE conditions software.
2. Change the profile.
3. Check if there is no parameter error. 1
4. Check if there is no trouble on the USB Cable.
5. Replace the USB Cable.
(Refer to 3.3.1)
32 ERROR 304
USB INIT ERR
USB initialization error
(Failures in initializing USB device)
1. Check if there is no parameter error.
2. Check if there is no trouble on the USB Cable. 2
33 ERROR 305 USB time-out 3. Replace the USB Cable.
USB TIME OUT (Occurrence of time-out error on USB device) 4. Replace the EPL3 main PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.1)
34 ERROR 401 X Servo error 1. Update F/W.(Refer to 8.1.2)
35
MOTOR X
ERROR 403
X CURRENT
(Excessive load to the X-motor)
X-motor current
(Over current error of X-motor is detected.)
2. Check if there is no trouble on the X motor belt.
3. Check if there is no trouble on the CN14 and 3
CN15 of the EPL3 main PCB, and Motor Cable.
(disconnecting, burnout, or the like)
4. Replace the X-axis Motor with a new one.
(Refer to 3.2.1)
4
(Refer to 3.3.1)
36 ERROR 402 Y Servo error 1. Update F/W. (Refer to 8.1.2)
MOTOR Y (Excessive load to the Y-motor) 2. In the power turned OFF state, make sure it works
37 ERROR 404 Y-motor current smoothly in the Y direction.
Y CURRENT (Over current error of Y-motor is detected.) 3. Check if there is no trouble on the timing belt.
5
4. Check if there is no trouble on the CN14 and
CN15 of the EPL3 main PCB, and Motor Cable.
(disconnecting, burnout, or the like)
(Refer to 3.2.2)
(Refer to 3.3.1)
38 ERROR 50a
Y ORIGIN
Y-origin error 1. Execute and confirm [#TEST] - [SENSOR]
-[Y-ORIGIN].(Confirm that the ON/OFF display
is switched by moving the carriage left and right.)
6
2. Check if there is no trouble on the connection of
Y-origin Sensor. (disconnecting, burnout, or the
like)
7
3. Replace the Y-origin Sensor with a new one.
(Refer to 6.5.3)
(Refer to 3.3.1)

Rev.

39 ERROR 50f Liner Scale error 1. Execute and confirm [# TEST] - [CHECK
L-SCALE BLACK ENCODER]. (Confirm that a value of the scale
encoder (E) changes)
2. Check the mounting position of the Linear
encoder scale and 150 LPI Encoder PCB.
3. Make sure to mount linear encoder scale and no
such as dirt and scratches.
4. Check cable connection between the EPL3 main
1
PCB (CN101)and the Slider P PCB(CN1).
5. Check cable connection between the EPL3 main
PCB (CN16)and the Station IV PCB(CN5).
2
6. Replace the Linear encoder Scale with a new one.
(Refer to 6.3.6)
7. Replace the 150 LPI Encoder PCB with a new
one. (Refer to 6.4.4)
40 ERROR 525 The internal circuit of ionizer may be broken Replace the Ionizer with a new one.
WRONG IONIZER or abnormal discharge may occur.
3
41 ERROR 526 Due to blot on the electrode probe and wear of Cleanup the electrode probe following the instruction
IONIZER ION it, ion production has decreased. manual for the ionizer.
LEVEL  When removing static electricity, turn off the main
power switch on the main body, and exercise
caution.
If the status cannot be improved, replace the relevant
electrode probe.
42 ERROR 527
IONIZER
CONDITION
When an ion is absorbed by peripheral metals, Confirm whether there is not a conductor or other neu-
the instability of the installed environment tralization apparatus near the ionizer. 4
(temperature, humidity, peripheral metals, etc) If there is some, keep it away from them.
affects the performance to remove electricity.
43 ERROR 541 Pump sensor detection error 1. Execute [#TEST] - [SENSOR] - [PUMP
VACUUM PUMP MOTOR].
5
ORIGIN • (Press the SEL key and make sure that the
pump path switch works properly and the
sensor ON/OFF is responsive.)
2. Replace the pump sensor with a new one.
3. Replace the selective path pump Assy. with a new
one. (Refer to 6.2.7)
4. Replace the Station IV PCB with a new one.
44 ERROR 602 Ink end

(Refer to 6.4.2)
(When the message is still displayed even after a new 6
INK BOTTLE END (Non of printing, ink use-up cleaning is only Ink bottle or an empty Ink bottle is charged;)
allowed.) 1. Carry out [#TEST] - [CARTRIDGE SENSOR]
and check the state of the near end sensor.
(The number correspond to the cartridge
7
number.)
2. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between
the Station IV PCB(CN5) and the CART IO
PCB(CN2).
3. Check the peripheral and the installation of near
end sensor.
4. Check the connection and installation of the ID
contact PCB and Detector Assy, I/C, Y.
5. Replace the Cartridge. 8
6. Replace the ID contact PCB and Detector Assy.
with new one. (Refer to 3.3.3)
7. Replace the CART IO PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.7)
(Refer to 6.4.2)

Rev.

45 ERROR 608 IC chip of Ink bottle unreadable property. 1. Check the attached status of the chip.
WRONG INK IC 2. Perform [#TEST] - [CHECK INK IC].
PCB(CN2).
4. Replace the ID contact PCB with new one.
(Refer to 3.3.3) 1
(Refer to 6.4.7)
(Refer to 6.4.2)
2
46 ERROR 61A The sub-tank float sensor detected “Limit”. 1. Execute [MAINTENANCE] - [Overflow
InkOverflow:cmYC maintenance].
MKWW 2. Replace the Sub-tank if it can not be reintegrated.
(Refer to 6.2.1)
47 ERROR 61B Ink supply to the sub-tank failed. 1. Check if the ink route couplings are loose.
SUPPLY 2. Check the ink supply valve and tank.
3
INK:cmYCMKWW
3. Replace the ink supply valve and tank.
48 ERROR 61D The negative pressure cannot be kept properly. 1. Go to [#TEST] - [Air Pressure Check] - [Negative
NEGATIVE (On the positive side) Pressure] to check if a pressure of -2.3kPa is
P.NotEnough maintained.
49 ERROR 61E The negative pressure cannot be kept properly. 2. Check if there is no trouble on the negative
NEGATIVE P.OVER (On the negative side) pressure sensor and harness.
4
3. Check if there is no trouble on the 3 way air
valve.
4. Check the air pressure route for leaks.
5. Check if there is no trouble on the pressure pump.
50 ERROR 620 The positive pressure cannot be kept properly. 1. Go to [#TEST] - [Air Pressure Check] - [Positive
POSITIVE (On the negative side) Pressure] to check if a pressure of 17.5kPa is
P.NotEnough maintained.
51 ERROR 621
POSITIVE P.OVER
The positive pressure cannot be kept properly.
(On the positive side)
2. Adjust the slot valve to 17.7kPa.
3. Check if there is no trouble on the positive 5
pressure sensor and harness.
valve.
6
52 ERROR 650 NCU Assy. is not connected to the NCU unit. 1. Check the cable connection between the
NCU CONECT PD_AMP PCB Assy.(CN1) and Station IV PCB
(CN14).
2. Replace the NCU Assy. with new one.
(Refer to 6.5.8)
7
(Refer to 6.4.2)
53 ERROR 651 Due to the deterioration contamination, or At test drawing, if occurs even in the absence of
REPLACE NCU blemish of the light source LED, the light missing nozzles
intensity was declined and became an inopera- 1. Clean the left and right internal walls of the NCU
ble level. Assy detection slits with a cotton-tipped swab.
It occurs if the result of executing [#TEST] - 2. Check the cable connection between the
[NCU] - [SENSOR CHK] is under [100]. PD_AMP PCB Assy.(CN1) and Station IV
PCB(CN14).
8
(Refer to 6.5.8)
(Refer to 6.4.2)

Rev.

54 ERROR 652 H/W can not sample the Ink ejection pattern of At test drawing, if occurs even in the absence of
NCU NZK CHK (HW) the NCU unit. missing nozzles
Many nozzle missing or trajectories have 1. Check the cable connection between the
occurred. PD_AMP PCB Assy.(CN1) and Station IV PCB
55 Ink ejection pattern of the NCU unit is ana- (CN14).
1
ERROR 653
NCU NZK CHK lyzed, and then recognized abnormal ink ejec- 2. Replace the NCU Assy. with new one.
(MARK) tion which not reach criteria of the pattern. (Refer to 6.5.8)
The normal determination can not be made by 3. Replace the Station IV PCB with a new one.
Many nozzle missing or trajectories. (Refer to 6.4.2)
56 ERROR 654 Detection of central position of the NCU unit
NCU CENTER POS fails.
The normal determination can not be made by
Many nozzle missing or trajectories. 2
57 ERROR 655 Detection of optimum position for the sensor
NCU FLUSH POS of the NCU unit fails.
Many nozzle missing or trajectories.
58 Light quantity adjustment to get optimum sen-
3
ERROR 656
NCU SN ADJUST sitivity fails.
1. The normal determination can not be
made by Many nozzle missing or
trajectories.
2. Light quantity decreases because
4
deterioration of the source of light LED,
dirt and wound.
59 ERROR 657 Waste ink absorber of NCU is full. 1. Replace the waste ink absorber of NCU unit with
Check NCU waste new one.
ink
60 ERROR 658 Due to the deterioration contamination, or At test drawing, if occurs even in the absence of
NCU SENSOR LEVEL blemish of the light source LED, the light missing nozzles
5
LOW intensity was declined.Not the non-usable 1. Clean the left and right internal walls of the NCU
level.Itoccurs if the result of executing Assy detection slits with a cotton-tipped swab.
[#TEST] - [NCU] - [SENSOR CHK] is under 2. Check the cable connection between the
[110]. PD_AMP PCB Assy.(CN1) and Station IV PCB
1. The normal determination can not be (CN13).
made by Many nozzle missing or 3. Replace the NCU unit with new one.
trajectories. (Refer to 6.5.8)
(Refer to 6.4.2) 6
dirt and wound.
61 ERROR 65b Since the sensitivity level is low, the suitable
NCU Sens Adj Err sensitivity level cannot be obtained even if the
H LED light intensity is raised.The unit may be
dirty, the LED may be defective or there may
be an error in the connection. 7
62 ERROR 65c Since the sensitivity level is low, the suitable
NCU Sens Adj Err sensitivity level cannot be obtained even if the
L LED light intensity is decreased.The unit may
be dirty, the LED may be defective or there
8
may be an error in the connection.

Rev.

63 ERROR 661 Positive pressure teaching failed. 1. Go to [#TEST] - [Air Pressure Check] - [Positive
POSITIVE P.Int1 Pressure] to check if a pressure of 17.5kPa is
maintained.
2. Adjust the slot valve to 17.7kPa.
3. Check if there is no trouble on the positive
1
64 ERROR 662
POSITIVE P.Int2 pressure sensor and harness.
valve.
65 ERROR 663
POSITIVE P.Int3
66 ERROR 71F Temperature of the head thermistor is not 1. Check the FFC connection of the print head.
2
HD THERM BRK readable normally. 2. Replace the print head with a new one.
(Refer to 3.1.1)
3. Replace the Slider T PCB Assy. with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
67 ERROR 706
UV UNIT OVER
UV unit exceeded high temperature threshold. 1. Check the operation with [# Test] - [Operation] - [UV
LED Fan] / [UV DRIVER Fan].
3
HEAT
2. Check the dust on the mist filter.
3. Replace UV_LED PCB.
68 ERROR 708 The temperature of the UV thermistor can not be 1. Check the connection between UV drive 14 PCB and
4
UV THERMISTOR read normally. UVLED PCB.
BRK
2. Replace UV LED PCB.
3. Replace UV drive 14 tPCB.
69 ERROR 722 The hot water pump failed or hot water 1. Check if hot water is leaking.
WATER TANK ROUTE leaked. 2. Check whether the water pump works normally.
70 ERROR 723 Confirm whether there is not abnormality.
5
WATER TANK ROUTE 3. Replace the Hot water pump with a new one.
(Refer to 6.2.10)
71 ERROR 726 Heater failure. 1. Check the cable connection between the Hot
WATER HEATER BRK water heater and AC PCB.
2. Check the cable connection between the AC PCB
and SSR.
6
3. Check the cable connection between the SSR and
Station IV PCB.
4. Check the state of the fuse on the AC PCB.
5. If a fuse blows out, replace the hot water heater
and the fuse.
6. Replace the SSR with a new one.
7. Replace the AC PCB with a new one.
72 ERROR 728
(Refer to 6.4.9)
Temperature of the hot water heater thermistor 1. Check the connection of the hot water heater 7
!HEATER THERM is not readable normally. thermistor.
BRK 2. Replace the Station IV PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.2)
73 ERROR 729 The heater temperature exceeded the high Check the voltage switching SW on the side of the
8
HHEATER HIGH temperature threshold. device.
TEMP
74 ERROR 72B Water shortage in the hot water tank. (Even if enough water is left, this may be displayed.)
WATER HEATER 1. Execute the [#TEST] - [CARTRIDGE SENSOR]
LACK (The number correspond to the cartridge
number.).
2. Execute the [MAINTENANCE] - [Water FillUp].
3. Check the hot water float sensor.

Rev.

75 ERROR 72C The hot water pump failed or hot water 1. Check if hot water is leaking.
WATER PUMP leaked. 2. Check whether the water pump works normally.
76 ERROR 72D Confirm whether there is not abnormality.
WATER PUMP 3. Replace the Hot water pump with a new one.
77 ERROR 72E (Refer to 6.2.10)
78
WATER
ERROR
WATER
PUMP
72F
PUMP
1
79 ERROR 730 The environmental temperature is higher than the 1. Lower the environment temperature.
WATER ENV TEMP H target temperature and it is impossible to lower the 2. Replace the keyboard PCB
water temperature
2
80 ERROR 901 Function cannot carry out by some errors. 1. Return to a local screen and confirm the error
INVALID situation.
OPERATION
81 ERROR 902 Drawing data is remaining. (Carry out the followings if the error still occurs when
DATA REMAIN data is cleared.)
1. Remove USB cable from the printer and execute
data clear. -> If solved, it is a problem on USB
cable or PC.
2. Replace the USB Cable with a new one. 3
(Refer to 3.3.1)
82 ERROR 90d Loaded number of the head is assumed zero. 1. Check the setting of loading number of the head
NO HEAD SELECT in the parameter.
4
(System parameter No.66 “HEAD NO”=4)
83 ERROR 04 Access Error of the PARAMETER ROM 1. Initialize parameter data.
PARAM ROM 1. The state that cannot access “FROM” on 2. Replace the EPL3 main PCB with a new one.
the EPL3 main PCB. (Refer to 3.3.1)
2. Parameter data is abnormal.
84 ERROR 909 Parameter version which is downloaded is 1. Check the FW version of the parameter which is
5
PARAMETER different from FW version. downloaded.
VERSION
85 ERROR d1a An error of the head power supply was detected. 1. Turn on machine power and check whether head power
HEAD VOLT PCB D 17, 18 is lit.
2. If only D18 does not light up, check the connection and
damage of the FFC between the head sliders.
6
3. If D17 and D18 do not light up, plug and unplug the
connector between the slider PCB and the head power
supply PCB.
4. Replace the head power PCB.
5. Replace the head.
86 ERROR d1b An error in the head drive power supply was 1. Insert and remove the FFC of the target nozzle.
7
COM detected. 2. Connect and disconnect the connector between the
VOLT:cmYCMKWW
slider PCB and the head power PCB.
3. Replace the head power PCB.
4. Replace the head.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Warning Messages
Rev.
7.1.3 List of Warning Messages 1.1
 List of Warning Messages（1/4）

No. Message Cause Corrective Measures
List of Ink Error (Checking by guidance)
1 WRONG INK IC IC chip of Ink bottle unreadable properly (When the message is still displayed even after a IC
2 INK TYPE Type of inserted Ink bottle is different. chip is inserted;)
1. Check the attached status of the IC chip on the ink
3 INK COLOR The color of Ink bottle inserted is different
1
bottle.
from the color to be set.
2. Execute and confirm [#TEST] - [INC IC CHECK].
the Station IV PCB(CN5) and the CART IO PCB
(CN2).
4. Replace the ID contact PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.6)
(Refer to 6.4.7) 2
(Refer to 6.4.2)
4 WRONG CARTRIDGE An error occurred in the IC chip information The chip was used too much.
of the ink bottle. 1. Check whether the chip was also replaced when the
The amount used has exceeded the specified
value.
pack was replaced.
2. Check the W ink nozzle clogging and resolve it. 3
3. Replace the IC chip with new one.
5 NON INK IC No ink IC chip (IC chip is not installed) (When the message is still displayed even after a IC
chip is inserted;)
1. Check the attached status of the chip on the ink
4
bottle.
2. Execute and confirm [#TEST] - [CartridgeSensor].
(The number meets the ink bottle No.)(Confirm
that the CART display is switched by ejecting and
inserting the ink bottle.)
PCB(CN2).
4. Replace the ID contact PCB with a new one. 5
(Refer to 6.4.6)
(Refer to 6.4.7)
6 INK END Ink end (No ink left)

(Refer to 6.4.2)
(When the message is still displayed even after a new Ink 6
7 INK NEAR END Ink near end (A small amount of ink left) bottle or an empty Ink bottle is charged;)
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST] - [SENSOR] -
[CartridgeSensor] (The number meets the IC chip
No.).
7
PCB(CN2).
3. Check the peripheral and the assembly of the near
end float sensor.
4. Check the connection of the ID contact PCB and
Detector Assy, I/C, Y.
5. Replace the IC chip with a new one
6. Replace the ID contact PCB (Refer to 6.4.6) and 8
“CARTRIDGE SENSOR I/C, Y” with new one.
(Refer to 6.4.7)
(Refer to 6.4.2)

Rev.

8 EXPIRATION Some ink bottles are expired.(Usable) 1. Be careful that the expiration date is coming soon.
You can use up to the two month later.
(If this message appears when a correct ink bottle is set)
2. Check the clock time of the machine.
3. Check the assembly of the ID Contact PCB and the
shape of the contact plate, and execute the cleaning.
4. Check the connection of the ID Contact PCB. 1
5. Replace the IC chip with a new one.
6. Replace the ID Contact PCB Assy. with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.6)
9 EXPIRATION(1MONTH) Some ink are expired.

(Refer to 6.4.7)
1. Be careful that the expiration date is coming soon. 2
(One month has passed after the expiration You can use up to the next month. The red LED
date./Usable) blinks.
(If this message appears when a correct ink bottle is set)
3
shape of the contact plate, and execute the cleaning.
3. Check the connection of the ID Contact PCB.
4. Replace the ink bottle with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.6)
4
(Refer to 6.4.7)
10 EXPIRATION(2MONTH) Some ink are expired. Replace the ink bottle with the warning.
(Two months have passed after the expiration 1. Expiration date expired.
date./ Not usable) (If this message appears when a correct ink bottle is
set)
5
shape of the contact plate, and execute the
cleaning.
3. Check the connection of the ID Contact PCB.
4. Replace the IC chip with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.6)
6
(Refer to 6.4.7)
Warning Messages (LOCAL)
11 Can't print/cartridge Multiple ink errors (unusable inks) occurred. 1. Press the [ENTER] key, and check the relevant
Ink supply (printing, cleaning, etc.) cannot be cartridge and the error contents. Then replace it
performed. with a usable one.
7
12 Check waste ink The count of the waste ink tank exceeded the 1. Check the waste ink tank and empty it.
specified amount. 2. Press the [MAINTENANCE] - [WASTE INK
TANK REPLACEMENT], and reset the counter.
13 Replace WIPER The count of the wiper exceeded the specified 1. Press the [MAINTENANCE] - [WASTE INK
amount. TANK REPLACEMENT] - [STATION] -
[REPLACE WIPER].
8
2. Replace the wiper with new one.
14 DATA REMAIN Data has already been received. (Carry out the followings if the error still occurs when
data is cleared.)
1. Remove USB cable from the printer and execute
data clear. -> If solved, it is a problem on USB
cable or PC.
2. Replace the USB Cable with new one.
(Refer to 3.3.1)

Rev.

15 NCU CONNECT NCU Assy. is not connected to the NCU unit. 1. Check the cable connection between the PD_AMP
PCB Assy.(CN1) and Station IV PCB (CN13).
(Refer to 6.5.8)
16 REPLACE NCU Light quantity decreases because deterioration

(Refer to 6.4.2)
At test drawing, if occurs even in the absence of
1
of the source of light LED, dirt and wound. missing nozzles
1. Clean the left and right internal walls of the NCU
Assy detection slits with a cotton-tipped swab.
2. Check the cable connection between the PD_AMP
PCB Assy.(CN1) and Station IV PCB(CN13).
(Refer to 6.5.8)
2
(Refer to 6.4.2)
17 NCU NZK CHK (HW) H/W can not sample the Ink ejection pattern of At test drawing, if occurs even in the absence of
Nozzle check OFF the NCU unit.
Many nozzle missing or trajectories have
occurred.
missing nozzles
1. Check the cable connection between the PD_AMP
PCB Assy.(CN1) and Station IV PCB (CN13).
3
18 NCU NZK CHK (MARK) Ink ejection pattern of the NCU unit is ana- 2. Replace the NCU Assy. with new one.
Nozzle check OFF lyzed, and then recognized abnormal ink ejec- (Refer to 6.5.8)
tion which not reach criteria of the pattern. 3. Replace the Station IV PCB with a new one.
4
The normal determination can not be made by (Refer to 6.4.2)
19 NCU FLUSH POS Detection of optimum position for the sensor
Nozzle check OFF of the NCU unit fails.
5
20 NCU CENTER POS Detection of central position of the NCU unit
Nozzle check OFF fails.
21 NCU SN ADJST Light quantity adjustment to get optimum sen-
Nozzle check OFF sitivity fails.
6
1. The normal determination can not be
made by Many nozzle missing or
trajectories.
dirt and wound.
22 REPLACE NCU INK PAD Waste ink absorber of NCU is full. 1. Replace the waste ink absorber of NCU unit with
new one. (Refer to 6.5.8)
7

Rev.

23 NCU SENSOR LEVEL LOW Light quantity decreases to get optimum sensi- At test drawing, if occurs even in the absence of
tivity. missing nozzles
1. The normal determination can not be 1. Clean the left and right internal walls of the NCU
made by Many nozzle missing or Assy detection slits with a cotton-tipped swab.
trajectories. 2. Check the cable connection between the PD_AMP
PCB Assy.(CN1) and Station IV PCB(CN13).
3. Replace the NCU Assy. with new one. 1
dirt and wound. (Refer to 6.5.8)
24 NCU Sens Adj Err H Since the sensitivity level is low, the suitable 4. Replace the Station IV PCB with a new one.
sensitivity level cannot be obtained even if the (Refer to 6.4.2)
LED light intensity is raised.The unit may be
dirty, the LED may be defective or there may
be an error in the connection. 2
25 NCU Sens Adj Err L Since the sensitivity level is low, the suitable
sensitivity level cannot be obtained even if the
LED light intensity is decreased.The unit may
be dirty, the LED may be defective or there
3
may be an error in the connection.
26 Nozzle Missing Since it is determined the nozzle missing in a
Print Stopped nozzle check and stopped printing.
27 NCU ERROR Nozzle check has been interrupted due to 1. Update FW.(Refer to 8.1.2)
Nozzle check OFF some problem. 2. Replace the EPL3 main PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.1)
Warning Messages (Operation)
28 INVAILD OPERATE The motor is OFF after the cover was opened,
4
:MOTOR POWER OFF etc.
29 INVAILD OPERATE An ink error occurred.
:INK ERROR
5
30 INVAILD OPERATE The cover is open or the emergency stop 1. Check the installation of the cover sensor.
:COVER OPEN switch was pressed. 2. Check the state and connection of the emergency
stop switch.
31 INVAILDT OPERATE The data has been received. Perform clear data or start printing with [REMOTE]
:DATA REMAIN key.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of SYSTEM HALT
Rev.
7.1.4 List of SYSTEM HALT 1.2
 List of SYSTEM HALT （1/6）

No. LCD Cause Corrective Measures
1 SYSTEM HALT (*) F-ROM CLEAR error (F-ROM clear unable) 1. Replace the EPL3 main PCB with a new one.
10e :FROM CLEAR (Refer to 3.3.1)
2 SYSTEM HALT (*) FROM WRITE error (F-ROM writing unable)
10f : FROM WRITE
1
3 SYSTEM HALT (*) There is a possibility of occurrence when LCD 1. Check the connections between the Color LCD
110 : PCB KEY does not light in power ON status. PCB(CN3) and the EPL3 MAIN PCB(CN100), and
Without Color LCD PCB; then disconnect and connect the FFCs.
If there is no color LCD PCB, it is not 2. Replace the FFCs of the above routes.
appeared so check with the error Log. 3. Replace the Color LCD PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.8)
4 SYSTEM HALT (*) No CART IO PCB

(Refer to 3.3.1)
1. Check the connections between the Station IV
2
112 : PCB CARTRIG PCB(CN5) and the CART IO PCB(CN2), and then
disconnect and connect the FFCs.
2. Replace the FFCs of the above routes.
(Refer to 6.4.7)
4. Replace the Station IV PCB with a new one. 3
(Refer to 6.4.2)
5 SYSTEM HALT (*) EPL3 MAIN PCB fuse (F1) blown (+IO5V) 1. Turn on the power, and then confirm D29 on the
115 : PCB MAIN-F1 EPL3 main PCB is lit. (Refer to 2.3.1)
(Confirm it before an error occurs, because when
4
an error occurs, the LED is not lit)
2. When LED is not lit, confirm connection and
damage of the FFC between EPL3 main PCB
(CN9) and Station IV PCB (CN1). Replace the F1
fuse. (Refer to 2.3.1)(Refer to 2.3.2)
3. When an error occurs with LED is lit, replace the
EPL3 main PCB. (Refer to 3.3.1)
6 SYSTEM HALT (*)
122 : PRAM NONE
DDR2PRAM PCB is not accessible 1. Disconnect and connect the DDR2PRAM.
5
7 SYSTEM HALT (*) PRAM data error (Refer to 3.3.1)
123 : PRAM DATA
8 SYSTEM HALT (*) PRAM address error
124 : PRAM ADDR
6
9 SYSTEM HALT (*) Power OFF detection error (Not to OFF) 1. Replace the EPL3 main PCB with a new one.
127 : POWER OFF The device does not switch off after 5 seconds (Refer to 3.3.1)
or more when +5V has been turned off.
10 SYSTEM HALT (*) EPL3 MAIN PCB fuse (F4) blown (+IOPOW) 1. Turn on the power, and then confirm D35 on the
12d : PCB MAIN-F4 EPL3 main PCB is lit. (Refer to 2.3.1)
damage of the FFC between EPL3 main PCB 7
(CN9) and Station IV PCB (CN1). Replace the F4
11 SYSTEM HALT (*)
12e:HEAD CONFIG
TTEC head configuration error 1. Check the connection between the print head and slider T
PCB Assy. 8
2. Replace the Slider T PCB Assy. (Refer to 3.3.2)
3. Replace the print head. (Refer to 3.1.1)

Rev.

12 SYSTEM HALT (*) Communication fault with ink IC 1. Perform [#TEST] - [IC CHCK].
147 : DS-IC BUSY 2. Check the connection and mount of the ID contact
PCB.
3. Replace the ink IC with a new one
4. Replace the ID contact PCB with new one.
(Refer to 6.4.6)
5. Replace the CART IO PCB with a new one. 1
(Refer to 6.4.7)
13 SYSTEM HALT (*) EPL3 MAIN PCB fuse (F2 or F3) blown. 1. Turn on the power, and then confirm D33 on the
1bf : PCB MAIN-F2/F3 EPL3 main PCB are lit. (Refer to 2.3.1)
2
damage of the FFC between EPL3 main PCB
(CN104) and Slider T PCB (CN1). Replace the F2
14 SYSTEM HALT (*)
1d2:PCB STA4-1-F1
Station IV PCB fuse (F1) blown (+Vpow) 1. Turn on the power, and then confirm D78 on the
Station IV PCB are lit. (Refer to 2.3.2) 3
2. If the LED is not lit, check the suction motor, wiper
motor, Z-drive motor, diaphragm pump (Air),
4
damage to the circulation motor, and damage to the
cable of station IV PCB CN7, CN8, and CN11.
(Refer to 2.3.2)
Replace the F1 fuse. (Refer to 2.3.2)
Station IV PCB.(Refer to 6.4.2)
15 SYSTEM HALT (*) Station IV PCB fuse (F2) blown (+IO5V) 1. Turn on the power, and then confirm D79 on the
1d3:PCB STA4-1-F2 Station IV PCB are lit. (Refer to 2.3.2)
5
2. If the LED is not lit, check the connections and
damage of station IV PCB CN5, CN7, CN8, CN9,
CN11, CN13, CN16, and CN20. (Refer to 2.3.2)
Replace the F2 fuse. (Refer to 2.3.2)
Station IV PCB. (Refer to 6.4.2) 6
16 SYSTEM HALT (*) Station IV PCB fuse (F3) blown (+VCAS-20) 1. Turn on the power, and then confirm D80 on the
7
2. If the LED is not lit, replace the F3 fuse.
Station IV PCB. (Refer to 6.4.2)
17 SYSTEM HALT (*) Station IV PCB fuse (F4) blown (+VCAS-16) 1. Turn on the power, and then confirm D83 on the
8
2. If the LED is not lit, check the FFC connections
and damages between station IV PCB (CN5) and
CARTIO PCB (CN2). Replace the F4 fuse.
(Refer to 2.3.2)

Rev.

18 SYSTEM HALT (*) Station IV PCB fuse (F5) blown (+24V) 1. Turn on the power, and then confirm D85 on the
2. If the LED is not lit, replace the F5 fuse.
Station IV PCB.(Refer to 6.4.2) 1
19 SYSTEM HALT (*) Station IV PCB fuse (F6) blown (+24Vadj) 1. Turn on the power, and then confirm D87 on the
2
2. If the LED is not lit, check the damage to the
suction fan and the cable connection or damage of
the station IV PCB(CN9). Replace the F6 fuse.
(Refer to 2.3.2)
20 SYSTEM HALT (*) No Slider T PCB 1. Check the connection of the cable between EPL3
11f : PCB SLIDER main PCB (CN105) and the slider T
PCB(CN3).(Refer to 2.3.1)(Refer to 2.3.9) 3
2. Check the connection of the cable between EPL3
main PCB (CN104) and the slider T PCB
(CN1).(Refer to 2.3.1)(Refer to 2.3.9)
4
(Refer to 3.3.2)
4. Replace the above FFC.
(Refer to 3.3.1)
21 SYSTEM HALT (*) No Station IV PCB 1. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between
1e4 : PCB STA4-1 the EPL3 main PCB(CN104/CN105) and the
5
Station IV PCB(CN1). (Refer to 2.3.1)
(Refer to 6.4.2)
3. Replace the above FFC.
4. Replace the EPL3 MAIN PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.1)
6
22 SYSTEM HALT (*) EPL3 MAIN PCB Ethernet IC trouble 1. Replace the EPL3 main PCB with a new one.(Refer
303 : PCB MAIN ET to 3.3.1)
23 SYSTEM HALT (*) Wiper origin undetectable 1. Execute and confirm [#TEST] - [SENSOR] -
406 : WIPER ORG [WIPER]. (Confirm that the ON/OFF display is
switched by moving the wiper back and forth.)
2. Check that the wiper moves back and forth
smoothly in manual.
3. Check the assembly and connector connection of
Wiper Origin Sensor.
4. Check the connector connection of Wiper motor,
7
and then disconnect and connect the connector.
5. Check the connection of the Station IV PCB
(CN11).
8
6. Replace the Wiper Origin Sensor with a new one.
7. Replace the Wiper Motor with a new one.
(Refer to 6.2.4)
(Refer to 6.4.2)

Rev.

24 SYSTEM HALT (*) Y Origin Sensor error 1. Execute and confirm [#TEST] - [SENSOR] -
502 : Y ORGIN [Y-ORIGIN]. (Confirm that the ON/OFF display is
switched by moving the carriage left and right.)
2. Check in manual if the carriage moves left and
right smoothly.
3. Check the connector connection of Y-origin Sensor
and EPL3 Main PCB(CN7).
4. Replace the Y Origin Sensor with a new one.
1
5. Check if there is no trouble on the Y Motor Cable
or connecting.
Replace the Y-axis motor with a new one.
2
(Refer to 6.5.3)
6. Replace the EPL3 MAIN PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.1)
25 SYSTEM HALT (*) The liner scale and motor encoder readings 1. Execute [#TEST] - [CHECK ENCODER].
509 : HDC POSCNT differ. 2. Check the assembly of Liner encoder scale and
Encoder PCB.
3
3. Check if there is no trouble of connection of the
Encoder PCB.
(disconnecting, burnout, or the like).
4. Check the connections between the Slider P
PCB(CN1) and the EPL3 MAIN PCB(CN101), and
then disconnect and connect the cable.
5. Check the connections between the Station IV
4
PCB(CN5) and the EPL3 MAIN PCB(CN16), and
then disconnect and connect the cable.
6. Check the assembly of Liner encoder scale, and
confirm that there is neither dirt nor scratch.
7. Replace the Liner encoder scale with a new one.
(Refer to 6.3.6)
5
8. Replace the Encoder PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.4)
(Refer to 3.2.2)
26 SYSTEM HALT (*) System error 1. Replace the EPL3 main PCB with a new one.
801 : (C)OPCODE (CPU exception: OP code error) (Refer to 3.3.1)
6
27 SYSTEM HALT (*) System error
802 : (C)SWI (CPU exception: Slot instruction error)
803 : (C)PFTCH ABRT (CPU exception: CPU address error)
804 : (C)DATA ABRT (CPU exception: DMA address error)
7
30 SYSTEM HALT (*) Serial control error 1. Update F/W.(Refer to 8.1.2)
806 : FW/SIO bit 2. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between
31 SYSTEM HALT (*) Serial control error the Station IV PCB(CN1) and the EPL3 main
807 : FW/SIO wbsy PCB(CN9).
3. Check the connection between EPL3 main PCB
(CN104/CN105) and Slider P PCB (CN1/CN3).
8
(Refer to 3.3.1)
(Refer to 3.3.2)
(Refer to 6.4.2)
(Refer to 3.2.2)

Rev.

32 SYSTEM HALT (*) FW error 1. Update F/W. (Refer to 8.1.2)
808 : FW/STP-MTR** 2. Check or clear the parameters
3. Check or replace the step motors listed below.
• **=00:Wiper
• **=01:Suction pumps1
• **=02:Suction pumps2
• **=13:Station up and down
• **=17:Fedding
1
• **=18:Take-up
• **=20:Tension roller
2
(Refer to 3.3.1)
33 SYSTEM HALT (*) 1. Update F/W. (Refer to 8.1.2)
809 : FW/XY param 2. Check or clear the parameters
34 SYSTEM HALT (*) 3. Replace the EPL3 main PCB with a new one.
80b : FW/ctrltsk (Refer to 3.3.1)
35 SYSTEM HALT (*)
3
80c : FW/PUMP W
36 SYSTEM HALT (*) 1. Update F/W. (Refer to 8.1.2)
80e : FW/FROM prm 2. Replace the EPL3 main PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.1)
37 SYSTEM HALT (*) Serial control error 1. Update F/W. (Refer to 8.1.2)
80f : FW/SIO vch 2. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between
4
38 SYSTEM HALT (*) the Station IV PCB(CN1) and the EPL3 main
811 : FW/SIO read PCB(CN9).
(CN104/CN105) and Slider P PCB (CN1/CN3).
(Refer to 3.3.1)
(Refer to 3.3.2) 5
(Refer to 6.4.2)
(Refer to 3.2.2)
39 SYSTEM HALT (*)
812 : FW/CRTRG NO
FW error 1. Update F/W.(Refer to 8.1.2)
2. Check or clear the parameters
6
40 SYSTEM HALT (*) 3. Replace the EPL3 main PCB with a new one.(Refer
813 : FW/WIPER RN to 3.3.1)
41 SYSTEM HALT (*)
814 : FW/drivinfm
42 SYSTEM HALT (*)
815 : FW/SIO rsrc
Serial control error 1. Update F/W. (Refer to 8.1.2)
7
the Station IV PCB(CN1) and the EPL3 main
PCB(CN9).
(CN104/CN105) and Slider T PCB (CN1/CN3).
(Refer to 3.3.1)
8
(Refer to 3.3.2)
(Refer to 6.4.2)
(Refer to 3.2.2)

Rev.

43 SYSTEM HALT (*) FW error 1. Update F/W. (Refer to 8.1.2)
816 : FW/FROM WRC 2. Check or clear the parameters
44 SYSTEM HALT (*) 3. Replace the EPL3 main PCB with a new one.
817 : FW/SaveArea (Refer to 3.3.1)
1
45 SYSTEM HALT (*)
818 : FW/EEP SIZE
46 SYSTEM HALT (*)
819 : FW/HROM SIZ
47 SYSTEM HALT (*)
81b : FW/STACK OV
2
48 SYSTEM HALT (*)
826 : FW/PrmSaveBuf
49 SYSTEM HALT (*)
828 : FW/ERR L*****
50 SYSTEM HALT (*)
829 : FW/ERASE TIMEOV
3
51 SYSTEM HALT (*)
82b : FW/MENU.******
52 SYSTEM HALT (*) Unknown error 1. Update F/W. (Refer to 8.1.2)
000 : UNNOWN ERR 2. Replace the EPL3 main PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.1)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > Troubles Without Messages Displayed
Rev.
7.1.5 Troubles Without Messages Displayed 1.0
There is a possibility of electric shock.

Before working of the power supply and the surroundings, be sure to remove the power cable.
 List of the Troubles Without Messages Displayed
1
No. Case Cause List of Countermeasures
Start-up Fails at Power on Power path defective 1. Check the connection of cables.
2. Check the grounding of each electric equipment.
2
Main Power SW defective 1. Check the connection of Main Power SW.
1 2. Replace the Main Power SW with a new one.
Power Supply PCB defective Replace the Power Supply PCB with a new one.
Keyboard PCB defective Replace the Keyboard PCB with a new one.
Main PCB defective Replace the Main PCB with a new one.
Something is displayed on Abnormality of the wiring 1. Check the connection of cables.
3
LCD, but the printer does not 2. Replace the FFC located between the Keyboard PCB and the
start. Main PCB.
2
Power Supply PCB defective Replace the Power Supply PCB with a new one.
Keyboard PCB defective Replace the Keyboard PCB with a new one.
Main PCB defective Replace the Main PCB with a new one.
The UV lamp is not lighted. Abnormality of the wiring 1. Check connection between the Slider PCB and the UV unit.
3
2. Replace the cable located between the Slider PCB and the UV
unit. 4
UV unit defective Replace the UV unit with a new one.
UV Drive 14 PCB defective Replace the UV Drive 14 PCB with a new one.
Carriage hits a work and the Work Area Sensor defective 1. Readjust the Work Area Sensor.
5
table 2. Check the connection of Work Area Sensor.
3. Replace the Work Area Sensor with a new one.
4 Carriage height defective Readjust the height of the carriage.
Table defective 1. Check the Z-Origin sensor.
2. Replace the Z-Origin sensor with a new one.
3. Readjust the table.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions
Troubleshooting
7.1 7.2 7
Details on Errors and Malfunctions Detailed Methods of Coping with
the Malfunctions

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Basic Information
Operation Flow
8.1 8.2 8.3 8
Basic Information Basic Operation Print Mode
8.4 8.5
Common Setting Service Mode

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Basic Information > Service Mode and Specialized Key
Rev.
8.1.1 Service Mode and Specialized Key 1.1
 Outline
For troubleshooting or maintenance work, the printer needs to be operated in service mode.
The following describes the Specialized Key functions which start this printer in service-related mode.
 Specialized Key Functions
1
After the start of the printer, press the specific key(s) on the operation panel while the version information is
displayed. Then the printer will enter the corresponding one of the following service-related modes.
Service-related mode How to enter Remarks

F/W Update (While version information • Receives Firmware ROM data from the host PC via USB2.0 I/F, and
is displayed) updates the firmware of the main PCB.
Parameter
Press [FUNC3]
(While version information
• After firmware update, restart the printer by turning the main power.
• Uploads the parameters and log data from the printer to the host PC
2
UP/DOWNLOAD is displayed) via USB2.0 I/F.
Press [] + [] • Downloads the parameters from the host PC to the printer via
USEB2.0 I/F.
3
System parameter input (While version information • Start the printer in [SYSTEM PARAM.] input mode of
is displayed) [#PARAMETER].
Press [] + [] • When the printer cannot start because of a parameter hash error or the
like, the parameters can be initialized in this mode.
• When the printer cannot be operated because of a system down error
or the like, input the system parameter No. 54 HASH 0  1 or 2 in
4
this mode. Then the printer can be started for the purpose of checking
for problem.
Service mode (While version information
is displayed) Active until the power to the printer is turned off.
Press [FUNC1]+[FUNC3]
System parameter Active until the value of the system parameter SUPPORT is changed
SUPPORT 0  2
5
to 0.
When installing the (While version information
device-specific F/W is displayed)
Install the device-specific F/W into new product maintenance PCB
into new product main- Press [FUNC3]
(common PCB).
tenance PCB (common
PCB)
 Service Mode 6
For maintenance work, start the printer in service mode. Then you can use the functions that are not available in
normal mode. As for those functions, the “#” mark is added at the head of the function name.
© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. 8.1.1 R. P.1

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Basic Information > F/W Update
Rev.
8.1.2 F/W Update 1.0
 Indication on LCD
Ready for ROM data reception ROM data being received Complete ROM data reception  ROM data being overwritten
F/W UPDATING *TRANSMIT START* TYPE:HOST->MAIN ver :1.00->*.**
*TRANSMIT START* S recieving... ver :1.00->*.** writing F/W
1
 Outline
Perform FW upgrading of UJF-30_6042MkII with the FW Version Upgrade functions of FW Upgrade Tool III.
2
Refer to the “FW Update Tool III manual” for FW Update Tool.
 Update procedure
Never turn the power off when the ROM data is being overwritten!
Once overwriting fails, the replacement of the main PCB assy. is required to recover.
3
F/W update can be canceled by turning off the main power in the stage where the indication on the LCD
is as shown at .
 Normal FW version up
4
Indication
Step Operation Description
on LCD
5
1 Main power Printer starts in F/W update mode
ON+[FUNC3]  During exchanging maintenance PCB, perform at the beginning
The following part number of the main board is to be used in common to
all models. At the time of delivery a common FW is written rather than the
FW of the specific machine type.
Part Number: E108578 EPL3 main board COM FW Assy.
The display at the start up 6
Epl3Mb Start-up
Ver.x.xx
Ready for ROM data reception 

2 ROM data transmission Use the Version Upgrade function of FW Update Tool III to send the version up
file
7
Data reception 
Data reception completed 
Then press the [ENTER] key
8
* When System parameters “SUPPORT” = 0, it will be automatically migrated to
write.
Write the program in the memory 

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Basic Information > Parameter Up/Download
Rev.
8.1.3 Parameter Up/Download 1.0
Ready for Up/Download Uploading Downloading Up/Download successfully

completed
UP&DOWNLOAD  UPLOADING   DOWNLOADING  UP&DOWNLOAD END
READY! POWER OFF
2
 Upload procedure (machine  host PC)
Indication
on LCD
1 Sub power
ON+ [] + []
Printer starts in Parameter Up/Download mode.
Ready for Up/Download 
3
2 Parameter upload Uploads parameter data to the host PC.
Uploading 
Up/Download completed 
3 Sub power OFF Parameter upload completed 4
 Download procedure (machine  host PC)
The machine is automatically reset after completion of downloading.

5
Indication
on LCD
1 Sub power
ON+ [] + []
6
2 Parameter download Downloads parameter data to the host PC.
Downloading 

7
Up/Download completed

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Basic Information > Parameter Function
Rev.
8.1.4 Parameter Function 1.0
 Outline
With the PARAMETER function, you can check and set parameters on the printer. (Available in service mode)
Be sure to upload parameters before changing them.

There is a possibility that input errors may make recovery impossible.
1
 Parameter function items
No. Item Description Change

1 SYSTEM PARAMETER A group of parameters as a storage of adjusted values for each machine Permitted
2 FEED PARAMETER
(printing)
A group of parameters as a storage of adjusted values for X-feeding Permitted
2
3 HEAD PARAMETER A group of parameters as a storage of adjusted values for dot position Partially
and the head voltage permitted
4 INK PARAMETER1 A group of parameters as a storage of the operation status of the Partially
3
machine permitted
5 SCAN PARAMETER A group of parameters as a storage of drive frequency for the head Permitted

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Basic Information > LOG Upload
Rev.
8.1.5 LOG Upload 1.0
Ready for Up/Download Uploading Up/Download successfully

completed
UP&DOWNLOAD  UPLOADING  UP&DOWNLOAD END
READY! POWER OFF
2
 Upload procedure (machine  host PC)
Indication
on LCD
1 Sub power
ON+ [] + []
3
2 Parameter upload Keep the [ENTER] key on the main body operation panel pressed, and upload the log to the
host PC.
Uploading 
3 Sub power OFF

Up/Download completed
Log upload completed

4

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Basic Information > Important Parameter
Rev.
8.1.6 Important Parameter 1.1
 Outline
This section shows the parameters necessary in repair and verification work.
 Important parameters
 SYSTEM PARAMETER
1
Standard Adjusted
No. Display Description Unit Input range
value value
6 PRGposY 0 Purge Y position adjustment 0.1mm -200~200
7 FLSposY 0 Flushing Y position adjustment 0.1mm -200~200
8 CAPposY 0 Capping Y position adjustment 0.1mm -200~200
9 WIPposY 0 Wiping Y position adjustment 0.1mm -200~200
169 HASH
170 SUPPORT
0
0
Hash check 1.2:Check pass & Servo motor OFF
Adjustment functionality extension 2: Extension
code
code
0~2
0~2
2
Parameter initialization
1: ALL param(6042MkII, 3042MkII Ex)
171 INITIAL 0 code 0~4
2: ALL param(3042MkII)
21: SYSTEM param, OPERATION param
 INK PARAMETER 1 4
Standard Adjusted
No. Display Description Unit Input range
value value
0 FillUp 0 Initial charging execution flag: Bit assignment ^0=Head 1~^7=8
1 Fup INK
60 UV1TimH
0
0
Charged ink type (type)
UV1 Total irradiation time High: x2^16 min unit 5
61 UV1TimL 0 UV1 Total irradiation time Low: 1 min unit

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Basic Operation
Operation Flow
8.1 8.2 8.3 8
8.4 8.5

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Basic Operation > Start up
Rev.
8.2.1 Start up 1.0
6WDUWXS
:DLWLQJIRUERRWXSVXFKDV0RWRUH[FLWDWLRQDQG2ULJLQGHWHFW
3/($6(:$,7

%RRW ORJR⾲♧㸧

'LVSOD\WKHPRGHOQDPHDQG9HUVLRQ
1
&UHDWHGDQHZZDLWLQJVFUHHQ
&RPSOHWH!
0RYHWRWKH,QLWLDO 2SHUDWLRQSDUDPHWHU1R
>23VHWXS'RQH@
0RYHWRWKH,QLWLDO ,QNSDUDPHWHU1R
>:)LOO8S@
0RYHWRWKH,QLWLDO ,QNSDUDPHWHU1R
>)LOO8S@
(
/2&$/
2
,QN
0(187(675(027(
7(67Ѝࠉ7(6735,17&/($1,1*

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Print Mode
Operation Flow
8.1 8.2 8.3 8
8.4 8.5

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Print Mode > LOCAL / REMOTE
Rev.
8.3.1 LOCAL / REMOTE 1.0
>6(/@ /2&$/ >8'/5@ 25,*,16(783

; <
7$%/(+(,*+7
>(17@
2ULJLQ
,QN
0(187(675(027( 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
0RYHWRWKH
1
35,17,1* (5525
0(18 5(027( &RPSOHWH!>(17@ 5(027( 'DWDUHFHSWLRQ! 5(027(
:25.6(7 ! +($'7(03&21752/ 3ULQWLQJFRQGLWLRQLQGLFDWLRQ
+($'+(,*+7 ! !>@ PP PP
6(725,*,1 !
6(783 !
0$,17(1$1&( ! ,QN ,QN ,QN
0$&+,1(6(783 ! 9$&880/2&$/ 9$&880/2&$/ 9$&880/2&$/
12==/(&+(&. !
,1)250$7,21 !
9$&880!! /2&$/
2
'$7$5(0$,1
2ULJLQ
,QN
0(187(675(027(
/2&$/
>(17@
2ULJLQ
,QN 0RYHWRWKH
3
9$&88025,*,16(783'$7$&/($5
25,*,16(783
; < '$7$&/($5 '$7$&/($5
7$%/(+(,*+7
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 '$7$&/($5 '$7$&/($5
4
0$,17(1$1&( 7(6735,17 7(6735,17 7(6735,17 +($'7(03&21752/
7(6735,17 ! 6&$1',5 ! 12==/(5(&29(5<2)) 7(67'5$: 3/($6(:$,7
&/($1,1* ! )(('',5 !
!>@
9$&880'(7$,/
7(6735,17
35,17,1* 3/($6(:$,7
3/($6(:$,7
5

&/($1,1* 6(/(&7+($'
VRIW ! ‫܇‬+($' &/($1,1* &/($1,1*
QRUPDO ! ‫܇‬+($' ࠉࠉ 3/($6(:$,7
KDUG ! ‫܇‬+($'
XOWUD ‫܇‬+($'
‫ݲ‬

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Print Mode > WORK SET / HEAD HIGHT / SET ORIGIN
Rev.
8.3.2 WORK SET / HEAD HIGHT / SET ORIGIN 1.0
0(18ࠉ:25.6(7
:25.6(7 :25.6(7 :25.6(7

3/($6(:$,7 &203/(7('HQW 3/($6(:$,7
9$&880:25.&+. 9$&880:25.&+. 9$&880:25.&+.
0(18ࠉ+($'+(,*+7
1
+($'+(,*+7
0(',$7+,&.1(66 PP
+($'*$3 PP
7$%/(+(,*+7 PP
*$3&+(&. 2))

0(18ࠉ6(725,*,1
6(725,*,1
;RIIVHW PP
2
<RIIVHW PP
=RULJLQ PP


MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Common Setting
Operation Flow
8.1 8.2 8.3 8
8.4 8.5

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Common Setting > SETUP
Rev.
8.4.1 SETUP 1.1
0(18ࠉ6(783
6(783 )(('&203

)(('&203 ! 3ULQW ! 3/($6(:$,7 +($'7(03&21752/ 35,17,1*
/2*,&$/6((. +267 6HWDGMXVW ! 3/$6(:$,7 3/$6(:$,7
,1./$<(56 +267
5()5(6+/(9(/ +267
8902'( 21
:25.&+$1*( 2)) 9$&880
)$102'( $8720$7,&
$872&/($1,1* !
35,17)/86+,1*/(9(/
0$36 $872 )(('&203
.HEDE7RRO ! $'-867
1
0LVUHJLVWUDWLRQ$GMXVW !

9$&880!!
$872&/($1,1*
,QWHUYDO ILOH
7<3( QRUPDO

:KHQ>0$36@LVVHWWR>0$18$/@
2
0$36
&2/2560227+,1*/9/ &2/2560227+,1*/9/
632760227+,1*/9/ 60227+,1*/9/

632760227+,1*/9/
60227+,1*/9/

3
2QO\ZKHQNHEDE7RROLVHIIHFWLYH
.HEDE7RRO
2ULJLQ0DUN6HDUFK 21

0LVUHJLVWUDWLRQ$GMXVW 0LVUHJLVWUDWLRQ$GMXVW 0LVUHJLVWUDWLRQ$GMXVW

)HHG'LUHFWLRQ ! GSL ! 3ULQW ! 3/$6(:$,7
6FDQ'LUHFWLRQ ! GSL ! 6HWDGMXVW !
5HYHUVH3ULQW ! GSL !

0LVUHJLVWUDWLRQ$GMXVW
+($'7(03&21752/
3/$6(:$,7

35,17,1*
3/($6(:$,7

$GMXVWPHQW9DOXH
4

0LVUHJLVWUDWLRQ$GMXVW 0LVUHJLVWUDWLRQ$GMXVW
5
GSL ! 3ULQW ! 3/$6(:$,7
GSL ! 6HWDGMXVW !

0LVUHJLVWUDWLRQ$GMXVW 0LVUHJLVWUDWLRQ$GMXVW 0LVUHJLVWUDWLRQ$GMXVW

+($'7(03&21752/ 35,17,1* $GMXVWPHQW9DOXH
3/$6(:$,7 3/($6(:$,7

6
$GMXVWPHQW9DOXH PP


MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Common Setting > MAINTENANCE
Rev.
8.4.2 MAINTENANCE 1.0
0(18ࠉ0$,17(1$1&(
0$,17(1$1&( 67$7,21

㻿㼀㻭㼀㻵㻻㻺 ! &$55,*(287 ! &$55,*(287 &$55,*(287 &$55,*(287
㻺㻻㼆㼆㻸㻱㻌㻾㻱㻯㻻㼂㻱㻾㼅 ! 5(3/$&(:DVWH,QN7DQN ! 3/($6(:$,7 &203/(7('HQW 3/($6(:$,7
㼁㼂㻌㻸㻭㻹㻼 ! ',6:$<:$6+ !
㻻㼢㼑㼞㼒㼘㼛㼣 ! 5HSODFH:,3(5 !
$8720$,17 ! 12==/(:$6+ !
:DWHU)LOO8S ! &8672'<:$6+ !
$,53* !
5(3/$&(:DVWH,QN7DQN
9$&880!! !! OHYHO /

',6:$<:$6+
',6:$<:$6+
3/($6(:$,7
1

2
5HSODFH:,3(5 5HSODFH:,3(5 5HSODFH:,3(5
3/($6(:$,7 &203/(7('HQW 3/($6(:$,7

',6:$<:$6+ 67$7,21
67$7,21 :,3(5&/($1,1* 67$7,21
+($'>@ &203/(7('HQW /($9,1*㸸PLQ

3
67$7,21
67$7,21 &/($1,1*
/($9,1*㸸PLQ

&8672'<:$6+ ',6:$<:$6+ &8672'<:$6+

67$7,21 :,3(5&/($1,1* &8672'<:$6+
3/($6(:$,7 &203/(7('HQW /($9,1*㸸PLQ
4

&8672'<:$6+ &8672'<:$6+ &8672'<:$6+

&8672'<:$6+ &/($1,1* ',6:$<:$6+
/($9,1*㸸PLQ 3/($6(:$,7

&8672'<:$6+ &8672'<:$6+
)LOOWKHOLTXLG ',6:$<:$6+
5
&203/(7('HQW 3/($6(:$,7

$,53* 6(/(&7+($'
9$&880 ! ‫܇‬+($' 3/($6(:$,7
3XUJH ! ‫܇‬+($'
‫܇‬+($'
‫܇‬+($'
‫ݲ‬
6
6(7&$3*20 $,53*
HQW! 3/($6(:$,7

,QFDVHRIWKH9$&880
12==/(5(&29(5<
3ULQW ! 3/($6(:$,7 +($'7(03&21752/ 35,17,1*
(QWU\ ! 3/$6(:$,7 3/($6(:$,7
5HVHW !
7
9$&880
0$,17(1$1&(
8986('7,0( K 12==/(5(&29(5< 12==/(5(&29(5<
6(/(&7㸸+$ +$1*2))
)81&7,21
12==/(5(&29(5<
8
&/($5㸸+$

6(/(&7+($'
‫܇‬+($' 2YHUIORZ
‫܇‬+($' 3/($6(:$,7
‫܇‬+($'
‫܇‬+($'
‫ݲ‬
$8720$,17
5()5(6+ 2))
&/($11,1*,179 2))
7<3( QRUPDO

:DWHU)LOO8S :DWHU)LOO8S :DWHU)LOO8S :DWHU)LOO8S

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Common Setting > MACHINE SETUP
Rev.
8.4.3 MACHINE SETUP 1.0

0(180$&+,1(6(783
0$&+,1(6(783 6(77,0(

㻭㼁㼀㻻㻌㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻙㼛㼒㼒 PLQ
㻿㻱㼀㻌㼀㻵㻹㻱 !
PPLQFK PP
.(<%8==(5 21
㻺㻱㼀㼃㻻㻾㻷 !
(9(170$,/ !
/$1*8$*( !
㻸㼛㼚㼕㼦㼑㼞 2))
㻿㻱㼀㼁㻼㻌㻾㻱㻿㻱㼀 ! 1(7:25.
&KHFN,3$''5(66 ! &KHFN,3$''5(66
9$&880!! &KHFN0$&$''5(66 !
'+&3 21
$XWR,3 21
1

&KHFN0$&$''5(66
GE

(9(170$,/
0$,/'(/,9(5< 2)) 35,1767$57(9(17 35,17(1'(9(17 (5525(9(17
6(/(&7(9(17 ! 2)) 2)) 2))
0$,/$''5(66 !
0(66$*(68%-(&7 !
2
6(59(56(783 !
75$160,77(67 !
0$,/$''5(66 :$51,1*(9(17 27+(5(9(17

9$&880!! [[[[[#[[[[[ 2)) 2))

0(66$*(68%-(&7
[[[[[[[[

6(59(56(783
(17
6073$''5(66
3
6073$''5(66HQW [[[[[[[[[[[[

4
6(59(56(783 607332571R
607332571RHQW

6(59(56(783 6(1'(50$,/$''5(66
6(1'(50$,/$''5HQW [[[[[#[[[[[

6(59(56(783
$87+(17,&$7,21HQW
$87+(17,&$7,21
6073$XWKHQWLFDWLRQ
5

,QFDVHRIWKDW>$XWKHQWLFDWLRQ@LV
>323EHIRUH6073@>6073$XWKHQWLFDWLRQ@
6(59(56(783 86(51$0(
86(51$0(HQW [[[[[[[[[[[[
6

6(59(56(783 3$66:25'
3$66:25'HQW

,QFDVHRIWKDW>$XWKHQWLFDWLRQ@
7
6(59(56(783 323$''5(66 LV>323EHIRUH6073@
323$''5(66HQW [[[[[[[[[[[[

6(59(56(783 $323
$323HQW 21

75$160,77(67
(;(&87(HQW
75$160,77(67
)$,/'(㸸HQW!
8

/$1*$*(
‫ۑ‬᪥ᮏㄒ
‫(ە‬QJOLVK

6(7835(6(7
,1,7,$/2."HQW


MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Common Setting > NOZZLE CHECK
Rev.
8.4.4 NOZZLE CHECK 1.1
0(1812==/(&+(&. ,QFDVRIKHDGPRGHO ,QFDVHRIKHDGPRGHO
㻺㻻㼆㼆㻸㻱㻌㻯㻴㻱㻯㻷㻶㼡㼐㼓㼙㼑㼚㼠㻌㻯㼛㼚㼐㼕㼠㼕㼛㼚㻶㼡㼐㼓㼙㼑㼚㼠㻌㻯㼛㼚㼐㼕㼠㼕㼛㼚

3ULQWLQJ&KHFN 21 F <
$XWR1R]]OH5HFRYHU\ 2)) P &
-XGJPHQW&RQGLWLRQ ! < 0
& .
0 :
. :
:
:
1


MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Common Setting > INFORMATION
Rev.
8.4.5 INFORMATION 1.0
0(18,1)250$7,21
,1)250$7,21 86$*(

㼁㻿㻭㻳㻱 ! :,3,1*
㼂㻱㻾㻿㻵㻻㻺 ! :$67(,1.7$1.
㻱㻾㻾㻻㻾㻌㻴㻵㻿㼀㻻㻾㼅 ! 35,17/(1*7+ P
/,67 ! 35,17$5($ ੍
86(7,0( K

㼂㻱㻾㻿㻵㻻㻺
8-)ϩ 9
05/9 9
1
0DLQ3&% (3/% 2QO\ZKHQPDLQWHQDQFHLVFRPSOHWHG

㻱㻾㻾㻻㻾㻌㻴㻵㻿㼀㻻㻾㼅
>@

(5525D
+'&63(('

6KRZKLVWRU\ZLWKҍҎ
3/($6(:$,7 +($'7(03&21752/
3/$6(:$,7
/,67
35,17,1* 2

*XLGDQFH ,QFDVHRIDZDUQLQJRQO\
/+ /+ :$51,1* ,1)250$7,21
3
‫ۑ‬ ‫ۑ‬ 6(/,$/1R
‫ۑ‬ ‫ۑ‬ 8-)0Nϩ 9
‫ۑ‬ ‫ۑ‬ 05/9 9 2QO\ZKHQPDLQWHQDQFHLVFRPSOHWHG
‫ۑ‬ ‫ۑ‬ 0DLQ3&% (3/% 2QO\ZKHQPDLQWHQDQFHLVFRPSOHWHG
/$167$786 RFQQFW 2QO\ZKHQPDLQWHQDQFHLVFRPSOHWHG

,QLWLDOVHWWLQJ
/$1*8$*( 6(77,0( ,1,7,$/6(77,1*

᪥ᮏㄒ &203/(7(' HQW

,QLWLDOILOOLQJRIZDUPZDWHU

4
:DWHU)LOO8S :DWHU)LOO8S :DWHU)LOO8S
7RFFILOOXS >(17@ 3DWK)LOO8S >(17@ 7RFFILOOXS >(17@
>6(/@

5
0RYHWRWKH0(18
,QLWLDOILOOLQJRILQN
,1.7<3( ,1.6(7>/+@ 3/($6(:$,7 6(7&$3*20

/+ FP<&0.:: HQW!
>6(/@

0RYH WRWKH0(18
),//83,1.BBBBBBBB
6(7,1.%277/(HQW
),//83
3/($6(:$,7
5(029(&$3*20
HQW!
),//83
3/($6(:$,7 6


MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Service Mode
Operation Flow
8.1 8.2 8.3 8
8.4 8.5

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Service Mode > #ADJUST
Rev.
8.5.1 #ADJUST 1.2

$'-867
$'-867
35,17$'-867 !
+($'ࠉ$'-867 !
5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817 !
'()$8/7ࠉ6(7 !
&$33,1* !
$'-867ࠉ:,3(5 !
),//83ࠉ,1. !
+($':$6+ !
+($'ࠉ,' !
5(6(76+27&28176 !
+($'ࠉ92/7ࠉ$'-867 !
$'-'27ࠉ92/80( !
6(16(ࠉ2%675&71 !
1
6(5,$/ࠉ1R !
'($/(5ࠉ1R !
25,*,1ࠉ$'-867 !
7$%/(ࠉ$'-867 !
)(('ࠉ&203ࠉ !
$1*/(ࠉ$'-867 !
1(7:25. !
6XEWDQN !
*$35(9,6( !
3$&.,1* !
6(7ࠉ7,0( !
3XUJH !
32,17(52))6(7 !
2SWLRQ !
2
!!
$'-867ࠉ35,17$'-867
35,17$'-867 +($'7(03&21752/
6L'LU ! 35,17$'-867 3/($6(:$,7 3/($6(:$,7
6L'LU㸸35,17
!>@
9$&880 9$&880 9$&880
3
35,17$'-867 35,17$'-867 35,17$'-867
35,17,1* +%+$㸸 +%+%㸸

35,17$'-867 35,17$'-867 35,17$'-867

+%+$㸸 +%+%㸸 +%+$㸸
4

35,17$'-867 35,17$'-867
+%+$㸸 +%+%㸸

$'-867ࠉ+($'ࠉ$'-867
+($'ࠉ$'-867 +($'7(03&21752/
6/$17ࠉ$'-867 ! 6/$17ࠉ$'-867 6/$17ࠉ$'-867 3/($6(:$,7 3/($6(:$,7
5
326,7,21ࠉ$'-867 ! 02'(㸸QRUPDO 35,1767$57㸸HQW
!>@
9$&880 9$&8802YHU/DS 9$&880
6/$17ࠉ$'-867
35,17,1*

6
+($'7(03&21752/
326,7,21ࠉ$'-867 3/($6(:$,7 3/($6(:$,7 326,7,21ࠉ$'-867
35,1767$57㸸HQW 35,17,1*
!>@
9$&880+HDG0RY 9$&880

Rev.
8.5.1 #ADJUST 1.2
$'-867ࠉ5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817
5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817
㻮㻻㼀㼀㻸㻱 ! 5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817 5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817 5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817
㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻯㻻㼁㻺㼀 %RWWOH㸸 12 %RWWOH㸸
㼁㻿㻱䚷㼀㻵㻹㻱 K
㼃㻵㻼㻵㻺㻳
6+27ࠉ&2817 !
35,17ࠉ/(1*7+ P
35,17ࠉ$5($ ੍
,1.ࠉ3,& !
5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817 5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817 5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817

9$&880!! %RWWOH㸸 12 %RWWOH㸸

5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817
%RWWOH㸸

5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817
12

5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817
%RWWOH㸸
1

2
5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817 5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817 5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817
%RWWOH㸸 12 %RWWOH㸸

5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817 5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817 5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817


5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817
%RWWOH㸸
5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817
12
5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817
%RWWOH㸸
3

5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817 5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817 5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817

4

5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817 5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817 5(3/$&(ࠉ&2817


$'-867ࠉ'()$8/7ࠉ6(7
5
'()$8/7ࠉ6(7
6+,33,1*ࠉVHW '()$8/76(7
,1,7,$/2."㸸HQW

$'-867ࠉ&$33,1*
&$33,1* &$33,1* &$33,1*

&$3326ࠉࠉࠉ )/86+,1*326 385*(326
6


Rev.
8.5.1 #ADJUST 1.2
$'-867ࠉ$'-867ࠉ:,3(5
$'-867
$'-867ࠉ:,3(5
:,3(5326
)81&7,21
$'-867ࠉ),//83ࠉ,1.
1
),//83ࠉ,1.
ILOOXS ! ),//83ࠉ,1. ),//83 'LVFKDUJLQJ
6(/(&7/+ 3/($6(:$,7 3/($6(:$,7
!!
$'-867ࠉ+($':$6+
$'-867
',6&+$5*( ! +($':$6+ 3/($6(:$,7 6(7&$3*20 +($':$6+
:$6+ ! +($'>FP<&0.::@ HQW! 5(029(,1.%277/(HQW

,QFDVHRI6\VWHP3DUDPHWHU1R>)$&725<@

2
'LVFKDUJLQJ &\FOHURXWH 5(029(&$3*20
3/($6(:$,7 LVGLVFKDUJHGZLWKDV\ULQJH HQW!

3
+($':$6+ 3/($6(:$,7 6(7&$3*20 +($':$6+
+($'>FP<&0.::@ HQW! 6(7:$6+,1*/,48,'HQW

:$6+,1*
3/($6(:$,7
4

$'-867ࠉ+($'ࠉ,'
+($'ࠉ,'+$ +($','+% +($','+$ +$','+%

+'9 9 $/ +'9 9 $/ +'9 9 $/ +'9 9 $/

+($','+$ +($','+% +($','+$ +($','+%
5
+'9 9 $/ +'9 9 $/ +'9 9 $/ +'9 9 $/

$'-867ࠉ5(6(76+27&28176
5(6(76+27&28176
+($'>BBBB@
6


Rev.
8.5.1 #ADJUST 1.2
$'-867ࠉ+($'ࠉ92/7ࠉ$'-867
+($'ࠉ92/7ࠉ$'-867 +($'ࠉ92/7ࠉ$'-867 +($'7(03&21752/

1RUPDO:DYH ! &+(&. ! +($'ࠉ92/7ࠉ$'-867 3/($6(:$,7 3/($6(:$,7
/'02'( ! $'-867 ! 35,1767$57 HQW
9$&880 9$&880 9$&880 9$&880
+($'ࠉ92/7ࠉ$'-867
35,17,1*
1

+($'ࠉ92/7ࠉ$'-867 +($'ࠉ92/7ࠉ$'-867 +($'ࠉ92/7ࠉ$'-867

+($'ࠉ92/7ࠉ$'-867 +'9㸸>@9 +'9㸸>@9
6(/(&7+$ VWDUW㸸9 VWRS㸸9

+($'ࠉ92/7ࠉ$'-867
+'9㸸>@9 +($'ࠉ92/7ࠉ$'-867 3/($6(:$,7
2
VWHS㸸9 35,176757 HQW
9$&880
+($'7(03&21752/ +($'ࠉ92/7ࠉ$'-867
3/($6(:$,7 +($'ࠉ92/7ࠉ$'-867 +'9㸸>@9
35,17,1* +$ 9
!>@
9$&880
$'-867ࠉ$'-'27ࠉ92/80(
3
$'-'27ࠉ92/80( $'-'27ࠉ92/80(
&KHFNࠉ3RVLWLRQ ! $'-'27ࠉ92/80(
$'-867 ! 3/($6(:$,7

$'-'27ࠉ92/80( $'-'27ࠉ92/80( $'-'27ࠉ92/80(

$'-'27ࠉ92/80( $'-'27ࠉ92/80( $'-'27ࠉ92/80(
+($'1R '276,=(6 VKRW

$'-'27ࠉ92/80(
$'-'27ࠉ92/80(
-2*(17 )OXVKLQJ
$'-'27ࠉ92/80(
+($'2))6(7㸸9
$'-'27ࠉ92/80(
$'-'27ࠉ92/80(
VKRW 4

$'-867ࠉ6(16(ࠉ2%675&71
6(16(ࠉ2%675&71
; < 2))
7$%/(+(,*+7ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ
-2*PP
7$%/('2:17($&+,1*7$%/(83
$'-867ࠉ6(5,$/ࠉ1R
6(5,$/1R
5
61

$'-867ࠉ'($/(5ࠉ1R
6
'($/(51R
'1

$'-867ࠉ25,*,1ࠉ$'-867
25,*,1ࠉ$'-867 +($'7(03&21752/
3ULQW ! 3/($6(:$,7 3/($6(:$,7 25,*,1ࠉ$'-867 25,*,1ࠉ$'-867
5HVHW ! 35,17,1* ; <
7
9$&880
$'-867ࠉ7$%/($'-867
7$%/(ࠉ$'-867 7$%/(ࠉ$'-867

6/,'(521 &203/(7('㸸HQW
-2*PP
7$%/('2:1PP7$%/(83
$'-867ࠉ)(('ࠉ&203ࠉ
+($'7(03&21752/
)(('ࠉ&203ࠉ 3/($6(:$,7 3/($6(:$,7 )(('ࠉ&203ࠉ )(('ࠉ&203ࠉ
8
35,17ࠉ67$57HQW 35,17,1* $'-867
9$&880
$'-867ࠉ,QLW520,&
,QLW520,& 6($5&+,1*25,*,1
,QLWLDOL]H.HEDEHQW

$'-867ࠉ$1*/(ࠉ$'-867
+($'7(03&21752/
$1*/(ࠉ$'-867 3/($6(:$,7 3/($6(:$,7 $1*/(ࠉ$'-867
35,17ࠉ67$57HQW 35,17,1*
9$&880

Rev.
8.5.1 #ADJUST 1.2
$'-867ࠉ1(7:25.
1(7:25.
,3ࠉ$''5(66 ! ,3ࠉ$''5(66
'()$8/7*$7(:$< !
'16ࠉ$''5(66 !
68%ࠉ1(7ࠉ0$6. !
6073ࠉ$''5(66 !
323ࠉ$''5(66 !
86(5ࠉ1$0( !
323EHIRUH6073 !
$323 !
&KHFNࠉ,3ࠉ$''5(66 ! '()$8/7*$7(:$<
9$&880!!

'16ࠉ$''5(66

1

2
1(7:25.
68%1(70$6.

6073ࠉ$''5(66
[[[[[[[[[[[[

323ࠉ$''5(66
[[[[[[[[[[[[
3

86(5ࠉ1$0(
[[[[[[[[[[[[
4

1(7:25.
SRSEHIRUHVPWS21

5
1(7:25.
$32321

&+(&.,3$''5(66

6
$'-867ࠉ6XEWDQN
$'-867
),//83ࠉ,1. ! ),//83ࠉ,1. ),//83ࠉ,1. &/($1,1*
'LVFKDUJHࠉ,QN ! +($'ࠉ>FPBBBBBB@ 3/($6(:$,7

'LVFKDUJHࠉ,QN 'LVFKDUJHࠉ,QN
+($'ࠉ>FPBBBBBB@ 3/($6(:$,7
$'-867ࠉ*$35(9,6(

7
*$35(9,6(
*$35(9,6( *$3&+(&. ; <
*$3&+(&. HQW 3/($6(:$,7 7$%/(+(,*+7
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
8
$'-867ࠉ3$&.,1*
25,*,16(783
3$&.,1* 3$&.,1* 3$&.,1*
3/($6(:$,7 (QDEOHFRYHURSHQ &203/(7('㸸HQW
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83

Rev.
8.5.1 #ADJUST 1.2

$'-867ࠉ6(7ࠉ7,0(
6(7ࠉ7,0(

$'-867ࠉ3XUJH
3XUJH 3XUJH 3XUJH

+($'>FP<&0.::@ 1HJDWLYH3UHVVXUH 67$57(17!
ࠉ
$'-86732,17(52))6(7
ࠉ ࠉ
32,17(52))6(7
1
32,17(52))6(7 32,17(52))6(7 ; <
35,1767$57HQW 35,17,1* 7$%/(+(,*+7
ࠉ ࠉ 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
2
$'-8672SWLRQ
0Nϩ 0Nϩ
.HEDE 2)) .HEDE 2))

ORQL]HU 21 ORQL]HU 21
(;+$867)$1 2)) 1&8 2))
(PHUJHQF\ 3DWOLWH 2))
(;+$867)$1 2))
ࠉ ࠉ
$'-867&$3&/($1,1*
&$3&/($1,1* 3/($6(:$,7 3OHDVHDWWDFK &$3&/($1,1*

+($'ࠉ>FPBBBBBB@ WKHFDSDX[LOLDU\UXEEHU 3/($6(:$,7
3
GLSSHGLQZDVKLQJOLTXLG
HQW!
ࠉ ࠉ ࠉ ࠉ
3/($6(:$,7 5(029(&$3*20 &/($1,1*

HQW! 3/($6(:$,7
ࠉ ࠉ ࠉ
ZKHQ9$&8801* :KHQ(1'LVVHOHFWHG
4
9$&8801*FP<&0.:: &$3&/($1,1* 3/($6(:$,7 5(029(&$3*20 &/($1,1*
HQW! (1'!&217,18( HQW! 3/($6(:$,7
ࠉ ࠉ ࠉ ࠉ ࠉ
:KHQ&217,18(LVVHOHFWHG
3/($6(:$,7 3OHDVHDWWDFK &$3&/($1,1*

WKHFDSDX[LOLDU\UXEEHU 3/($6(:$,7
GLSSHGLQZDVKLQJOLTXLG
HQW!
ࠉ ࠉ ࠉ
5
3/($6(:$,7 5(029(&$3*20 &/($1,1*
HQW! 3/($6(:$,7
ࠉ ࠉ ࠉ

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Operation Flow > Service Mode > #TEST
Rev.
8.5.2 #TEST 1.0
7(67
7(67
&+(&.3$77(51 !
6(16257(67 !
&$575,'*(6(1625 !
&+(&.0(025< !
.(<%2$5'7(67 !
7(67/&' !
&+(&.7(03 !
&+(&.,1.,& !
&+(&.89/(9(/ !
$*(,1* !
&+(&.(1&2'(5 !
(9(17/2* !
1
&+(&.0(66$*( !
7(67+$5':$5( !
9DOYH7HVW !
$LU3UHVVXUH&KHFN !
0(18',63/$<7(67 !
1&8 !
6'&DUG !
2SWLRQ&KHFN !
%,70$3 !
/(' !
',63/$&(0(17 !
$&7,21 !
.HEDE !
!!
2
7(67&+(&.3$77(51 6NLSSHGZKHQ6KRW3RVLWLRQHYDOXDWLRQLVVHOHFWHG
6NLSSHGZKHQ)(('LVVHOHFWHG
&+(&.3$77(51 &+(&.3$77(51 &+(&.3$77(51 &+(&.3$77(51

3$77(51㸸 ;'3,㸸 <'3,㸸 3/27㸸81,'SDVV

2QO\ZKHQVHOHFWLQJYHUWLFDOOLQHVKRUL]RQWDOOLQHVGLDJRQDOOLQHVJULG
3
6NLSSHGZKHQ*5,'LVVHOHFWHG
&+(&.3$77(51 &+(&.3$77(51 &+(&.3$77(51 &+(&.3$77(51 &+(&.3$77(51

:,'7+GRWV %(7:((1GRWV *5,'6,=(PP ; < &2/25>FP<&0.::@

+($'7(03&21752/
&+(&.3$77(51 3/($6(:$,7 3/($6(:$,7 &+(&.3$77(51
3$77(51㸸3/27 35,17,1*
!>@
9$&88012==/(

Rev.
8.5.2 #TEST 1.0
7(676(16257(67
6(16257(67 6(16257(67 6(16257(67 6(16257(67

&29(5 23(1 <RUJ 21 ;RUJ 21 =RUJ 21
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83

>(17@8VHWKHҍҎNH\VWRVZLWFKEHWZHHQGLVSOD\V
6(16257(67 6(16257(67 6(16257(67 6(16257(67

:,3(5RUJ 21 ZRUNVQV 21 ,QN/YO616/R 21 ,QN/YO616+L 21
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
6(16257(67
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
6(16257(67
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
6(16257(67
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
6(16257(67
1
,QN/YO616/PW 21 ,QN/YO616/R 21 ,QN/YO616+L 21 ,QN/YO616/PW 21
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
2
6(16257(67 6(16257(67 6(16257(67 6(16257(67
,QN/YO616/R 21 ,QN/YO616+L 21 ,QN/YO616/PW 21 ,QN/YO616/R 21
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
6(16257(67 6(16257(67 6(16257(67 6(16257(67

,QN/YO616+L 21 ,QN/YO616/PW 21 ,QN/YO616/R 21 ,QN/YO616+L 21
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
6(16257(67
,QN/YO616/PW 21
6(16257(67
,QN/YO616/R 21
6(16257(67
,QN/YO616+L 21
6(16257(67
,QN/YO616/PW 21
3
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
6(16257(67 6(16257(67 6(16257(67 6(16257(67

,QN/YO616/R 21 ,QN/YO616+L 21 ,QN/YO616/PW 21 ,QN/YO616/R 21
4
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
6(16257(67 6(16257(67 6(16257(67 6(16257(67

,QN/YO616+L 21 ,QN/YO616/PW 21 380302725 21 380302725 21
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
6(16257(67 6(16257(67 6(16257(67 6(16257(67
5
:$7(5)/2$7616 21 %277/(7$1. 21 %277/(7$1. 21 %277/(7$1. 21
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
6(16257(67 6(16257(67 6(16257(67 6(16257(67

%277/(7$1. 21 %277/(7$1. 21 %277/(7$1. 21 %277/(7$1. 21
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
6(16257(67
%277/(7$1. 21
6(16257(67
&29(5 &/26(
6(16257(67
)5217&29(5 &/26(
6
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83 7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
7(67&$575,'*(6(1625
(1'
7
&$57

7(67&+(&.0(025<
&+(&.0(025<
&+(&.6'5$0 ! &+(&.0(025<
&+(&.)520 ! 6'5$0
&+(&.65$0 !

&+(&.0(025<
)520
8

&+(&.0(025<
65$0


Rev.
8.5.2 #TEST 1.0
7(67.(<%2$5'7(67
>(1'@
.(<%2$5'7(67 .(<%2$5'7(67
.H\!121(0 >(1'@!7(670 0

7(677(67/&'
6ZLWFKWRDIXOOVFUHHQFRORUGLVSOD\㸦1RWH[W㸧
1
7(67&+(&.7(03
&+(&.7(03 &+(&.7(03 &+(&.7(03 &+(&.7(03

+($'D Υ +($'E Υ +($'D Υ +($'E Υ
2

8VHWKHҍҎNH\VWRVZLWFKEHWZHHQGLVSOD\V
&+(&.7(03 &+(&.7(03 &+(&.7(03 &+(&.7(03

+($'D Υ +($'E Υ +($'D Υ +($'E Υ

&+(&.7(03 &+(&.7(03 &+(&.7(03 &+(&.7(03

/('89 Υ /('89 Υ /('89 Υ /('89 Υ
&+(&.7(03

&+(&.7(03

&+(&.7(03

&+(&.7(03

3
/&' Υ :$7(5+($7(5 Υ 89'59B Υ 89'59B Υ

4
&+(&.7(03 &+(&.7(03 &+(&.7(03 &+(&.7(03
89'59B Υ 89'59B Υ 89'59B Υ 89'59B Υ

7(67&+(&.,1.,&
&+(&.,1.,& &17
BBBBBB
5

7(67&+(&.89/(9(/
&+(&.89/(9(/
&+(&.89212)) ! /DPS3DWWHUQ 89/DPS&KHFN 0RYHLQJQRZ 3OHDVHRSHQFRYHU
7(6789,//80,1$1&( ! /('&\FOH &$55,$*(287 3/($6(:$,7
897HPSHUDWXUH !

6
/('&\FOH
8''59 2)) 89/$03 3OHDVHFORVHWKHFRYHU 0RYHLQJQRZ
/('$%&' &203/(7(' HQW &RPSOHWHG >(17@ 3/($6(:$,7
$8720$7,&
&\FOH6BBBBBB9BBBB)
Ў'$7$&/($5
:KHQ/('%ORFNRU/('$OOLVVHOHFWHGLQ/DPS3DWWHUQ
8''59 RII
/('$%&'
7

&+(&.89/(9(/
&+(&.89/(9(/ 6WDUW&KHFN89 $872 ! &+(&.,1*
6(77+(722/㸸HQW 67$57&+(&.89 0$18$/ ! 3/($6(:$,7
3LQQLQJ8QLW III
89/HYHO
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
&+(&.,1* 892))
; <
8
7$%/(+(,*+7
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
&+(&.89/(9(/ $*(,1*
89/(9(/ 897HPSUHWXUH
67$578921 HQW
;6 $
<6 $
=836 ࠉ$


Rev.
8.5.2 #TEST 1.0
7(67$*(,1*
$*(,1*
;<=$*(,1* !
;<$*(,1* !
;$*(,1* !
<$*(,1* !
=$*(,1* !
,QNGLVFKDUJHSXPS !
:,3(502725 !
:,3(+($' !
&$33,1* !
&/($1,1* !
)/86+,1* !
.HEDE !
1
;PHDVXUH !
;PHDVXUH !
=PHDVXUH !
=DJHLQJ !
&20 !
$JHLQJ7RWDO7LPH !
;<PHDVXUH !
,1,725,*,1 !
&,5&8/$7,21>(17@ !
$LU3XPS !
+27:753803 !
!!
2
7(67$*(,1*;<=$*(,1*
;<=$*(,1* ;<=$*(,1* ;<=$*(,1*

=836 $ ='16 $ =

;<=$*(,1* ;<=$*(,1* ;<=$*(,1* ;<=$*(,1*

;6 $ <6 $ ; <
3
;6 $
<6 $
=836 $

7(67$*(,1*;<$*(,1*
;<$*(,1* ;<$*(,1* ;<$*(,1* ;<$*(,1*

;6 $ <6 $ ; <
;6 $
<6 $
=836 $

7(67$*(,1*;$*(,1*
;$*(,1*
;6 $
;$*(,1*
;
;$*(,1*

;6 $
4
<6 $
=836 $

7(67$*(,1*<$*(,1*
5
25,*,16(783 <$*(,1* <$*(,1* <$*(,1*
<$*(,1* <$*(,1* <$*(,1* <$*(,1*
-2*(17 )OXVKLQJ <6 $ VWHS㸸 <
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
<$*(,1*
<$*(,1*

;㸸6 $
<㸸6 $
=83㸸6 $

7(67$*(,1*=$*(,1*
=$*(,1*
=836 $
=$*(,1*
='16 $
=$*(,1*
=
=$*(,1*

6
;6 $
<6 $
=836 $

7(67$*(,1*,QNGLVFKDUJHSXPS
7
,QNGLVFKDUJHSXPS ,QNGLVFKDUJHSXPS ,QNGLVFKDUJHSXPS ,QNGLVFKDUJHSXPS
7DEOH326)5217 &$32)) 3803>@ 023'(1HJDWLYH3UHVVXUH

,QNGLVFKDUJHSXPS ,QNGLVFKDUJHSXPS ,QNGLVFKDUJHSXPS ,QNGLVFKDUJHSXPS

63(('USP $&&USPV (;(&7,0(V 3/($6(:$,7
8

,QNGLVFKDUJHSXPS ,QNGLVFKDUJHSXPS
380367$57HQW 5(0$,17,0(VV


Rev.
8.5.2 #TEST 1.0
7(67$*(,1*:,3(502725
:,3(502725 :,3(502725 :,3(502725

63(('USP 75<7,0(6 5(0$,1

7(67$*(,1*:,3(+($'
:,3(+($' :,3(+($'
1
75<7,0(6 5(0$,1

7(67$*(,1*&$33,1*
$*(,1*&$33,1* $*(,1*&$33,1* $*(,1*&$33,1*

:DLWLQJWLPHV (;(&7,0(LQILQ
2

7(67$*(,1*&/($1,1*
&/($1,1* &/($1,1* &/($1,1* &/($1,1*

+($'>PF<&0.::@ 7<3(QRUPDO 7(6735,17㸸2)) 75<7,0(6

&/($1,1*
3
5(0$,1

7(67$*(,1*)/86+,1*
)/86+,1* )/86+,1*VKRW )/86+,1* )/86+,1*

'276$=(/ GURS 5()5(6+/(9(/ 75<7,0(6 5(0$,1
4

7(67$*(,1*ࠉ.HEDE
.HEDE
;6 $

7(67$*(,1*ࠉ;PHVXUH
5
;PHDVXUH ;PHDVXUH ;PHDVXUH ;PHDVXUH
;6 $ 6(/(&7PP ;VWHSPP ;ZDLW

;PHDVXUH
3㸸PPPRYH

7(67$*(,1*ࠉ;PHVXUH

6
;6 $ 6(/(&7PP ;6WDUW3RVLWLRQ PP ;VWURNH㸸PP

7
;VWHSPP ;ZDLW 02'(/()7 3㸸PPPRYH

7(67$*(,1*ࠉ=PHVXUH
25,*,16(783
=PHDVXUH =PHVXUH =PHVXUH =PHVXUH
-2*(17 )OXVKLQJ =6 $ =VWDUWSRV㸸PP =VWURNH㸸PP
8
7$%/('2:19$&8807$%/(83
=PHVXUH =PHDVXUH
=PRYHVWHS㸸PP 3㸸PPPRYH


Rev.
8.5.2 #TEST 1.0
7(67$*(,1*ࠉ=DJDLQJ
=DJHLQJ =DJHLQJ =DJHLQJ =DJHLQJ

=6 $ =VWDUWSRVPP =VWURNHPP =SXOVHFRXQW

=DJHLQJ =DJLQJ
=ZDLWV 3㸸PPPRYH

7(67$*(,1*&20

1
&20 &20
'(9,&(6/&767 '(9,&(6/&767

2
7(67$*(,1*$JHLQJ7RWDO7LPH
$*(LQJ
;7RWDO2+206 ;7RWDO2+206
<7RWDO2+206 ,1,7,$/2."HQW
=7RWDO2+206

<7RWDO2+206
,1,7,$/2."HQW

3
=7RWDO2+206
,1,7,$/2."HQW

4
7(67$*(,1*;<PHDVXUH
;<PHDVXUH ;<PHDVXUH ;<PHDVXUH ;<PHDVXUH

;6 $ <6 $ ;VWHSPP ;ZDLW

;<PHDVXUH ;<PHDVXUH
(&(&87(HQW 3㸸PPPRYH
5

7(67$*(,1*,1,725,*,1
,1,725,*,1
(&(&87(HQW

6
7(67$*(,1*&,5&8/$7,21
&,5&8/$7,21 &,5&8/$7,21 &,5&8/$7,21 &,5&8/$7,21

63(('USP $&&USP &$32)) (;(&7,0(V

&,5&8/$7,21 &,5&8/$7,21
380367$57HQW 5(0$,17,0(VV
7

7(67$*(,1*$LU3XPS
$LU3XPS $LU3XPS $LU3XPS $LU3XPS $LU3XPS

63(('USP $&&USP (;(&7,0(V 380367$57HQW 5(0$,17,0(VV

8
7(67$*(,1*+27:753803
+27:753803 +27:753803 +27:753803

(;(&7,0(V 380367$57HQW 5(0$,17,0(VV


Rev.
8.5.2 #TEST 1.0
7(67&+(&.(1&2'(5
&+(&.(1&2'(5 &+(&.(1&2'(5
<(QFRGHU ! <(QFRGHU
$XWR-XGJ ! 0PP SXOV
25*(1&2'(5 ! (PPSXOV

&+(&.(1&2'(5 &+(&.(1&2'(5 3/($6(:$,7

<6 $ (;(&87( HQW
1

0 ( 0V (V 0U (U

0F (F 0P (P

25*(1&2'(5
;
2
<

7(67(9(17/2*
(9(17/2*
1R 8VHWKHҍҎNH\VWRVZLWFKEHWZHHQGLVSOD\V
F
',63,1,7
(9(17/2*
1R(9(17
NH\ (1'
(9(17/2*
,1,7,$/2."HQW 3
',63,1,7
7(67&+(&.0(66$*(
&+(&.0(66$*( (5525
4
:$51,1*0(66$*( &/$03212))

&+(&.0(66$*(
(55250(66$*( /2*2
6<67(0+$/7
67$7,21(55
5
7(677(67+$5':$5(
7(67+$5':$5(
6(/(&72XW3RUW

7(679DOYH7HVW
9DOYH7HVW
:D\$LU9DOYH ! :D\$LU9DOYH
6
:D\$LU9DOYH ! BBBB
,QN9DOYH !

:D\$LU9DOYH
BB

7
,QN9DOYH
BBBBBB

7(67$LU3UHVVXUH&KHFN
$LU3UHVVXUH&KHFN
1HJDWLYH3UHVVXUH ! 31_3 3/($6(:$,7
3RVLWLYH3UHVVXUH ! 380321> @
$WPRVSKHULF3UHVVXUH !
8
9$/9(
31 3_ 3/($6(:$,7

380321> @
9$/9(
31 3 3/($6(:$,7

38032))> @
9$/9(

Rev.
8.5.2 #TEST 1.0
7(670(18',63/$<7(67
0(18',63/$<7(67
/2&$/
2))/,1(!
5(027(
21/,1(

7(671&8
1&8
6(1625&+.HQW! !
1
6/$17$'-867 !
6KRW3RVLWLRQDGMXVW !
/(9(/$'-HQW! !
1R]]OH&KHFN !
1R]]OH&KHFN(DVLQJ !
1&83DUDPHWHU !
35$0(7(5 !
3ULQW !
9$&880!!
7(671&86(1625&+.
&+(&./,*+792/ 6(16&+(&.7+' 180%(52)(;( 1&8
2
6WDUW

7(67ࠉ1&8ࠉ6/$17$'-867
1&8
6WDUW
3

7(67ࠉ1&8ࠉ6KRW3RVLWLRQ$GMXVW
&+(&./,*+792/ :,'7+ 1&8

6WDUW

7(67ࠉ1&8ࠉ/(9(/$'-
4
&+(&./,*+792/ 6(16&+(&.7+' 1&8
6WDUW

7(67ࠉ1&8ࠉ1R]]OH&KHFN
1=//,1(6(/(&7 1&8

6WDUW

7(67ࠉ1&8ࠉ1R]]OH&KHFN(DVLQJ

5
1&8
6WDUW


Rev.
8.5.2 #TEST 1.0
7(67ࠉ1&8ࠉ1&83DUDPHWHU
6+2767$570$5. 6+27326$'-867 6+271=/&+(&. 12==/(3$77(51 0,&529,%5$7,21

6.,37,00( XV :$9()250 '276,=( 60/ 1=//,1(6(/(&7 6+27326,7,21 PP

1

&+(&./,*+792/ 326$'-/,*+792/ 6(16&+(&.7+' 6(16$'-7+' 326$'-7+'

&/(11,1*,179 +($'3$77(51 12==/(3$77(51$872 7(6735,17 &$321,19
2
IIII

1=/6(/(&7 1=/6(/(&7 6/$176&$1/(1 PP ('*-'*$' 5()5(6+

IIII IIII

3
6KDGLQJ3XOVH7KUHVKROG X6HF +($'92/7$'-867

7(67ࠉ1&8ࠉ3$5$0(7(5
6+27326,7,21 PP + 6+27326,7,21 PP + 6+27326,7,21 PP + 6+27326,7,21 PP + 6+27326,7,21 PP +

6+27326,7,21 PP +

4

7(67ࠉ1&8ࠉ3ULQW
1&8
35,1767$57HQW

5

Rev.
8.5.2 #TEST 1.0
7(67ࠉ6'&DUG
6'&DUG
5:&KHFN !
)$77\SH !
$OORF8QLW6L]H !
&RQQHFWLRQ !
6L]H !
6HFWRU !
6HFWRU !
7HVW'DWD&OHDU !
%ODQN6L]H !
)RUPDW !
6HWWLQJ !
([DPLQH !
5HSHDW !
1
7LPH !
9$&880!!
7(67ࠉ6'&DUG5:&KHFN
5:&KHFN 5:ࠉ&KHFN
3/($6(:$,7

2
7(67ࠉ6'ࠉ&DUG)$77\SH
)$77\SH )$77\SH
3/($6(:$,7

7(67ࠉ6'&DUG$OORF8QLW6L]H
3
$OORF8QLW6L] $OORF8QLW6L]
3/($6(:$,7

7(67ࠉ6'&DUG&RQQHFWLRQ
&RQQHFWLRQ &RQQHFWLRQ
3/($6(:$,7
4

7(67ࠉ6'&DUG6L]H
6L]H 6L]H
3/($6(:$,7

7(67ࠉ6'&DUG6HFWRU
6HFWR
3/($6(:$,7

6HFWR

5
7(67ࠉ6'&DUG6HFWR
6HFW$GU

7(67ࠉ6'&DUG7HVW'DWD&OHDU
6
7HVW'DWD&OHD 7HVW'DWD&OHD
3/($6(:$,7


Rev.
8.5.2 #TEST 1.0
7(67ࠉ6'&DUG%ODQN6L]H
%ODQN6L]H %ODQN6L]H
3/($6(:$,7

7(67ࠉ6'&DUG)RUPDW
)RUPDW )$7$/&.%
)$7$/&.%(17! )RUPDW2.㸽(17!

7(67ࠉ6'&DUG6HWWLQJ

1
6HWWLQJ &WUO 0+]
&ORFN(17! &DUG 0+]

7(67ࠉ6'&DUG([DPLQH
([DPLQH
$GGUHVV(GLW

$GU
!

$GGUHVV(GLW

2
7(67ࠉ6'&DUG5HSHDW
5HSHDW 7RS>㺜㺖㺞@ 6HFW5:& 5HS

6HFW5:& 5HS (17! 6L]H>.%@ &QW(UU
3

7(67ࠉ6'&DUG7LPH
7LPH 7RS>6HFW@ 6HFW5:& 7LPH

6HFW5:& 7LPH (17! 6L]H>.%@ 7LPV(UU

7(672SWLRQ&KHFN
4
2SWLRQ ,RQL]HU
,RQL]HU ! 3RZHU2XWSXW 2))
,RQ2XWSXW 2))

7(67%,70$3
%,70$31R
5

7(67ࠉ/('
/('
2))

7(67ࠉ',63/$&(0(17
6
+($'7(03&21752/
3/($6(:$,7 7(67
35,17,1*
!>@

7(67$&7,21
9$&880)$1 89/(')$1 89'5,9(5)$1

2)) 2)) 2))
7

7(67.HEDE
.HEDE
$&7,21 ! .HEDEPRWHU
6(16257(67 ! 2))

.HEDERUJLQ 21
8
.HEDEPHGLD


MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Appendix
Appendix
9.1 8
Ink Relation

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Appendix > Initial charging of Ink
Rev.
9.1.1 Initial charging of Ink 1.2
 Work Procedure
1. Turn the power of the printer on.

Turn power on When the power is turned ON, [BOOT] is displayed.
Boot UJF-3042MkII
2. Start with the service mode. 1

Start the device with the service mode pushing and holding
[FUNC1] key and [FUNC3] key for a few seconds until the
firmware version is displayed.
ver1.00
UJF-3042MkII 2
3. Wait for a while until “LOCAL” is displayed.
Initial Filling screen
4. Push [FUNC1] key when “LOCAL” is displayed. 3

INK TYPE
:LH-100
MENU TEST PRINT/

CLEANING REMOTE
4
5. Press the[]/ [] keys and select ink type, and then press the
[ENTER] key.
INK SET [LH-100]
5
:LcLmYCMKWW
6. Move the carriage over the table.

6
PLEASE WAIT
8
7. Open the front under cover T.
Front under cover T

Rev.
8. Fully apply the cleaning solution to the cap auxiliary rubber on

both sides.
SET CAPGOM
<ent>  If not applying the washing liquid, leakage may
occur and the filling cannot be done. Make sure to
carry out.
 The number of the cap to use is as follows.
1
3 head model: 3
4 head model: 4
Cap auxiliary rubber Dipping the cap auxiliary rubber into the cleaning
solution will reduce the leakage.
9. Attach the cap auxiliary rubber to all caps.

Fix the cap auxiliary rubber by putting its holes into the pins at
2
the front and back of the cap.
Be careful of the face
direction of the cap
auxiliary rubber. Face
the side jumping out on
To the front
3
the top to the front.
10. After attaching, press the [ENTER] key to move into the initial
filling sequence. 4
1
11. Install the ink IC after attaching all ink bottles to the ink supply
unit.
FILL UP INK
SET INK BOTTLE :ent In case of 3 head model
Special Special
color color 5
1 2 7 8
3 4 5 6
6
FILL UP INK Y C M K
SET INK IC
Ink bottle In case of 4 head model 7

Lc or Lm or 7 8
Special Special Special Special
color color color color
3 4 5 6
8
Y C M K
Ink IC
12. When all ink ICs are set, it moves to the filling process. 9

Rev.
13. Wait until the filling is completed.
FILL UP
PLEASE WAIT
About
1
25 minutes
14. When the screen shown in the left figure appears, remove the
cap auxiliary rubber.
REMOVE CAPGOM
<ent> As for the removed cap auxiliary rubber, keep it with
blocking the light in a waste like material after
2
washing.
FILL UP
3
PLEASE WAIT
About
25 minutes
4
LOCAL
MENU TEST REMOTE
5
16. Close the front under cover T.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Appendix > Ink set change procedure
Rev.
9.1.2 Ink set change procedure 1.1
 Outline
The procedures to change the ink type are as below.
Replacing the damper is required, therefore, it will be responded on an on-call basis.
 Conditions for replacing parts
 Preventing mixture of colors: When replacing the head, which used the white ink, with a clear or primer one.
(To prevent it from getting cloudy with remaining white ink)
When replacing the head, which used the white ink, with a clear or primer one, ensure the working time
for about four hours.
1
 Preparations
Necessary tools and parts.
No.
1
Type name
Bottle tank, Sub-tank
Type number Qty. 2
1~8(*1)
2 Washing liquid bottle SPC-0568 1
3 Phillips driver
*1): The number of sub-tank required for replacement differs depending on the contents of ink setting change.
 Procedure 3
1. Execute the “Head Wash”. (Refer to 4.2.9 Head Wash)
2. Execute the “Initial Filling”. (Refer to 9.1.1 Initial charging of Ink) 4

3. Replace the ink color plate on the bottle tank Assy.
e.g. W --> Pr or CL

MEMO
D501202-15-10112017 KW
©2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.

UJF-3042 - 6042MKII Maintenance Manual D501202 Ver.1.50

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

UJF-3042 - 6042MKII Maintenance Manual D501202 Ver.1.50

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Documents

MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD.

Maintenance Manual Change Tracking

Date 2017.11.10 Manual Ver. 1.5 Remark

Date 2017.10.10 Manual Ver. 1.4 Remark

Revised 8.1.6 1.1 Important Parameter No.171 added.

Date 2017.03.10 Manual Ver. 1.3 Remark

© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. Maintenance Manual Change Tracking P.1

Maintenance Manual Change Tracking

Date 2017.03.10 Manual Ver. 1.3 Remark

Date 2016.12.16 Manual Ver. 1.20 Remark

Date 2016.10.24 Manual Ver. 1.10 Remark

© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. Maintenance Manual Change Tracking P.2

Maintenance Manual Change Tracking

Date 2016.10.24 Manual Ver. 1.10 Remark

© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. Maintenance Manual Change Tracking P.3

Maintenance Manual Change Tracking

Date 2016.10.24 Manual Ver. 1.10 Remark

Date 2016.08.29 Manual Ver. 1.00 Remark

© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. Maintenance Manual Change Tracking P.4

Symbol Name Description

Reference Related description is given on the page shown by this symbol.

Indicates a precaution to be observed as a CAUTION instruction (or DANGER or

Indicates an action prohibited. A sign indicating a prohibited action is shown in or

Indicates an action to be taken without fail or the instructions to be observed. The

© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. R.1.0 P.1

II. Safety Precautions 1.0

 Repairing by a user is strictly prohibited.

 Be sure to use with the specified power supply.

© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. R.1.0 P.1

Abnormal event occurs

Handling of the power cable

 Use the supplied power cable.

Handling of ink bottles

Power supply and voltage

© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. R.1.0 P.2

Handling of Anti-freezing liquid

© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. R.1.0 P.3

As for firing and smoking

As for hot parts

Handling of the washing liquid

Precautions for LED-UV

© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. R.1.0 P.4

As for Ultraviolet (UV) rays

As for waste ink

© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. R.1.0 P.5

III. Warning Label 1.0

© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. R.1.0 P.1

Order No. Label Label description

Order No. Label Label description

Order No. Label Label description

Order No. Label Label description

Order No. Label Label description

© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. 1.0 P.2

Order No. Label Label description

Order No. Label Label description

Order No. Label Label description

Order No. Label Label description

Order No. Label Label description

Order No. Label Label description

© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. 1.0 P.3

1 Service Outline / Operating Principle 2.3.18 Negative Pressure Sensor 73 PCB

1.3 Ink System 3 Workflow